EJ1 Modular Temperature Controllers User`s Manual
Contents
1.2. E ait mi o EJ10 TC4 a LB or EJ1LJ HFU EJ10 TC2 EJ111 EDU PLC Port A connector USB connection E can be made using the E58 CIFQ1 ole Sia Sos San 7 sold separately CX Thermo for setting NY NY N j i T i el da las las ae ED sie E a ao e e Sa go sul Z Computer AINI Ne i g AS IZA Port B is used for distributed dl ada Ske e Sd Bo Ea SAE ss O ES placement GaL das Olas o KD ED 180 KD O O O VOPOPO PSOPOPO HOSP Lees OOOOO O LEO Mi gt OL 0 ppo POGIDO OO000 SOVDODO SdODODO O0000 DEMO G3ZA G3ZA G3ZA 28 Unit Configuration Examples Section 2 4 2 4 1 Connection Precautions Restrictions on the Number of Units that Can Be Connected e Unit numbers 0 to 63 can be used for EJ1 HFU and EJ1 TC4 TC2 Units e Up to 16 Units including the HFU can be co
3. m On P a OE E E L ia i ik Ela lolo i 3 Press in on the Units t 4 Make sure the Units are locked into place Removal Method Pull down on the hooks with a flat blade screwdriver and lift up on the Units Pain o mua gt ts BA Flat blade screwdriver a E unit mm 5 ql c MT lez MT Ji E aor JE Elo lolo sj Flat blade screwdriver 14 Installation Section 2 1 End Plate Installation Always mount an End Plate on each side of the EJ1 PFP M End Plates 2 PFP M Removing Terminal Blocks
4. ETE A BEH Im f Connect the G3ZA Connecting Cable to the CN1 connector on the bottom of the TC Unit Connecting to the G3ZA Power Controller Set SW2 to 3 57 6 kbps Connect the black line with a white stripe to terminal 7 on the G3ZA and the black d tJ b line with no stripe to terminal 8 UL EJ1 CBLA050 order separately cable length 5 m Wiring Terminals 1 lt gt Bl 2 lt gt A TC4 2 Section 2 2 Connecting to the G3PW Power Controller Set the baud rate to 57 6 kbps default value using key operations For details refer to the G3PW Operation Manual Connect the black line with a white stripe to terminal 1 on the G3ZA and the black line with no stripe to terminal 2 EJ1 CBLAOD5O0 order separately cable length 5 m Use a JST Mfg Co Ltd PA connector Housings Model PAP 02V S Crimp Terminals Model SPHD 001T P0 5 Use an EJ1 CBLA050 Cable manufactured by OMRON The EJ1 contains 120 Q of terminati
5. EJ111 TC4 or EJ10 TC2 EU EDO od Port A connector USB connection a can be made using the E58 CIFQ1 eJ S e Ol sold separately CX Thermo for setting ED ED ota des da da Z5 Z Z yN a EN a ED aa Laa Lo SAE as SA ES gt VAI as PLC PT Computer O O O SOPOVO DODDO SOPOPO LOOSE O GOO O DOOP ei ei 30 0 i L 0 OOOO O SOGOSO DDD SOLVODO SOLVODO SOLVODO O DEMO DEMO G3ZA G3ZA G3ZA 27 Unit Configuration Examples Section 2 4 Multiple Units with an HFU e The two auxiliary alarm outputs transistor outputs provided on the End Unit can be used e In addition to the two auxiliary alarm outputs provided on the End Unit the four event inputs and four transistor outputs on the HFU can be used e G3ZA or G3PW outputs can be used e Distributed placement is possible by using multiple End Units BO
6. Turn ON Be pin 8 on D SW2 ele ele ele Sl SIs Bs ds lee da us los B a Bas S Mbs Mia ala Ss alles Los Sele Eos SAs Eos lbs Salas ES bs dos SED ED E E ES Adi ola Alas Alas ala Ola N s sl N a S2 esis S Eg 2 Cae Gas dae Ga Cae EJ1LJ HFU EJ10 TC4 EJ1LJ EDU EJ1LI TC4 EJ10 EDU or or EJ1O TC2 Ea Up to 16 Units can be connected side by side EDU Units are not counted in the number of Units that can be connected Precautions when Not e Up to 16 TC4 TC2 Units can be connected horizontally to one End Unit If Using an HFU End Units are connected with Communications Cables for distributed position then up to 64 Basic Units can be connected to one host device Note 1 The host device and End Units are not counted when calculating the limit of 64 Basic Units 2 Set the unit numbers of the Basic Units to between O and 63 Be sure not to set the same number for more than one Basic Unit e If distributed positioning is used for an EJ1 power must be supplied sepa rately to the terminal block on the End Units 29 Unit Configuration Examples Section 2 4 e When using distributed position connect like ports on the End Units e If port A on the terminal blocks is connected for distributed position then the port A connector can be connected to a computer usi
7. a RS 232C RS 422A 485 EJ1 CJ1 series PLC HFU TC4 TC4 TC4 EDU z z EN O uz cua Oz fura da Ba a Saa Se fal ad lee a Sala 0 j ada eel M8 El ES amp o ol BE ap eae al le Sel Geel celal ote ie ell des des daa da E uy a F y F RS 232C Sensor inputs _ _ aa a amp SS L aif a Workpiece i i e Control outputs gt Y E e a K wo e e ae G3NA Solid State Relays e If an EJ1LJ HFU is used a ladder program does not have to be created to exchange data such as temperature readings and alarm status with the PLC Also up to 16 Basic Units can be connected to a single HFU to expand the system to a maximum of 64 channels When using version MAR 32 Basic Units can be connected to a single HFU to expand the system to a maximum of 128 channels 41 Control Linked to a Host Device Section 3 3 3 3 2 Wiring Connect the Temperature Sensors to the input terminals according to the sen sor s input type e Connect the Solid State Relays to the output terminals e Connect the PLC with an RS 232C communications cable Wire the circuits as shown below when using an EJ1LJ HFU and three EJ1L
8. TC4 Units The following diagram shows the wiring for just one of the EJ1Ll TC4 Units EJ1L1 TC4 E AD B2 OUTA4 AS B3 a OUT3 BA S As A5 IN4 66 Heater w AS Temperature amp eS 87 A Sensor o En NI E A8 N3 ME Serial Communications EJ1LJ HFU Board Unit a NG SW2 settings EJ10 HFU SD SW2 Description RD RS 232C 8 ON RS 232C is selected SG CJ1W CIF11 EJ C EDU To NS8 u communications RS 485 port A _ Description ON Terminator connected ON 2 wire method ON 2 wire method 24 VDC Not used OFF No RS control of RD continual reception ON RS control of SD Note Port B cannot be used when the HFU EJ1LJ HFU is used 42 Control Linked to a Host Device Section 3 3 3 3 3 Setup TC4 HFU Refer to 3 2 Multi channel Control for details on the EJ1L TC4 settings The settings are made through communications The CX Thermo Support Software can be connected using an E58 CIFQ1 Connecting Cable to set the parameters from a personal computer e The following table shows the parameters related to communications between the EJ1 and PLC as well as example settings Set the unit num ber of the HFU to 0 Parameter Set value Remarks Initial setting level Port C Communications Baud Rate 115 2 kbps Port C Communications Data Length See n
9. 31 31 Models with Screw less Clamp Terminals 104 85 lt gt lt gt SS gt 7N aad gt pun omron com i a TN an EJi TCA Cow ALM m i Lien m ES EJ ES pu RI EN sa EZ io amp O Es KW OS ox xb a ES NY d E leas SP a TS PEL ag JE AE A SARS r SSR O LU y V gt x 5 E ce Models with Screw Models with Screw less Terminals Clamp Terminals EDU Models with Screw Terminals 76 2 Connector terminal block model 79 7 60 y 15 7 a pa a FJ Wo T A eel al Gp p lO Ep So 4 TO I T A i Ep Ge qT S E Y AA Y EDUA EDUC Models with Connector Screw terminal block Terminals model 12 Installation Section 2 1 2 1 2 Mounting and Removing Terminal Blocks Connecting Units 1 2 3 1 Align the connectors and connect the Units to each other S gt gt ED Ga z Ss 5 SS SS ria avy S75 PE 4 a EG LERN f EG il N OMRON 1 7 Coma EIF EF 3 FE 2 e D S e r 0 ni a i f F H e o i e i e I lg J g y
10. 30 Unit Configuration Examples Note Connecting the G3ZA or G3PW to the EJ1 Note Section 2 4 Wire the connections indicated with dotted lines when settings for all EJ1 Controllers are being made from one port A connector If the connections indi cated with dotted lines are not wired the settings for group A can be made only using the port A connector for group A and the settings for group B can be made only using the port A connector for group B e Up to 8 G3ZA Multi channel Power Controllers or G3PW Power Control lers can be connected to one TC4 TC2 Unit However the G3ZA and G3PW cannot be used together Either turn ON the power to the G3ZA or G3PW first or turn ON the power to the G3ZA or G3PW simultaneously with the EJ1 EJ1L1 or EJ1L1 okas RDIRSIRDIRSIRD IRD IRDIREIRD NOS N TC4 TC2 A QOOOG POPOPO 0 OPROJOO GUOODO O EJ1C EDU OOOO SROJOO GQALODO PEPPVOO aL O QOOOO QO OOG 301 ODOOOO ORODOO Connect a terminating resistor only to the end G3ZA node 110 to 125 Q 1 2 W G3ZA Up to 8 G3ZA Power Controllers can be connected to one TC Unit 31 Unit Configuration Examples Restrictions on Connections and Placement 32 Section 2 4
11. SYSMAC CP Series CP1L CPU Unit Introduction Manual E G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller Manual Name Contents G3ZA Z200 Provides an outline of and describes the features G3ZA 4H203 FLK UTU installation wiring RS 485 serial communications G3ZA 4H403 FLK UTU settings and basic function for the G3ZA Multi G3ZA 8H203 FLK UTU channel Power Controller G3ZA 8H403 FLK UTU Multi channel Power Controller User s Manual E G3PW Power Controller Manual ame Ot NO Comente G3PW Provides an outline of and describes the features G3PW A220EC C FLK installation wiring RS 485 serial communications G3IPW A230EC C FLK settings and basic function for the G3PW Power G3PW A245EC C FLK Controller G3PW A260EC C FLK G3PW A220EC S FLK G3PW A230EC S FLK G3PW A245EC S FLK G3PW A260EC S FLK Power Controller User s Manual E Programmable Terminal PT Manuals Name JE No ontents NS Series Provides an outline of and describes the design NS5 SQ0L1 B V1 V2 NS5 TQOL1 B V2 installation maintenance and other basic opera NS5 MQOL1 B V2 NS8 TV_IL B V1 V2 tions for the NS series PTs Information is also NS10 TVOLI B V1 V2 NS12 TSOL1 B V1 V2 included on connecting to hosts and peripheral NS5 SQ1LJLI V2 NS5 TQ1LILI V2 NS5 MQ1UIL1 V2 devices and settings required for communications Programmable Terminals Setup Manual and PT operation NS Series Describes the functions o
12. 76 d 3 8 TUNNO rr oo He hae ve eee ee See bee eee Ke ee eee ee et 78 4 3 9 Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function 82 4 3 10 Operation during Errors 1 0 ee es 84 4 4 Setting Alarm Specifications 0 0 0 ssassn nananana 86 4 4 1 Alarm Types 0 0 cece eee eee eens 86 4 4 2 Alarm Value nanunua nnana 87 4 4 3 Alarm Hysteresis 0 0 ccc ee ee eens 87 4 4 4 Standby Sequence 88 A 4 5 Alarm Latch 22 o 2 cede eee need eben e whe er eee deb eanes 88 4 4 6 Closed in Alarm or Open in Alarm 00000005 89 4 4 7 Alarm Delay 0 0 eee eee eens 89 4 4 8 Alarm SP Selection 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 90 4 4 9 Channel Alarm Status 0 0 0 ccc ee ee ees 90 4 5 Detecting Current Bars 2c0cusduees sues pan retiri bes Webhaee e 91 4 5 1 CT Assignment TC2 0 0 ee eens 91 4 5 2 Heater Burnout Alarm HB Alarm o ooooo oo 91 4 5 3 Heater Short Alarm HS AlarM o oo ooo oo 98 4 5 4 Heater Overcurrent Alarm OC Alarm oo oo o o o 100 49 50 4 6 Using the Loop Break Alarm LBA 0000 e eee eee Loop Burnout Alarm LBA 0 0 0 cee Other Functions TC4 and TC2 4 7 4 6 1 4 7 1 4 7 2 4 7 3 4 7 4 4 7 5 Bank Function Event Inputs TC2 Internal Buses TC4 and TC2 00 0 00 0 000 0000 Using G3ZA Multi channel Power Controllers
13. Using the G3PW 102 102 104 104 105 106 108 112 Setting Input Specifications Section 4 1 4 1 Setting Input Specifications 4 1 1 Input Type Set the input type to match the type of sensor being used Variable type Setting range Default EO AO Input Type Channel 0 to 29 5 0 to 30 Conditions for use No special conditions Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped List of Input Types inputtype Specifica Set value Platinum Pt100 0 20010850 S00to1500 a Joo fa 1999105000 199 9 to 900 0 E an J 8 200104000 00107500 T e _ 200 0400 30010700 U ON 15 Rite Bite w 19 Pur 20 ESIB Ln Sensor Current Any one of the following ranges input by scaling Voltage 1999 to 9999 input 199 9 to 999 9 Oto 10 V 29 19 99 to 99 99 1 999 to 9 999 Ko EOS 30 199 9 to 999 9 199 9 to 999 9 ture couple 51 Setting Input Specifications Section 4 1 4 1 2 Temperature Inputs E Temperature Unit Either C or F can be selected Variable type Setting range Default EO AO Temperature unit Channel O C 1 F Ca Conditions for use The input type must be set to temperature input Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped E Cold Junction Compensation Method Specifies whether cold junction compensation is performed in the Tempera ture Controller or externally Enable external cold junction compensation w
14. 175 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 Detailed Description of Services 6 4 1 Read from Variable Area This service reads from a variable area E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC Variable Read start Bit No of elements ri a address penn 2 4 E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response Read data code for No of elements No of elements x 8 or 4 1 Variable Type and Read Start Address Refer to Parameter List on page 235 2 Bit Position The EJ1 does not support bit access Fixed to 00 3 No of Elements Read data length No of elements For double word 8 digit variable type 40 max 0028H For word 4 digit variable type Note The following values apply for the DA 9A variable types Read data length For double word 8 digit variable type 25 max 0019H For word 4 digit variable type 50 max 0032H 4 Response Codes Response code Errorname Cause 1001 Command too long The command is too long 1002 Command too short The command is not long enough 1101 Area type error The corresponding variable type does not exist 110B Response too long The number of elements exceeds the maximum 1100 Bit position is not 00 7011 Operation error 7011 The command cannot be executed due to a device error 0000 Normal completion Processing was completed normally 5 Precautions e 0 is set when an address with no data set is read e f the
15. Ojojojojo O O O O JO O JO O O O O IO IO O JO JOJO JO O JOJO O O O O JOJ OJO JO OJO JO O b 2 O O O O O O0FOLSOLSOLSOLOSLOILOILOlLOs lolopyvoys yoy os oOslos slosyayos losl sos loy yoOs so os sos yos yolos yo o oOojojo joO jO O JO JO JO O JO O O O O JO O JOJO JO JO JO O JO JO JO JO O O JO JOJO JO O O JO JO JO JO O JO O O O A a po O oO Oo O Oojojojojo h oOojojo jojoO jO O JO JO JO O 2 A a af afafaf aa O OJO JO O JO O JO JO JO JO O O O O O O JOJO O O O OI IO O O O O O O O O O 2 2 AA fa Aa a af ad ad td ad ld ld df da a RSs tl S Ol IO O O O O O O O Ol O O O JjO JO O O O O O O O O OJO O JO JO OJO O O O O O JOJOJO O JO O O JO O O O JO O O JO O JOJO O O O a a O O O O JO JO 2 2a gt O O O O OJO A a O O O O JO O AL ATO OJO O O OJOJO JO O O A Aa A ALO OJO O JOJO 2 AAA A O O O JOJO O AAA ALTO JO JO JO O JO AAA OIO O O O O O O O O O Al gt a a A df A af ff A a do ld ad da fdo da a af da da da da a a es ld O O O O O O O O O O O a a a A Af A Af ss ss da a af a a a da da da a Oo Oo 153 Programless Communications Section 5 1 5 1 6 Bit specified Operation Commands RUN STOP AT Execute Cancel Auto Manual and other operation com
16. Caution RT Robust Tuning 1 The previous SRT implemented set point is the set point that was used for calculating the PID constants for the previous SRT 2 In this state the measurement point is within the ST stable range 3 Inthis state the change width of the PV every 60 seconds is at the ST sta ble range or less In the following instances PID constants are not changed by self tuning ST for the present set point 1 When the PID constants have been changed with ST enabled 2 When autotuning AT has been executed 3 When switching banks while starting ST Stop self tuning ST PID constants are not changed ST will not start even for banks that have been switched When banks have been switched ST will be implemented for every bank when first operated After the first operation ST will not be implemented until the set points of selected banks have been changed SP 200 ST is executed ST is not executed SP 100 ST is executed Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 0 Bank 1 e When ST is enabled the following functions will be disabled e SP ramp e MV limiter e While SRT is executing the Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function will be disabled When using this function set the following parameters to their default set tings Output Scaling Upper Limit 1 to 4 Output Scaling Lower Limit 1 to 4 and Decimal Point C1 to C4 If these parameters are set to anything other than their defaults ST will not
17. 199 9 to 999 9 EU Conditions for use The control method must be set to heating cooling control Note The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the O decimal point position setting will be treated as setting 1 kkk _ Refer to 4 7 7 Bank Function for details on banks E Manual Reset Value This parameter sets the required manipulated variable to remove the offset during settling in P or PD control Variable type Setting range DO 90 Manual Reset Value BANK 0 0 to 100 0 5 Conditions for use The control method must be set to standard control and 2 PID control and the integral time must be set to 0 E Note Refer to 4 7 1 Bank Function for details on banks Independent heating When using the independent heating cooling PID method the heating and cooling PID method cooling PID can each be set individually Air cooling water cooling and linear control methods can be selected depending on the control characteristics of the cooling side Also autotuning AT will automatically set the PID constants on the cooling side Note For more information on autotuning refer to 4 3 8 Tuning Variable type Setting range Default Independent heating cooling 0 Disabled PID method Channel 1 Air cooling 2 Water cooling 3 Linear Proportional Band Cooling 0 1 to 999 9 EU BANK See note 2 Integral Time Cooling O to 3999 Secon
18. AnA AnU CPU File registers 0000 to 32767 Common Com mands 135 Programless Communications Section 5 1 Note Communications Settings Note Adjusting Communications Time with PLC Note Operation for Error in Programless Link 136 1 Make sure the same address is not allocated in both the Programless Up load Settings and Programless Download Settings 2 Reset the EJ1 to enable settings 3 The ranges of registers that can be used are different for the An series AnS series and FX3UC series PLCs Refer to the PLC manual for de tailed setting ranges The following parameters are used to make the EJ1 communications settings Set these parameters to the same conditions as the PLC Variable type Parameter name Setting Monitor values Port C Communications Baud Rate 3 9 6 kbps Common 4 19 2 kbps 5 38 4 kbps 6 57 6 kbps 7 115 2 kbps Port C Communications Data Length 0 7 bits Common 1 8 bits Port C Communications Parity 0 None Common 1 Even 2 Odd Port C Communications Stop Bits O 1 bit Common 1 2 bits Port C Send Wait Time See Condi O to 99 ms 5 tions for use Common Conditions for use The Programless Communications Protocol cannot be NT Link 1 N Reset the EJ1 to enable settings When using an NT Link use the default settings for all the above parameters With programless communications the time from when the command is sent to the PLC unt
19. C40402 H0003 i e bits O and 1 are ON Channel 4 alarms 1 and 2 are ON C4 84 0000 C4 84 0401 Channel Status i Device Error BitO RUN STOP 1 Configuration Error Bit1 Auto Manual 0 Channel Error C4 84 000B Bit2 AT Execute Cancel 0 Bits SP Mode 0 Not used 0 Bit4 Not used 0 Expand Communications Error O Bit5 Not used 0 Not used 0 Bit6 Not used 0 Not used 0 Bit 7 Not used 0 Not used 0 Bit8 Input Error 0 Not used 0 Not used 0 Bit9 RSP Input Error 0 Not used 0 Not used 0 Bit 10 Not used 0 I O Error 0 Not used 0 Bit 11 Not used 0 Lower level I O Error 9 Not used 0 Bit 12 Not used 0 I O Alarm 0 Not used 0 Bit 13 Not used 0 Lower level I O Alarm O Not used 0 Bit 14 Not used 0 I O Notification 0 Not used 0 Bit15 Not used 0 Not used 0 Not used 0 Not used 0 C4 84 0402 Not used 0 Channel Alarm Status Not used 0 Bito Alarm 1 1 Not used 0 Bit1 Alarm 2 1 Bit2 Alarm 3 0 Bit3 Not used 0 Bit 4 Heater Overcurrent 0 Bit5 HB Alarm 0 Bit6 HS Alarm 0 Bit7 OC Alarm 0 Bit8 Not used 0 Bit9 Not used 0 Bit 10 Not used 0 Bit 11 Not used 0 Bit 12 Set Point Limiter Out of Range 9 Bit 13 SetValue Limiter Reverse Operation O Bit 14 MV Limiter Reverse Operation 0 Bit 15 Scaling Reverse Operation O The CX Thermo Support S
20. To CT input Heater Burnout Occurred 5 A 10 A gt 200 V To CT input To CT input 200 V 200 V Load Heater example Load Heater ago y Sumout example 5 A gt To CT input To CT input Current when there is a burnout 10 A x Current when there is a burnout 0 A 5A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the common is as fol lows 10 5 Heater burnout detection current 2 7 5 A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load is as follows 10 0 2 Heater burnout detection current 5 A To enable detection in either case use 7 5 A as the heater burnout detection current 4 5 3 Heater Short Alarm HS Alarm The HS Alarm detection function measures the heater current when the con trol output heating is OFF For details refer to the following table HS Alarm detection cannot be used with the control output for cooling Control output heating Power to heater HS Alarm output OFF Yes HS alarm occurred No Normal See note 1 98 Detecting Current Errors Note Section 4 5 OFF time ONtime See note 2 ON Control output heating OFF 1 In the above diagram power is considered to be OFF normal if the leak age current is less than the HS alarm current during the OFF time If the SSR output is short circuited the measured current will increase beyond the HS ala
21. 7 5 2 Multiple Write to Variable Area This service writes data to the variable area Command Function code eres Slave Write start No of Byte Write data 1 address address elements count H 10 _ 1 1 2 2 1 Number of elements x 2 bytes SS 2 Response Function code Slave Write start No of address address elements ene H 10 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 1 Write Start Address Refer to Parameter List on page 235 2 No of Elements Specify the number of elements to write The specification range is from H 0001 to H 007F 1 to 127 elements 3 Byte Count Specify the number of bytes of write data Each data element is two bytes so specify two times the number of elements 4 Response Codes Function Error Cause code code H 90 H 01 Function code error A function code that is not supported was specified Variable address error The write start address is not correct H 03 Variable data error e The command is not long enough e The number of elements and number of data items do not agree e The number of elements times two does not agree with byte count e The write data exceeded the setting range e An attempt was made to write to a read only variable type H 04 Operation error e The command cannot be executed because the operation command cannot be received e The command cannot be executed dur ing backup e The command cannot be executed dur ing reset including startup e The command cannot be
22. Upload Area Download Area 0001 n 0 0001 Setting Change Setting Change Ej i oe 1 The Read Request Bits if laa tlie ae are set by the PLC I I I PLC EJ1 Communications 48 Operation Status Command Code MA 100 aa ES ps Lt I I 2 The EJ1 refreshes the monitor value PLC Upload Area Download Area mad Setting Change A Setting Change Response Bits Request Bits ee Operation Command H Operation Command Response Bits N Request Bits i i 4 The Read Request Bits are set by the PLC 0 1 2 Communications Operation Command Code CO CO CECI j I I 5 The EJ1 clears the Read Response Bits 141 Programless Communications Section 5 1 142 e Multi Read The parameters set in the Programless Upload Setting are read continu ously 2 The EJ1 sets the Read Response Bits PLC Upload Area 7 Download Area m 0 0002 0002 Setting Change Setting Change m42 Operation Command n42 Operation Command j Response Bits Request Bits EJ1 1 The Read Request Bits are set by the PLC mas Communications Operation i Status Command Code sea ha XXXX XXXX Pd AX A I 3 The EJ1 refreshes the monitor value When the Read Request Bits are set step 1 steps 2 and 3 performed automatically e Read Settings With the normal monitor operation the value set under Programless Up load Setting is read to the upload
23. 0263 Bank 1 Derivative Time CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 0 to 999 9 BANK 0104 0264 Bank 1 SP Ramp Rise Value CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 to 9999 See note 1 EU s or BANK Function stops when set to 0 EU min 0105 0265 Bank 1 SP Ramp Fall Value CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 to 9999 See note 1 EU s or BANK Function stops when set to 0 EU min Not used 0107 0267 Bank 1 Manual Reset Value CH1 Hr 00000000 to H 0000088 0 010 1000 soo e BANK gt foros 0266 Bank 1 Gooing Goefcient CHT H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 01 t0 89 89 roo __ BANK _ foros 0269 Bank Dead Band OH H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 199 910 9988 Sesnore2 00 EU BANK o Not used 0100 026d Bank i Alarm Value 1 CHT ___ H FFFFF83i to H 0000270F 199910 9999 See note 1 Jo EU BANK J OTE 026E Bank Alarm Upper Limi Value 1 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9990 See nate1 0 Eu Bank e oros 026F Bank Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 CH1 H FFFFF881 to H 0000270F 1899 to 9899 See note 1 Jo EU Bank e orto 0270 Bank Y Aarm Value 2 CHI H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F C1999 to 0998 See note 1 o Eu Bank e or 0271 Bank 1 Alarm Upper Limit Value 2 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F C1999 to 9998 See note 1 o Eu Bank e 0112 0272 Bank 1 Alarm Lower Limit Value 2 CHT H FFFFFSS1 to H 0000270F 1999 t0 9999 See note 1 Jo EU Bank e ora 0273 B
24. Base up Value G3PW4 Internal Duty Setting G3PW4 Base up Value The G3PW settings are read and written through the Basic Unit The Basic Unit has addresses for the G3PW allocated in its variable area The G3PW set values can be read and written by reading and writing this variable area Refer to the Parameter List on page 235 for details on the variable area for the G3PW Refer to the G3PW Power Controller User s Manual Cat No Z280 for details on functions and settings m Setting Example In this example G3PW settings are changed 113 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Section 4 7 MV Sent to the GPW Note MV Output from the G3PW 114 Unit No 1 TC4 EDU Host device The following command is sent from the host device to TC4 when the Heater Burnout Threshold is set to 10 in the G3PW communications unit No 1 STX 0100001029A0206000001000A ETX BCC Communications Communications Unit No 1 Unit No 2 The following MV will be sent from the EJ1 to the G3PW Unit regardless of whether the control method is set to standard or heating cooling control TC4 G3PW CH1 Control Output Heating CH1 Control Output Heating CH2 Control Output Heating CH2 Control Output Heating CH3 Control Output Heating CH3 Control Output Heating CH4 Control Output Heating CH4 Control Output CH1 Control Output Cooling CH1 Control Output Cooling CH2 Control Output
25. EJ Modular Temperature Controllers User s Manual Cat No H142 E1 04 EJ1 Modular Temperature Controllers User s Manual Revised February 2010 Preface This manual describes the EJ1 Modular Temperature Controllers including information on functions performances and application methods Observe the following precautions when using an EJ1 Modular Temperature Controller e Do not allow the Temperature Controller to be handled by anyone except a specialist with sufficient knowledge of electrical systems e Read this manual thoroughly and be sure you understand it before attempting to use the Temperature Controller and use the Temperature Controller correctly according to the information provided e Keep this manual in a safe place for easy reference Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera tion of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc OMRON 2006 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information cont
26. The default value for the slope is 100 0 and the default value for the offset is 0 0 SECTION 4 Basic Units TC4 and TC2 Functions This section describes the functions of EJ1 Basic Units 4 1 Setting Input Specifications 0 0 0 ccc eens 51 Sl I pes aged akon eae nae bed ooh canbe he ae neous ae 51 4 1 2 Temperature Inputs 0 0 cc eens 52 4 1 3 Analog Inputs 0 0 eee eens 52 4 1 4 Input Shift Correction 0 0 0 ee ee eee 53 4 1 5 Input Filter 0 ees 56 4 2 Setting Output Specifications 0 0 ees 57 4 2 1 Control Output Assignments 0 0 cee eee 57 4 2 2 Control Output Method 2 0 ee 58 4 2 3 Minimum output ON OFF width KAMA 58 4 2 4 Output ON Scheduling Function 0 0 00 0000 ee 59 4 2 5 Output Scaling seciuscci nare ie rerdareus testers sind ia ae 61 4 2 6 Transfer OUtpUtS o o o oooooooooomrrrrr eee eens 62 4 3 Setting Control Specifications 0 0 0 0 cece eens 64 4 3 1 Starting and Stopping Control o oooooooooo ooo 64 4 3 2 Selecting the Control Method ooooooooo o 65 4 3 3 Selecting the Output Mode 0 ee eee 68 434 Seting the Sel Pont 124050144 bcsdies rines 71 4 3 5 Setting the SP RaMDesessaderingarrnercr rre 12 Woe Remote SP Sake seh ceegeane ena ee eae eeqaeeseAa esses esbeee 73 4 3 7 Setting the Manipulated Variable MV
27. The EJ1 does not support bit access Fixed to 00 Response Codes prs a ese Command too short The command is not long enough 1101 Area type error The corresponding variable type does not exist 110B Response too long The number of elements exceeds the maximum 1100 Bit position is not OO 7011 Operation error 7011 The command cannot be executed due to a device error 0000 Normal completion Processing was completed normally 4 No of Read Data Items Variable Type Read Data Read data length No of read data items For double word 8 digit variable type 32 max 0020H For word 4 digit variable type 41 max 0029H 178 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 4 Composite Write to Variable Area This service writes in order the contents of specified addresses to a variable area E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC Variable Write address Bit _ Write data type position 011 1113 0 0 ee 2 2 2 4 2 No of elements x 8 or 4 Variable Write address Bit Write data type position 0 0 2 4 2 No of elements x 8 or 4 E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response code 0 1 1 3 2 2 4 1 Variable Type and Write Address Refer to Parameter List on page 235 Composite writes cannot be performed for the DA 9A variable types 2 Bit Position The EJ1 does not support bit access Fixed to 00 3 No of Write Data Items Write data length No of write data items For d
28. heating cooling PID method CH1 H 00000000 Disabled 0 ch H 00000001 Air cooling 1 H 00000002 Water cooling 2 H 00000003 Linear 3 Not used 0200 05A0 Direct Reverse Operation CH2 The rest are the same as channel 1 TEN Note The SP Tracking CH2 parameter is supported only by the TC4 0300 07A0 Direct Reverse Operation CH3 Note The SP Tracking CH3 parameter cannot be used 0400 O9A0 Direct Reverse Operation CH4 Note The SP Tracking CH4 parameter cannot be used aa os Note The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the O dec imal point position setting will be treated as a setting of 1 251 Parameter List Appendix Vari CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit ane Category Add Address type Category Fone eee ress Enabled ee A200 Remote SP Enable H 00000000 Disabled 0 Common BO after H 00000001 Enabled 1 feSeHing haa A201 Operation After Power ON H 00000000 Continue 0 Common H 00000001 Stop 1 H 00000002 Manual mode 2 0003 A203 Operation During Error Selection B H 00000000 Notification only Continue 0 Common H 00000001 MV at PV error 1 H 00000002 Control Stop 2 0020 A220 Port B Communications Protocol v1 1 H 00000000 CompoWay F 0 Common H 00000001 Modbus 1 0021 A221 Port B Communications Baud Rate TC4 TC2 Not
29. 0102 Channel Alarm Status CH1 0103 Internal Set Point CH1 0200 0201 0202 0203 Process Value CH2 Channel Status CH2 Channel Alarm Status CH2 Internal Set Point CH2 0300 0301 0302 0303 Process Value CH3 Channel Status CH3 Channel Alarm Status CH3 Internal Set Point CH3 0400 0401 0402 0403 Process Value CH4 Channel Status CH4 Channel Alarm Status CH4 Internal Set Point CH4 Note Refer to Status Lists on page 256 for information on bit data and details for individual statuses 210 Section 8 3 Determining the Error from the Status Status Directory Tree TC4 04 84 0000 Device Error Configuration Error Channel Error Not used Expand Communications Error 1 Bits 5 to 7 Not used Device Error Status Bits O to 3 Not used EEPROM Error Calibration Error Setting Value Error Not used Configured Registration Data Error Device Information Data Error to 11 Not used Bit 12 Model Information Mismatching Error Bits 13 to 15 Not used Configuration Error A Status Undefined Expand Unit Not used Too Many Expand Units Expand Unit Failure Bit 4 Expand Unit Connection Fault Bits 5 to 7 Not used Bits 8 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used Configuration Error B Status Expand Unit 1 Error Expand Unit 2 Error Expand Unit 3 Error Expand Unit 4 Error Expand Unit 5 Error Expa
30. 02C5 Present Bank SP Ramp Fall Value CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 to 9999 See note 1 EU s or BANK Function stops when set to 0 EU min Not used 0107 02C7 Present Bank Manual Reset Value CH1 H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 BANK 0108 02C8 Present Bank Cooling Coefficient CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 01 to 99 99 11 00 BANK O 0109 02C9 Present Bank Dead Band CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 199 9 to 999 9 See note para BANK ee 2 Not used 010D 02CD Present Bank Alarm Value 1 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK 010E 02CE Present Bank Alarm Upper Limit Value 1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 NN BANK a CH1 010F 02CF Present Bank Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 eee BANK ei CH1 0110 02D0 Present Bank Alarm Value 2 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK 0111 02D1 Present Bank Alarm Upper Limit Value 2 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 aoe BANK ei CH1 0112 02D2 Present Bank Alarm Lower Limit Value 2 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 paa BANK fe CH1 0113 02D3 Present Bank Alarm Value 3 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK e 0114 02D4 Present Bank Alarm Upper Limit Value 3 H
31. 1999 to 9999 See note 1 ee BANK 3 CH1 0115 0255 Bank 0 Alarm Lower Limit Value H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 PE BANK e 3 CH1 0256 Bank 0 Proportional H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 9 See note 2 EU BANK Band Cooling CH1 i 0257 Bank 0 Integral Time H 00000000 to H 00000F9F 0 to 3999 233 S BANK Cooling CH1 0258 Bank O Derivative Time H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 0 to 999 9 40 0 S BANK Cooling CH1 Not used 0200 0440 Bank 0 Set Point CH2 The rest are the same as channel 1 0300 0640 Bank 0 Set Point CH3 TOA CICE AA ie AA Note 1 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the O decimal point position setting will be treated as a setting of 1 238 Parameter List Appendix 3 Can only be used by improved models For details on improved models refer to Functional Upgrades on page xxvi Vari CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range mm DI Canbe 0100 0260 Bank SetPont CHi____ H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See mote 1 0 EU Bank fo OV giang 0101 0261 Bank t Proportional Band CHI H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 9 See note2 eo Eu Bank o operation 0102 0262 Bank 1 Integral Time CH1 H 00000000 to H 00000F9F O to 3999 BANK 0103
32. 53 Input Value 2 for Input Correction 53 Integral Time 66 Integral Time Cooling 70 Internal SP 73 Latch Cancel 186 188 LBA Band 102 LBA Detection Time 102 LBA Level 102 Leakage Current Value 1 or 2 Monitor 99 Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 78 Linear Output 1 2 Type 62 Local SP Change 152 186 188 201 Local SP Monitor 74 LSP Change 186 188 Manual 150 186 Manual MV 76 Manual Reset Value 70 Minimum output ON OFF width 59 MV at PV Error 77 MV Lower Limit 78 MV Upper Limit 78 Operation During Error Selection B 84 Output Mode Selection 68 Output ON Scheduling Method 59 Output Scaling Lower Limit 1 to 4 61 Output Scaling Upper Limit 1 to 4 61 Parameter Initialization 186 188 PID OnOff 65 Port B communications baud rate 171 192 Port B communications data length 171 Port B communications parity 171 193 Port B communications protocol 171 192 Port B communications stop bits 171 Port B send data wait time 171 193 Port C Communications Baud Rate 136 Port C Communications Data Length 136 Port C Communications Parity 136 Port C Communications Stop Bits 136 Port C Send Wait Time 125 136 162 Programless Communications Protocol 125 159 162 Programless Communications Receive Wait Time 136 277 278 Index Proportional Band 66 Proportional Band Cooling 70 Proportional Band x 10 Compensation 67 Register Unit Configuration 150 186 188 Remote SP Change 15
33. Bits are set by the PLC Upload Area Read Response j Bits PLC EJ1 Download Area Memory Read Request Bits TC4 2 H S FU 3 The EJ1 repeatedly reads the operation command code VM O O coe gt O e o0 5 fab T vo gt E n 2 Communications n43 Status 1 The EJ1 sets the Operation Command Request Bits 147 Programless Communications Section 5 1 148 e Single operation instruction bit specification Executes the bit specification operation commands a single time from among the parameters set in the Download Area Setting 4 The EJ1 sets the Operation Command Response Bits PLC EJ1 o Area Y Download Area a day HERONS Read Request Bits its Setting Change Setting Change one 0093 2 The mene tate Command a Communications a Operation a tate Bits are set by the PLC ue Status di Command Code Executes the instruction 1 Changes the bit specification parameter on the PLC side 3 The EJ1 reads the bit specification parameter PLC Upload Area Download Area Response Bits Request Bits ek ie Pe 6 The EJ1 clears the Operation Command Response Bits 5 The Operation Command Request Bits are cleared by the PLC Programless Communications Section 5 1 e Multi Operation Commands Bit specification The first time all of the bit specified operation commands within the param eters set in the Download
34. C4 84 0013 C4 84 0000 Device Error Status C4 84 0001 Bits O to 3 Not used EEPROM Error Not used Setting Value Error Not used Bit8 Not used Bit9 Model Information Data Error Bits 10 to 11 Not used Bit 12 Model Information Mismatching Error Bits 13 to 15 Not used Configuration Error A Status C4 84 0002 Bits O to 3 Not used Bits 4 to 7 Not used Bit8 Illegal Unit Arrangement Bits 9 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used C4 84 0013 213 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors Section 8 4 8 4 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors This section provides troubleshooting information for communications errors CX Thermo Support No Communications between the CX Thermo Support Software and the EJ1 Software 214 aras Possible cause Countermeasure Cannot connect online There is no power supply to Supply power from the EDU power the EJ1 supply terminal Connection The USB Serial Conversion _ Connect the cable Cable is not connected ES The CX Thermo Support Soft Correct the communications settings ware settings are incorrect Serial port COM See note E58 CIFQ1 Serial Port EJ1 Baud rate 38 4 kbps Data length 7 bit Stop bits 2 bit CONE CIOn pon Parity Even bit T USB a Note Match the serial port and unit Computer USB number settings to the system EDU _
35. CH2 Control Variable Monitor H 00000000 H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 eo ee 0142 F042 G3ZA1 CH3 Control Variable Monitor grz 00000000 H 0000038 0 0 to 100 0 ee i NUM 0143 F043 G3ZA1 CH4 Control Variable Monitor grz H 00000000 H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 ENT NUM O dll ae caf ee ee ee sl Al accio COS a e E ee ee 0148 F048 G3ZA1 CT1 Effective Current Monitor H 00000000 H 00000672 0 0 to 165 0 po eee NUM dl 0149 F049 G3ZA1 CT2 Effective Current Monitor H 00000000 H 00000672 0 0 to 165 0 Co Ae NUM F 014A F04A G3ZA1 CT3 Effective Current Monitor H 00000000 H 00000672 0 0 to 165 0 po lee NUM Fi 014B F04B G3ZA1 CT4 Effective Current Monitor H 00000000 H 00000672 0 0 to 165 0 ee le NUM i 014C Fo4C G3ZA1 CT1 Heater ON Current Monitor H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to 165 r 1 NUM A 014D Fo4D G3ZA1 CT2 Heater ON Current Monitor H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to 165 eO pe NUM s ae 014E FO4E G3ZA1 CT3 Heater ON Current Monitor H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to 165 E NUM 014F FO4F G3ZA1 CT4 Heater ON Current Monitor H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to 165 e e NUM 7 0150 F050 G3ZA1 CT1 Heater OFF Current Moni H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to 165 PoP NUM EA tor 0151 Fo51 G3ZA1 CT2 Heater OFF Current Moni H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to 165 a eae NUM e 5 tor 0152 Fo52 G3ZA1 CT3 Heater OFF Current Moni H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to 165 pp NUM e 77 tor 0153 F053 G
36. CHE Control Output Cooling CH Control Output Cooling CHA Control Output Cooling 4 CH Control Output Cooling gt Output amount no no no no no n 115 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Section 4 7 116 SECTION 5 Advanced Unit HFU Functions This section describes the functions of EJ1 Advanced Unit 5 1 Programless Communications 0 000 ees 118 Jal l Connectable Devices conmutadores oe eed 118 5 1 2 Checking Operation 2 440004 teaer teens enreda 119 5 1 3 Detailed Settings 4 4cceesecdass ceeeectuwscdueeckdaucsens 131 5 1 4 Description of Operation 0 0 cece 139 5 1 5 Operation Command Codes for Programless Communications 150 5 1 6 Bit specified Operation Commands 000 ce eee 154 5 1 7 Programless Communications Errors 000 ee eee 156 5 2 Connecting More Than One HFU WAR 157 S21 SYSMAC CS CJ series PLCS recia reri tini EEREN Ei 157 5 2 2 MELSEC Q QnA QnAS series PLCs o oooooooooooo o o 160 5 2 3 HFU Communications Unit No 0 0 0 2 cee eee 164 5 3 Other HEU Functions ever rain mete sees 166 5 3 1 Auxiliary Output Allocations 0 0 0 ee 166 232 APU Internal Buses ope roscar rro rios sl 166 117 Programless Communications Section 5 1 5 1 Programless Communicat
37. EJ1N HFUB NFLK 1 2 3 Connect the EJ1 and PLC Always set the communications unit numbers of the HFU in order from O through 7 or 32 to 39 if using a version Unit and set the communi cations unit numbers of the Basic Units connected to each HFU to a differ ent communications unit number than the HFU This restriction does not apply if using a version Unit when the communications unit number for the HFU is set to a number from No 32 to 39 m Example If the communications unit number of the HFU is set to 1 Set the unit numbers of the Basic Units to any number other than 1 e from O to 31 but excluding 1 Set the unit numbers for other HFUs to a number other than 1 for example 0 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 A single HFU can manage a maximum of 32 Basic Units When connecting 16 or more Basic Units use distributed placement because 16 would exceed the maximum number of side by side connec tions 157 Connecting More Than One HFU Section 5 2 RS 485 EJ SYSMAC CS CJ series PLC HFU TC EDU ojo Qono 00000 o E o Unit Unit No 7 No 0 Note Set the unit number of the Basic Unit to any number that was not set for the HFU 158 Connecting More Than One HFU Section 5 2 SYSMAC CS CJ series PLC EJ1N HFULJ NFLK RS 485 e Sianal Shield E
38. Expand Unit 7 Alarm Expand Unit 8 Alarm Bits 8 to 11 Not used y Bits 12 to 15 Not used 1 O Notification 1 I O Notification A Status C4 84 0009 BitO CT1 Heater Current Hold Bits 1 to 3 Not used Bit4 CT2 Heater Current Hold Bits 5 to 7 Not used Bits 8 to 11 Not used Bit15 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used 212 Determining the Error from the Status Section 8 3 Output Status Control Output 1 Control Output 2 Control Output 3 Control Output 4 Bits 4 to 7 Not used Bits 8 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used Device B Status Save RAM 1 Save RAM 2 Save Control Parameters Registration of unit configuration Registration of multiple reads Bits 4 to 7 Not used Bit 8 Write Mode Bit9 EEPROM Bits 10 to 11 Not used Bit 12 Configuration Registered Bits 13 to 15 Not used HFU Device Error 0 1 Configuration Error Not used External RAM Error at Operation Bit4 Internal Communications Error Bit5 Not used Bit6 Programless Link Error Bit 7 Not used Bits 8 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used Device B Status Save RAM 2 Not used Registration of unit configuration Registration of multiple reads Bits 4 to 7 Not used Bit 8 Write Mode Bit 9 EEPROM Bits 10 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used C4 84 0012
39. Note If the Read Request Bits or Setting Change Request Bits are set restart operation according to the request 3 Setthe Operation Command Request Bits to 0000 then check that the Op eration Command Response Bits have been set to 0000 Note Operation commands cannot be executed while the Operation Command Response Bits are set to FFFF 156 Connecting More Than One HFU Section 5 2 If the communications line is disconnected or the PLC power supply turns OFF during programless communications a programless communications error will occur after the following times have expired Programless Maximum time until programless communications communications protocol error NT Link 1 N 30 s See note MC Protocol Format 5 Programless Communications Receive Wait Times x 3 AnA AnU El ea 6 s for the default setting Commands Note If a programless communications error occurs because the PLC power supply turns OFF when using the NT Link 1 N protocol the error can be cleared by turn ON the PLC power supply 5 2 Connecting More Than One HFU 5 2 1 SYSMAC CS CJ series PLCs Up to eight Advanced Units HFU can be connected to one communications port on a Serial Communications Unit or Serial Communications Board Use the following models when connecting more than one HFU Serial Communications Units CJ1W SCU31 V1 Port 1 of CJU1W SCU41 V1 CS1W SCU31 V1 Serial Communications Board Port 2 of CS1W SCB41 V1 EJ1N HFU EJ1N HFUA NFLK
40. O oO OO oO CO ORE CO CO ojojoj oO bh h O E o aR A E A IS er vey SS O Ss E ES Se a A SSA ae O O O O OJ O O O OJ O Reset Error Alarm 1 Latch Cancel Alarm 2 Latch Cancel Alarm 3 Latch Cancel All Alarm Latch Cancel Save RAM Data Register Unit Configuration bh h h d h bh 57 A A ETA EA A ESES ERER CAES KAES KAES EIER EAER k k 1 0 Specified Unit 1 All Units 2 0 According to related information 1 All channels 3 00 Backup 01 RAM 4 00 Channel 1 01 Channel 2 10 Channel 3 11 Channel 4 5 00 Clear 01 Register Example Operation Command Code to execute Run for channel 1 of Unit No 1 command ode forRun Uritepeceaton 01 eramen E e To paolo loto H 2810 152 Programless Communications Section 5 1 Sample Operation Command Codes for Programless Communications 1 All Units specified 2 All channels specified Command Channel Operation Command code Unit specification Related code command informa code tion Run 7 Gannett mao A o O ojo O ojo Ojojojo 0 O Jojo jol o j o FOIOS Chamerz a222 olo ilo ii 0 Oojojojoj o Oojojojojojo O lt lt O a Ol Ol Ol a camel asc fo popa i O oO o oO O o O O
41. Operation During Error Selection B 0 Notification only Common continue 1 MV at PV Error 2 Stop control Conditions for use There must be a CT input Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes effective the next time a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power is turned ON e When setting 1 MV at PV Error is being used set the MV at PV Error in variable type D5 95 For details refer to MV at PV Error on page 77 e If this parameter is set to 2 stop control control will stop when an error occurs and will not be restored automatically even if the error is cleared Execute the Reset Error operation command to restore operation Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 Note e Each set value determines the operation for different errors as shown in the following table Parameter name EOS Operation During Error Selection B CT Heater Overcurrent See note e Heater Burnout HB Alarm e Heater Short HS Alarm e Heater Overcurrent OC Alarm Applies to the channel associated with the CT current transformer For example when the Control Output 1 Assignment is set to Channel 1 Con trol Output Heating and the CT1 Assignment is set to OUT1 channel 1 will operate according to the Operation During Error Selection B setting if a heater burnout is detected at CT1 Associated by the
42. Parameter Validity The conditions for parameter validity that depended on the model and setting status no longer apply Fixed Values for For example the setting range for the target value is fixed to 1 999 to 9 999 Setting Ranges regardless of the input type In other words the setting ranges under the new specifications will not change based on the input type or related parameters For parameters that set ranges with upper and lower limits the specifications now allow the upper and lower limits to be reversed Refer to 4 1 3 Analog Inputs 4 3 4 Setting the Set Point and MV Limiter on page 77 in Section 4 Basic Units TC4 TC2 before using the EJ1 Automatic Offsetting Accompanying changes outlined under Fixed Values for Setting Ranges of Setting Values above there are no longer any restrictions in operations for the target value limiter or target values for changes in the input type Under the new specifica tions there is also no need to change control output assignments when oper ations such as selecting heating and cooling are performed Refer to 4 2 1 Control Output Assignments Heating Cooling Control on page 69 and 4 3 4 Setting the Set Point in Section 4 Basic Units TC4 TC2 before using the EJ1 7 1 1 Communications Specifications Parameter name Settings RTU Remote Terminal Uni Error detection CRC 16 Cyclical Redundancy Check Flow contro Retry function EDU Port B The following communications set
43. Provides the following information on the CP Series e Overview design installation maintenance and other basic specifications Features System configuration Mounting and wiring I O memory allocation e Troubleshooting Use this manual together with the CP1H Program mable Controllers Programming Manual W451 Provides the following information on the CP Series e Programming instructions e Programming methods Tasks File memory Functions Use this manual together with the CP1H Program mable Controllers Operation Manual W450 Provides the following information on the CP Series e Overview design installation maintenance and other basic specifications Features System configuration Mounting and wiring I O memory allocation e Troubleshooting Use this manual together with the CP1L Program mable Controllers Programming Manual W451 XV Cat No CP1H X40DL 1 1 W451 Provides the following information on programming CP1H XA40DL 1 1 the CP Series e Programming methods e Tasks CP1L 114DL 1 1 oe CP1L L20DO 0 e Programming instructions CP1L M30DL 1 1 CP1L M40DL 1 1 CP1L M60DL 1 1 SYSMAC CP Series CP1H CP1L CPU Unit Programming Manual CP1L L10DL1 L Describes basic setup methods of CP1L PLCs CREI e Basic configuration and component names e Mounting and wiring e Programming data transfer and debugging using the CX Programmer e Application program examples
44. Section 5 1 If the allocated words shown below are already in use change the words referring to Programless Communications Upload Download Data Area Variable Type FO BO on page 134 and to Programless Communications Upload Download Start Address Variable Type FO BO on page 135 Contents set value D01500 Read Request Bits D01501 Setting Change Request Bits When setting programless uploads and downloads be sure that the words being used in PLC memory are not otherwise used in the program or by other devices 4 Check operation Turn OFF the power to the EJ1 and PLC and then turn the power back ON It does not matter which one is turned ON first Refer to the following information and check the operation E Monitoring EJ1 Set Values Use the following procedure to confirm that the channel 1 and channel 2 pro cess values can be read 1 2 3 Set the Read Request Bits allocated in PLC memory D01000 to 0002 Confirm that the Read Response Bits D00000 are set to 0002 Confirm that D00004 and D00005 are set to the channel 1 and channel 2 process values The EJ1 set value will be continuously read if DO1000 is set to 0002 Set D01000 to 0000 to stop reading the set value DM Area Value Meaning Procedure step number and confirmation item D00000 0002 Read Response Bits Step 2 Set to 0002 by the system 00002 0000 Operation Command Response Bits D00004 Step 3 Channel 1 Process Value Step 3 S
45. Serial port COM See note Baud rate 38 4 kbps RS 485 EJ1 Data length 7 bit Stop bits 2 bit Parity Even bit Unit number See note K3SC 10 Connection port WA Note Match the serial port and unit number settings to the system aa The Interface Converter com Refer to the Interface Converter man EDU munications conditions are ual and match the communications different from the EJ1 commu conditions to the EJ1 communica K3SC 10 Interface Converter nications settings tions settings The Interface Converter con Refer to the computer Interface Con nection is incorrect verter and EJ1 manuals and wire the connection correctly There is no device on the Specify a unit number in the commu communications path with the nications settings for a device on the specified unit number communications path There is a device on the com Change the unit number in the com munications path with the munications settings so that the unit same unit number numbers are not duplicated Cannot connect online The EJ1 is connected to port The CX Thermo Support Software C on the HFU cannot be connected to the HFU l Connect it to port A on the EDU Connection PC RS 232C RS 485 EJ1 Connection port Connection port Computer EJ1 Port C HFU 215 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors Section 8 4 Status o O
46. When using port A be sure to consider the write life of the EEPROM e Two communications ports are provided for port A a connector and termi nal block connections e The connector communications port can be used as a tool port The End Unit can be connected to a computer via a special E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable to make EJ1 settings using the CX Thermo Support Software e The terminal block communications port can be used to wire between more than one EJ1 for distributed positioning of the EJ1 Up to 64 HFUs and Basic Units can be connected this way 1 2 3 Model Number Legend TC4 and TC2 Options None 2 CT inputs 2 event inputs Terminal type Unit name Type A IN B Outputs Q 2 pulse voltage outputs Screw terminals B TC4 Screw less clamp terminals Four channel Temperature Control Unit TC2 N Two channel Temperature Control Unit Standard control I O Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 HFU Communications FLK CompoWay F RS 485 RS 232C FL2 en RS 422 Terminal Screw terminals Bue Screw less clamp terminals EDU Terminal mA Screw terminals Ss terminal block model Internal Block Diagrams Section 1 3 1 3 TC4 Internal Block Diagrams a A ele af Main input 1 a baer el input nME Sea a ae eee 2 ae Main input 2 ERT HE a
47. a enzo Note Connect the EDU on the right end of the EJ1 and the HFU on the left end 2 Slide the yellow sliders on the top and bottom of the Units until they click into place Slider 3 Attach the cover seal to the connector on the Unit on the left end of the EJ1 ZEEE Qe po anon mn omron an PO eA 228 88 lG L Ie e Cover seal 9 l L Ie ie Clr ior ies eel S y Do q H 13 Installation Section 2 1 Mounting to DIN Rail e Mount the EJ1 to DIN Rail e Use screws to secure the DIN Rail in at least 3 locations pee Re ca exe eee DIN Rail PFP 50N 50 cm or PEP 100N 100 cm e Install the DIN Rail vertically to the ground os SSO Vertical OK Horizontal NG Pull down the hooks on the bottoms of the Units and then catch the hooks on the tops of the Units onto the DIN Rail and press the Units onto the DIN Rail until they lock into place Installation Method 2 Catch the upper hooks onto the DIN Rail
48. combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof vi Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal an
49. heating Output 4 i i Set value of control 0 0 40 0 80 0 output assignment 60 0 100 0 Output Output Scaling Upper Limit 2 Upper Output Scaling Upper Limit 2 2 Output Scaling Lower Limit 2 O Decimal Point Decimal PointC2 Output 3 A output 3 assignment CH1 Control out put heating Output Scaling Upper Limit 3 6000s Output Scaling Lower Limit 3 OY Decimal Point Decimal PointC3 Output 4 Dooma Pom OS output 4 assignment CH1 Control out put heating Output Scaling Upper Limit 4 Output Scaling Lower Limit 4 ES Decimal Point C4 EY 4 2 6 Transfer Outputs Output 1 and output 2 on Controllers with linear outputs can be used as trans fer outputs Use the following procedure 1 2 3 1 Set the parameter to be output on the transfer output The parameter to be output is set using the Control Output Assignment pa rameter Select one of the following values Refer to 4 2 7 Control Output Assignments for details on the assigning the control output Process Value Internal SP Local SP Remote SP Transfer Output Heat ing Transfer Output Cooling 2 Set the type of linear output Use the following parameter Variable type Setting range Default E1 A1 Linear Output 1 2 Type I O 0 4 20 mA 1 0 20 mA Conditions for use A Controller with linear outputs must be used 3 Set the output range for the transfer output
50. igna T i 62 amp ee 6 SDA i BA EJ1N HFULJ NFLK 8 SDB DY E E The 2 4 wire switch is set for a 2 wire connection B RS 485 69 SSS SHS SHE B S Y L OROCO OOA OR ORO OOOI OLOL OROROORO 2 Make the PLC settings Referring to item 2 Make the PLC settings on page 121 set the maximum unit number to one less than the number of connected HFU units Other settings are the same m Example If three HFUs are connected set the maximum unit number to 2 3 Make the EJ1 settings Make the following setting in all HFUs that are connected Variable type Setting Monitor values FO BO Programless Communications Protocol 2 NT Link 1 N Refer to 5 1 3 Detailed Settings for information on data linked with the PLC Be sure that the areas of PLC memory used by the different HFUs do not overlap 159 Connecting More Than One HFU Section 5 2 INCORRECT CORRECT PLC Memory PLC Memory HFU No O HFU No O Upload area Upload area HFU No 1 Upload area HFU No 1 Upload area Operation and Precautions E Read Write Period for PLC Memory When more than one HFU is connected communications will be performed in the following order according to communications unit numbers The read write period for PLC memory will thus be relatively long in comparison to the read write period for a 1 1 connection 0 1 2 Max communication unit number 0 gt 1 Or 32 3
51. in the Event Input 2 Assignment as shown in the fol lowing table Event input 2 Event input 1 Selected bank ON Note Event input 1 can be used alone to switch between banks O and 1 Internal Buses The internal bus can be used to simultaneously switch the banks of linked Units For details refer to 4 7 3 Internal Buses TC4 and TC2 Operation Commands For details refer to 6 4 11 Operation Commands E Bank Number The presently selected bank number can be checked with the following parameter Variable type Setting range Default C4 84 Bank No Monitor Channel OtoS J 104 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Section 4 7 4 7 2 Event Inputs TC2 Event Input Assignment Note Controlling Operation with the Event Input s ON OFF Status There are two event inputs in the TC2 The following diagram shows the parameters that can be set in event input 1 or event input 2 Some of the parameters are for all channels and others are for individual channels EV EV2 Settable parameters All channels Disabled Bank bit 0 Bank bit 1 Stop 0 Run 1 EV2 can be set in the same way Channel 2 Channel 1 E Bank bit 0 srk DET Stop 0 Run 1 Run 0 Stop 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 Local SP 0 Remote SP 1 Run 0 Stop 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 Local SP 0 Remote SP 1 Variable type Setting range Default F2 B2 Event Input 1 or 2
52. of HFU units that are connected Note lf three HFUs are connected set the maximum unit number to 2 162 Connecting More Than One HFU Section 5 2 Operation and Precautions Refer to 5 1 3 Detailed Settings for information on data linked with the PLC Be sure that the areas of PLC memory used by the different HFUs do not overlap INCORRECT CORRECT PLC Memory PLC Memory HFU No 0 Upload area HFU No 1 HFU No 0 Upload area Upload area HFU No 1 Upload area E Read Write Period for PLC Memory When more than one HFU is connected communications will be performed in the following order according to communications unit numbers The read write period for PLC memory will thus be relatively long in comparison to the read write period for a 1 1 connection O 1 2 Max communication unit number gt 0 1 Or 32 gt 33 34 Max communication unit number 32 33 E Startup When more than one HFU is connected the HFU with communications unit number 0 is the master for the EJ1 If using a version Unit unit number 32 Is the master for the EJ1 Other HFUs will start communications after the master starts communica tions Be sure to turn ON the power to the master HFU first For HFUs that are not the master communications will start even if the power is not turned ON If the power to an HFU is not ON communications standby time will occur and so communications will increase in length
53. ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Product This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the Prod uct in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of the particular Product with respect to Buyers application product or system Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases but the following is a non exhaustive list of applications for which particular attention must be given i Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this document ii Use in consumer products or any use in significant quantities iii Energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equip ment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations iv Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or prop erty Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to this Prod uct NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY OR IN LARGE QUANTITIES WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON S PRODUCT IS PROP ERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUI
54. the Request Bits have been set the Response Bits operate in the order shown in the following table Order of action 1 The PLC sets the Request Bits 2 The EJ1 performs a single action 3 The EJ1 sets the Response Bits to the same value as the Request Bits 4 The PLC clears the Request Bits 5 The EJ1 clears the Response Bits PLC processing EJ1 processing Sets the Request Bits de to 0001 2 Single action Single action completed Clears the Request 3 Sets the Response Bits Bits to 0001 4 5 Clears the Response Bits Order of action 1 The PLC sets the Request Bits 2 The EJ1 sets the Response Bits to the same value as the Request Bits 3 The EJ1 performs a multi action PLC processing EJ1 processing Sets the Request Bits to 0002 Checks the Request Bits Sets the Response Bits to 0002 2 3 Multi action Operation 1 The PLC clears the Request Bits stopped 2 The EJ1 clears the Response Bits 140 Programless Communications Section 5 1 PLC processing EJ1 processing Clears the Request Clears the Response he 2 Bits Bits Operation Procedure Monitor Once the PLC sets the value of the Read Request Bits the EJ1 writes the value set under Programless Upload Settings to the PLC memory area e Single Read The parameters set in the Programless Upload Setting are read once 3 The EJ1 sets the Read Response Bits
55. type position a 0 O0 2 4 2 1 Response Codes Response code Error name Cause 1001 Command too long The command is too long 7011 Operation error 7011 The command cannot be executed due to a device error 0000 Normal completion Processing was completed normally 2 Variable Type and Read Address Refer to Parameter List on page 235 3 Bit Position The EJ1 does not support bit access Fixed to 00 4 No of Registered Data Items Variable Type Read Address Bit Posi tion Registered data length No of registered data items For double word 8 digit variable type 20 max 0014H For word 4 digit variable type 182 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 8 Controller Attribute Read This service reads the model number and communications buffer size E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC 0 51 10 3 2 2 E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response Model Buffer size code 01510 3 2 2 4 10 4 1 Model From 1 to 10 in 1 2 3 Model Number Legend can be read Example Input range 2 3 A SO OO 579 69 90 SO 510 029 097 TA E J 1 N TC 4 A QQ 2 Buffer Size The communications buffer size is expressed in 2 byte hexadecimal and read after being converted to 4 byte ASCII The buffer size is the smaller of the send and receive buffer sizes 3 Response Codes E 0 e a a Command too long The co
56. xix 18 EEPROM 7 187 231 end code 173 BCC error 173 FINS command error 173 Format error 173 Frame length error 173 Framing error 173 Normal completion 173 Overrun error 173 Parity error 173 Sub address error 173 End Plate 15 End Unit EDU 7 Error Channel A Status TC4 TC2 262 CH1 262 CH2 262 CH3 262 CH4 262 error code 195 error status 133 EU Engineering Unit xix event inputs TC2 105 F FINS 172 FINS mini command services 175 FINS mini command text 174 FINS mini response text 174 FINS mini text 174 FINS mini variable type and address 174 frame configuration 172 function code 194 195 196 Index G G3PW 25 112 222 G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller 24 108 110 GX Developer 125 130 H HB Heater burnout xix heater burnout alarm HB alarm 91 heater overcurrent alarm OC alarm 100 heater short alarm HS alarm 98 heating cooling control 69 HFU xix 6 17 HFU bus output assignments 167 HFU internal buses 166 HS Heater short xix hysteresis 65 I integral time 67 I O Alarm A Status TC4 TC2 261 CT1 Heater Overcurrent 261 CT2 Heater Overcurrent 261 I O Alarm B Status TC4 TC2 261 CT1 HB Alarm 261 CT1 HS Alarm 261 CT1 OC Alarm 261 CT2 HB Alarm 261 CT2 HS Alarm 261 CT2 OC Alarm 261 I O configuration 5 I O Error Status TC4 TC2 260 Main Input 1 Count Error 260 Main Input 2 Count Error 260 Main Input 3 Cou
57. 0 gt 1050 041A Note Refer to Parameter List on page 235 197 Detailed Description of Services Section 7 5 7 5 Detailed Description of Services 7 5 1 Multiple Read from Variable Area Command Response 198 This service reads data from the variable area Function code Slave Read start No of CRC 16 address address elements 2 2 Function code Slave Byte ON data 1 DS data n ll 16 address OS H 03 1 1 1 Number of elements x 2 bytes 1 Read Start Address Refer to Parameter List on page 235 2 No of Elements Specify the number of elements to read The specification range is from H 0001 to H 0050 1 to 80 elements 3 Byte Count The number of bytes of data that was read is returned Response Codes Function Error Cause code code H 83 H 01 Function code error A function code that is not supported was specified Variable address error The read start address is not correct H 03 Variable data error e The command is too long e The command is not long enough e The number of elements has exceeded the maximum limit ENS Normal end The service was processed normally Command Response Example The following command reads the process value of channel 1 Slave address H 01 Read start address H 0200 Read data H 03E8 when the process value is 100 0 C Command 01 03 0200 0001 85B2 CRC 16 Response 01 03 02 03E8 B8FA CRC 16 Detailed Description of Services Section 7 5
58. 0 Manual 1 Local SP 0 Remote SP 1 Bank bit 0 Bank bit 1 Stop 0 Run 1 Run 0 Stop 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 Local SP 0 Remote SP 1 E Bus Output Assignments TC4 C2 Bus input 2 Bus input 3 Bus input 1 e Bus inputs 2 and 3 can be set in the same way Settable e Channels 3 and 4 are supported only by the TC4 parameters Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1 MN All channels Disabled Alarm 1 to 3 Temperature Controller Error All Alarm OR All Alarm OR All Alarm AND All Alarm AND Input Error Alarm 1 to 3 OR RSP Input Error Alarm 1 to 3 AND HB Heater Burnout Alarm Input Error OR HS Heater Short Alarm RSP Input Error OR OC Heater Overcurrent Alarm HB Heater Burnout Alarm OR Bank bit 0 HS Heater Short Alarm OR Bank bit 1 OC Heater Overcurrent Alarm OR Stop 0 Run 1 Event Input 1 to 4 Run 0 Stop 1 Bus Input 1 to 3 Auto 0 Manual 1 Local SP 0 Remote SP 1 107 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Section 4 7 Note Temperature Controller Error The Temperature Controller Error output will turn ON when an bit between bit O and bit 13 in the Device A Status is ON It can be used to output EJ1 error status Refer to Status Lists on page 256 for details on Device A Status
59. 0 0 or 100 A Set an appropriate value between 0 1 and 99 9 A The heater burnout detection current is the heater rated cur Measure the heater current and set the detection current rent value The measured heater burnout detection current is not suit Set the detection current again taking into consideration able the voltage range of the heater power supply and current measurement error Procedure The heater current value exceeds 100 A e Reduce the value to 100 A or less The heater current is direct current DC e The HB alarm will not operate under these conditions A pure metal heater is used e Measure the heater current and set the detection current value 227 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Heater Burnout Alarm Errors Section 8 8 228 SPCC CAIONG ee re 0 oe heh ae re Ane ee ee es Balen Stee Raser area oe Ae ee Ae SoS be eee eae eee oe CHALACISTISUICS rita hack Oe dak ets eae Gone Current Irans ormer abad putas adri Shue ye tes SPECI MCALLONS sidad za da ta aa DIMENSIONS ad a kee A ona awe ASCII Tal ss ANN ARS ada Sensor Input Ranges ico heed aun iaa aa Parametros aida ddr ARR Status Li ES EA A AAA AS Parameters That Can Be Allocated for Programless Communications 230 230 231 232 232 202 233 234 235 256 269 Appendix 229 Specifications Appendix Specifications Ratings Power supply voltage 24 VDC Operating voltage range 85 to 110 of rated vol
60. 0 010900 0 40010520 0 40 0t00400 J 8 20 0t04000 00107500 40 010420 0 40 010790 0 T e 2o0toa00 30010700 220to420 340t0740 U Ro fe otot700 oioso00 20to1720 40103040 B 18 100to1800 3 oto3200 oto1s2o oto32s0 ESTB TOT a Current input Any of the following ranges by scaling 5 to 105 of the setting range 1999 to 9999 Voltage input 199 9 to 999 9 19 99 to 99 99 1 999 to 9 999 Thermocou K 199 9 to 999 9 199 9 to 999 9 220 0 to 340 0 to ple 1320 0 2340 0 e Applicable standards by input type are as follows K J T E N R S B JIS C1602 1995 Ph or amp Temperature inputs 0 to 105 for 0 to 20 mA Temperature Analog inputs L Fe CuNi DIN43710 1985 U Cu CuNi DIN43710 1985 W W5Re W26Re ASTM E988 1990 PLII According to Platinel II Electromotive Force Table by Engelhard Corp JPt100 JIS C1604 1989 JIS C1606 1989 Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 IEC751 234 Parameter List Appendix Parameter List If variables without parentheses are used in communications the set values will be eight digit double word data If variables with parentheses are used in communications the set values will be four digit word data Example Variable type C4 Double word 8 digits Variable type 84 Word 4 digits Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit Target Unit type Category Add Address TC4 ress
61. 00 num e 0108 008 GSZA1 CH4 Offset F FFFFFOG0 to H 00000FA0 4000104000 00 num e 0100 FO0C GSZA1 CHS Ots H FR FFFO60 to H 00000FA0 400 010 400 0 0 0 num Jo 010D F00D GszA1 CH6 Otse H FR FFFO60to H 00000FA0 400 010 400 0 0 0 NUM Jo 010E FOE GSZA1 CH7 Ots H FF FFFO60to H 00000FA0 400 010 400 0 0 0 NUM o foror FOOF G3zA1 CH8 Osee H FFFFFo060 to H 00000FA0 400 010 400 0 00 mum e 0110 F010 GSZA1 CH1 Source Channel P 00000001 to H oooo0o08 1tos 1 f gt mum e or Fon GSZA1 CH2 Source Channel P 00000001 to H 00000008 ios a f gt num fo 0112 rote G3ZA1 CH3 Source Channel 00000001 to H ooooo008 7108 fe NUM fo ora rota G3ZA1 CH4 Source Channel F 00000001 to H 00000008 1108 fa Inm fo 0114 Fona G3ZA1 CH5 Source Channel 00000001 to H 00000008 1108 fs NUM fo forts Fors G8ZA1 CH6 Source Channel H 00000001 to H 00000008 1108 e mum o forte Fore GSZA1 CH7 Source Channel P 00000001 to H 00000008 rios 7 gt mum fo 0117 F017 GSZA1 CH8 Source Channel H 00000001 to H 00000008 1tos e gt num fo G3ZA1 CH1 Heater Burnout Detection Value H 00000000 to H 00000032 O to 50 0 Ja NUM e G3ZA1 CT1 Heater Burnout Detection Ee i NUM A Value G3ZA1 CH2 Heater Burnout Detection Value H 00000000 to H 00000032 Oto 50 0 Ja NUM e G3ZA1 CT2 Heater Burnout Det
62. 1 OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN OMRON Corporation M DE IN JAPAN RO SECTION 1 Outline This section describes the features nomenclature and functions of the EJ1 Tell Names Ol Parts ui hee a eee ee ed 2 Lele Appearance ceras seais eras oe 2 1 1 2 Names of Parts on Front Panel oooooooooo o 2 1 1 3 Meanings of Indicators 0 ees 3 1 4 Using Setting SWitches irradia 3 1 2 VO Configuration and Main Functions 00 0 0 5 2 W O COnneuranOntss e 5 1 222 Mam Unit Funcnons2 20 6400 eee cide wee wed ak ete 6 1 2 3 Model Number Lecend lt 20 nta sce eee hoes tae 7 1 3 Internal Block Diaeraims 32 cc 05 ice bose a A ai 9 Section 1 1 Names of Parts Names of Parts 1 1 Appearance 1 1 1 A asorot WA z Front panel Terminal block EDUC EDUA TC4 TC2 or HFU TC4 TC2 or HFU Connector terminal block model Models with Screw Terminals Screw Less
63. 1 2 3 1 Pull down the terminal block lever Gu A gt OG Es SH TE y 3 l Pull down the lever 2 Pull off the terminal block Note Screw and screw less terminal blocks cannot be exchanged Use the type of terminal block supplied with the TC Unit 15 16 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 2 2 Wiring Terminals 2 2 1 Terminal Arrangement TC4 Pulse voltage outputs OUT2 12 VDC OUT1 i A mA E gt mA V sy 8 V 4 t A mA a mA V _ l T B V Platinum Thermocou En Analog inputs resistance ple inputs lt j thermometer Infrared ther inputs mosensor e Terminals A10 and B10 are not used on models with screw less clamp terminals Do not connect anything to these terminals e A G3ZA connector is located on the bottom of the Unit e When wiring voltage inputs be sure to wire the correct terminals Incorrect wiring may cause the EJ1 to fail Wiring Terminals TC2 Section 2 2 Pulse voltage outputs Contact input Non contact input Platinum Thermocou i ple inputs Ananginputs oe Infrared ther inputs mosen
64. 1 kW Heater Normal operation Heater burnout occurred 5 A gt AC line AC line 200 V Burnout To CT input To CT input The heater current is 5 A when the current is normal and O A when there is a burnout so the heater burnout detection current is calculated as follows l Normal current value Burnout current value Heater burnout detection current 2 5 0 a A Example 2 Using Three 200 VAC 1 kW Heaters Normal operation Heater burnout occurred 15A gt AC line 10 A gt AC line To CT input To CT input The heater current is 15 A when the current is normal and 10 A when there is a burnout so the heater burnout detection current is calculated as follows Normal current value Burnout current value 2 Heater burnout detection current 15 10 125 A 95 Detecting Current Errors Section 4 5 2 Three phase Heaters a Delta Connection Example Using Three 200 VAC 2 kW Heaters Normal Operation 17 3 A gt Load Heater example 200 V 200 V To CT input 17 3 A gt To CT input When each phase s current is normal the current is 17 3 A 3 x 10 A Heater Burnout Occurred Burnout 10 A Burnout Load Heater Load Heater example Le S 200 V example LS 200 V 200 V 200 V 200 V l To CT input To CT input 10 A gt 15 A gt To CT input To CT inpu
65. 268 Parameters That Can Be Allocated for Programless Communications Appendix Parameters That Can Be Allocated for Programless Communications The following table lists the parameters that can be allocated to programless communications ramon Paramor attribute Upload Download Remarks Device Error Status Oo e Mitovring omy Configuration Error Status ome memtormgony Configuration Error B Status ome memtormgony internal Communications Error Status O oomme momia O Emor Status omnia O O Mars mmm e memtammgony O O Alarm B Stata Oman f gt mmo O Noification A Status O O o oom mentor Error Ohamnel A Status om je e Monitoring iy Basic UniVExpand unten Oman je A momia Basic UniVExpand Unit Arm on je mentamngony CIC E Monitoring only Devo B Status fomm gt mooo Leakage Current Value tmon e ooo O Heater Current Value 2 Monor fo e emo Leakage Current Value 2 monr fe Monitoring only e A O O CI CCA COS COI Heater Overcurrent Detection A O e Heater Burnout 2 beten a pe pe CI CCA CONS COS E Heater Overcurent Detecion te te crams a e e Mit oring only Oanmel Alarm Sis Je te Monitoring only COE te Monitoring only Local SP Manor fe d Mit oring onty Remote SP Mantra te A emir Bank No Monitor Je fe emo mv Monitor Heat fe mery S IO A e ESTA Monitoring only S Decimal Paint Montre te emir Target value Present Bank Set Point BANK le Je Present Bank SP Ramp Rise
66. 5 Output Scaling A slope gradient and offset can be set for each value selected with the con trol output assignment The value selected with the control output assignment will be 100 when it equals the Output Scaling Upper Limit and the value will be 0 when it equals the Output Scaling Lower Limit The decimal point positions for the Output Scaling Upper and Lower Limits are set with the Decimal Point C1 to C4 parameters Change the decimal point position setting if necessary Variable type Setting range Default E1 A1 Output Scaling Upper Limit 1 to 4 1999 to 9999 1 0 Output Scaling Lower Limit 1 to 4 1999 to 9999 MN 10 Decimal Point C1 to C4 no deci ae point a laa D kk kxk 3 Kk KKK Conditions for use The Control Method must be set to 2 P D Control and the Control Output Assignment must be set to Control output heating or Control output cooling Note 1 These parameters can be set only when operation is stopped 2 Use 40 AT when output scaling has been set If 100 AT is used hunt ing will occur 61 Setting Output Specifications Section 4 2 Example Making All TC4 Outputs into CH1 Control Output Heating with Dif ferent Slopes Actual output Output Parameter name Set value Output 1 Control output 1 assignment th ao out Output 2 Output Scaling Upper Limit 1 Output 3 Output Scaling Lower Limit 1 O e O Output 2 S output 2 assignment CH1 Control out put
67. 7900 e 800 556 6766 www omron247 com OMRON CANADA INC HEAD OFFICE OMRON ARGENTINA SALES OFFICE Toronto ON Canada 416 286 6465 866 986 6766 e www omron247 com Cono Sur e 54 11 4783 5300 OMRON ELETR NICA DO BRASIL LTDA HEAD OFFICE OMRON CHILE SALES OFFICE S o Paulo SP Brasil e 55 11 2101 6300 e www omron com br Santiago 56 9 9917 3920 OMRON ELECTRONICS MEXICO SA DE CV e HEAD OFFICE OTHER OMRON LATIN AMERICA SALES Apodaca N L e 52 811 156 99 10 001 800 556 6766 mela omron com 54 11 4783 5300 O 2009 Omron Electronics LLC Cat No H142 E1 04 02 10 Specifications are subject to change without notice Printed in U S A
68. 9999 See note 1 1999 EU on Je J om 0aF1 Disturbance Gain CHi_____ H FFFFFF9Gte H 00000064 1 0010 4 00 foes Jon je ori o2F2 Disturbance Time Gonstant CHT H 00000001 to H 0000270F 001109939 roo en je 0113 023 Disturbance Recilicaion Band CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 010 999 See note 2 oo Eu oh je J 0114 0aF4 Disturbance Judgment Widin CH1 _ H FFFFF8Si 10 H 0000270F 199 310 999 See note 2 00 eu Jen e Not used 0200 04E0 Input Digital Filter CH2 The rest are the same as channel 1 ME 0300 Input Digital Filter CH3 TC4 ey a 0400 Input Digital Filter CH4 TOA LEN Note 1 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the O decimal point position setting will be treated as a setting of 1 Vari CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit Target Unit i ple Category Add Address TC4 ype ress TC2 D6 Canbe 0100 0300 Heater Burnout 1 Detection H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 A IO TC2 96 changed i i during 0101 0301 HS Alarm 1 H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 e he he operation 0102 0302 Heater Overcurrent 1 Detection H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 A Jio TC2 Not used 0200 0500 Heater Burnout 2 Detection The rest are the same as
69. A Unit is not connected correctly Check Unit models and the order of connection The registered Unit configura Restore the registered Unit configuration or re tion does not match the actual register the configuration Unit configuration Basic Units Not lit only Red lit The same unit number is set for Correct the G3ZA unit number settings and then more than one connected G3ZA cycle the power supply Basic Units only There is an error in a connected Refer to the G3ZA Users Manual Cat No G3ZA Basic Units only Z200 and take the required ae ados In addition to the above the status of the following indicators can be used to determine the cause of and countermeasures for errors Green lit Not lit a C2 o is an error in a channel Read status to determine the channel that has Green flashing that is currently running an error and then determine the cause from the status of the ERR and ALM indicators 207 Determining Errors from Indicators Section 8 2 O saus Possible causes Countermeasure Ld Red flashing Red lit There is an input error ora remote SP input error An error has occurred for which the Operation During Error Selection B parameter is set to MV at PV Error or Stop control An error has occurred in commu nications with a connected G3ZA One of the following alarms has occurred heater burnout alarm heater shor
70. A heater burnout is detected by measuring the heater current while the control output heating is ON For details refer to the following table Heater burnout detection cannot be used with the control output for cooling output heating Power to heater HB Alarm output Yes Normal See note 1 No Heater burnout ON time i i See note 2 1 OFF time l l l ON Control output heating OFF 91 Detecting Current Errors 92 Note Note Section 4 5 1 In the above diagram power is considered to be ON normal if the heater current is greater than the heater burnout detection current during the ON time If the heater is burned out the current measured at the current transformer decreases When the current falls below the channel s Heat er Burnout Detection Value a heater burnout alarm HB Alarm will be output 2 Heater burnouts are not detected if the control output heating ON time is 100 ms or less Detection is also sometimes not possible if a contactor is used for the control output Variable type Setting range D6 96 See note 3 Heater Burnout 1 or 2 0 0 HB Alarm OFF Detection I O 0 1 to 99 9 A 100 0 HB Alarm ON E4 A4 See note 4 Heater Burnout 1 or 2 Hys 0 1 to 100 0 A teresis 1 0 Heater Current Value 1 or2 0 0 to 110 0 A Monitor I O Conditions for use There must be a CT input 3 The HB Alarm can be forced OFF or ON regardless of the actual heater current
71. Area Setting are issued Afterwards only oper ation commands for channels which have been changed are issued 2 The Operation Command Response Bits are set by the PLC PLC EJ1 Upload Area E Download Area Address Memory Adfress Memory HFU TC4 2 Ba ies perie Read Request Bits Its Setting Change Setting Change Response Bits Request Bits 0004 dd PE 0004 AAA Operation Communications neg Sees we n 4 ZZZZ ZZZZ operation Status instruction 3 The EJ1 repeats the bit specification parameter read operation 1 The EJ1 sets the Operation Command Request Bits HANN i ur m 0 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 4 e Stop Operation Operation is stopped after a series of operations has been completed PLC Upload Area Download Area dy ResSponss Read Request Bits Setting Change Setting Change 0000 0000 Oooo i I I I 1 The Operation Command Request Bits are cleared by the PLC Communications 2 The EJ1 clears the Operation Command Response Bits Reducing Try the following measures if communications are slow Communications time Communications may be reduced depending on the conditions Time Checkpoint IN Port C Send Wait Time Reduce the setting to reduce the communications wait time except when the programless communications protocol is NT Link 1 N Programless Upload Reduce the volume of communications data by reducing the Download Settings number of set valu
72. Assignment 166 Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment 166 Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment 166 Auxiliary Output 4 Assignment 166 Bank 0 Change to Bank 3 Change 150 186 187 Bus Input 1 to 3 Assignment 108 Bus Output 1 to 3 Assignment 108 Bus Output 1 to Bus Output 3 Assignment 167 Cold Junction Compensation Method 32 Control Output 1 Assignment 57 Control Output 2 Assignment 57 Control Output 3 Assignment 57 Control Output 4 Assignment 57 Control Period 1 to 4 58 CTI Assignment 91 CT2 Assignment 91 Dead Band 70 Decimal Point C1 to C4 61 Decimal Point Position 53 Delay between Outputs 59 Derivative Time 66 Derivative Time Cooling 70 Direct Reverse Operation 68 Disturbance Gain 83 Disturbance Judgment Width 83 Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function 82 Disturbance Rectification Band 83 Disturbance Time Constant 83 Event Input 1 or 2 Assignment 105 Heater Burnout 1 or 2 Detection 92 Heater Burnout 1 or 2 Hysteresis 92 Heater Burnout 1 or 2 Latch 92 Heater Current Value 1 or 2 Monitor 92 100 Heater Overcurrent or 2 Detection 100 Heater Overcurrent 1 or 2 Hysteresis 100 Index Heater Overcurrent or 2 Latch 101 HS Alarm 1 or 2 99 HS Alarm 1 or 2 Hysteresis 99 HS Alarm 1 or 2 Latch 100 Hysteresis Cooling 65 Hysteresis Heating 65 Independent heating cooling PID method 70 Input Digital Filter 56 Input Shift 1 53 Input Shift 2 53 Input Value 1 for Input Correction
73. Assignment O to 69 Common Conditions for use No special conditions 1 This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes effec tive the next time a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power is turned ON 2 The event input status is read when the power supply is turned ON This can result in unexpected operation at startup Take sufficient precautions when using event inputs e Operation can be switched by OFF to ON or ON to OFF event input tran sitions 105 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Section 4 7 E Stop 0 Run 1 Run 0 Stop 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 Local SP 0 Remote SP 1 Stop Oyun 1 Run 0Y Siop 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 Local SP 0 Remote SP 1 See note Note This function can be used only when the Remote SP Enable parameter is set to 1 Enable 4 7 3 Internal Buses TC4 and TC2 The EJ1 has three built in buses I O can be allocated to these buses so sim ple sequences can be created by assigning signals that are output to the bus Bus Output Assignments and assigning functions that operate according to bus signals Bus Input Assignments Note 1 Bus inputs cannot be used if a Basic Unit is used without an HFU Even if an HFU is used bus inputs cannot be used for Basic Units con nected to the RS 485 communications lines using distributed positioning Set using bus output as
74. BANK CH1 Function stops when set to 0 See note 1 EU min 0105 0245 Bank 0 SP Ramp Fall Value H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 to 9999 EU s or BANK CH1 Function stops when set to 0 See note 1 EU min Not used 0107 0247 Bank O Manual Reset Value H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 BANK 7 CH1 0108 0248 Bank 0 Cooling Coefficient CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 BANK j 0109 0249 Bank 0 Dead Band CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 199 9 to 999 9 See note 2 0 0 EU BANK Not used 010D 024D Bank O Alarm Value 1 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK 010E 024E Bank O Alarm Upper Limit Value H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 ar BANK 7 1 CH1 010F 024F Bank O Alarm Lower Limit Value H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 E BANK 87 1 CH1 0110 0250 Bank 0 Alarm Value 2 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK 0111 0251 Bank 0 Alarm Upper Limit Value H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 E BANK P 2 CH1 0112 0252 Bank 0 Alarm Lower Limit Value H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 SN BANK e 2 CH1 0113 0253 Bank 0 Alarm Value 3 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK 0114 0254 Bank O Alarm Upper Limit Value H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F
75. CT 100 101 CX Programmer 121 D D derivative time 67 dead band 69 decimal point position xix Device A Status HFU 267 Configuration Error 267 Device Error 267 External RAM Error at Operation 267 Internal Communications Error 267 Programless Link Error 267 Device A Status TC4 TC2 257 Channel Error 257 Configuration Error 257 Device Error 257 Expand Communications Error 257 I O Alarm 257 I O Error 257 T O Notification 257 Lower level I O Alarm 257 Lower level I O Error 257 Device B Status HFU 268 EEPROM 268 Registration of unit configuration Registration of multiple reads 268 Save RAM 2 268 Write Mode 268 Device B Status TC4 TC2 264 Configuration Registered 264 EEPROM 264 Registration of unit configuration Registration of multiple reads 264 Save Control Parameters 264 Save RAM 1 264 Save RAM 2 264 Write Mode 264 Device Error Status HFU 267 EEPROM Error 267 Model Information Data Error 267 Model Information Mismatching Error 267 Setting Value Error 267 Device Error Status TC4 TC2 258 Calibration Error 258 Configuration Registration Data Error 258 EEPROM 258 EEPROM Error 258 Model Information Mismatching Error 258 Setting Value Error 258 dimensions 12 direct operation cooling 68 disturbance gain 83 disturbance overshoot adjustment function 82 disturbance time constant 83 driver installation 26 E echoback test 185 EDU
76. CU1G CPULILIP CJ1G H CPULILJH NSJLJ LJLILIL B G5D NSJUO OUOULI B M3D Programmable Controllers Operation Manual SYSMAC CS CJ Series CS1G H CPULILI EV1 CS1G H CPULJ_IH CS1D CPU CPU A LH CS1D CPU 5 OLIS CJ1G CPU gt LI CJ1M LJ CJ1G CPULILIP CJ1G H CPU O0O0 B 65D NSJO 00 B M3D T LIH NSJLI Programmable Controllers Programming Manual SYSMAC CS CJ Series W394 W474 CS1G H CPULILI EV1 CS1G H CPULILJH CS1D LIH CS1D CPULILIS CJ2H CPULILI EIP CJ1G LJ CJ1M CPULILI CU1G CPULILIP CJ1G H LUH NSJLI LILILIL B G5D NSJU LLLULI B M3D Programmable Controllers Instructions Reference Manual SYSMAC CS Series CS1G H CPUUU EV1 CS1G H CPUUUH Programmable Controllers Operation Manual W339 e System design e System configuration Mounting and wiring Maintenance Troubleshooting Describes how to set parameters and adjust devices i e components such as Temperature Controllers using the CX Thermo Contents Provides an outlines of and describes the design installation maintenance and other basic opera tions for the CJ series PLCs Describes programming and other methods to use the functions of the CJ series PLCs Provides an outlines of and describes the design installation maintenance and other basic opera tions for the CJ series PLCs Describes programming and othe
77. Communications Error V 01E0 FOEO G3ZA1 Number of Current Error Detec V tion Delays Not used 0200 F100 G3ZA2 CH1 Slope The rest are the same as the G3ZA1 Oe 71 oo F200 G3ZA3 CH1 Slope EE 400 F300 G3ZA4 CH1 Slope EA 0500 G3ZA5 CH1 Slope E E A A a 8 9 A B C D E H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 Zo NUM O O O O O O O NUM O O O O O O O 01D 01D 01D 01D 01D 01D 01D 01 H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 Zo NUM H 00000000 to H 000000C8 0 to 200 Times NUM O Oo de o o Note 1 Valid after a Software Reset operation command or after power is turned ON Refer to the G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller User s Manual Cat No Z200 2 Parameters with the following mark are supported only by version 2 G3ZA Power Controllers Refer to the G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller User s Manual Cat No Z200 for information on G3ZA functionality 246 Parameter List Appendix Vari CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit Target Unit ia pie Category Add Address TC4 ype ress TC2 DA 0100 F000 G3PW1 Internal Duty Setting H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 100 NUM e J er 0101 F001 G3PW1 Base up Value H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 00 NUM j 0102 F002 G3PW1 Soft start Up Time H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 t
78. Control Output Cooling Channel 3 MV CH4 Control Output Cooling Channel 4 MV Note With a TC2 the Channel 3 and 4 MVs will be set to 0 0 The following outputs will be sent whether the control method is set to stan dard or heating cooling control TC4 G3ZA CH1 Control Output Heating Channel 1 MV CH2 Control Output Heating Channel 2 MV CH3 Control Output Heating Channel 3 MV CH4 Control Output Heating Channel 4 MV CH1 Control Output Cooling Channel 5 MV CH2 Control Output Cooling Channel 6 MV CH3 Control Output Cooling Channel 7 MV CH4 Control Output Cooling Channel 8 MV Note 1 When standard control is being used the Channel 5 to 8 MVs will be set to 0 0 2 With a TC2 the Channel 3 4 7 and 8 MVs will be set to 0 0 The outputs of predetermined channels are set in the G3ZA s MV but any MV can be output to multiple channels by setting the G3ZA s Source Channel Arithmetic operations can also be executed on each MV If the MV is stored or calculated at the G3ZA and the G3ZA is turned ON before the EJ1 the controlled variable produced at the G3ZA will be output the output may not be 0 0 until the EJ1 starts operating When using MV storage or MV calculation verify that the controlled variable produced by the G3ZA is appropriate m Example In this example the TC4 s channel 1 Control output heating is output to G3ZA channels 1 to 4
79. Control output cooling 0186 F086 G3PW1 Output Mode Selection H 00000000 Soe to Phase Angle for G3PX Compatibility 0 H 00000001 Proportional to Square Voltage 1 H 00000002 Proportional to Voltage 2 H 00000003 Constant Current 3 0187 F087 G3PW1 Input Digital Filter Time Constant H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 oe NUM e j 0188 F088 G3PW1 Input Signal Type H 00000000 Linear Input 0 UM H 00000001 Voltage ON OFF Input 1 0189 FO89 G3PW1 Main Setting Automatic Input Selec H 00000000 4 to 20 mA or 1 to 5 V 0 NUM tion H 00000001 Communications 1 018A FO8A G3PW1 Main Setting Manual Input Selection H 00000000 External Adjuster Input 0 NUM H 00000001 Key Input 1 018B FO8B G3PW1 Control Method Default H 00000000 Phase Control 0 NUM H 00000001 Optimum cycle control 1 018C FO8C G3PW1 Main Setting Automatic Manual H 00000000 Automatic 0 NUM Default H 00000001 Manual 1 018D FO8D G3PW1 Number of Alarms for Heater Burnout H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 to 999 ee NM Detection 018E FO8E G3PW1 Load Current Upper Limit H 00000000 to H 00000294 0 0 to 66 0 a fo 018F FO8F G3PW1 Event Input Assignment H 00000000 No Assignment 0 H 00000001 Control Method Selection 1 H 00000002 Main Setting Automatic Manual Selection 2 0190 FO90 G3PW1 Alarm Output Open in Alarm H 00000000 Close in alarm P NUM H 00000001 Open in alarm 1 0191 F091 G3PW1 He
80. Cooling CH2 Control Output Cooling CH3 Control Output Cooling CH3 Control Output Cooling PASAS AS AS UA PSN AS AS ee AS LAS ARAS AS Heating CH4 Control Output Cooling CH4 Control Output Cooling 1 When standard control is being used the Channel 1 to 4 control outputs for cooling are set to 0 0 2 With a TC2 the Channel 3 and 4 control outputs for heating and cooling are set to 0 0 The MV of any desired channel can be output by setting the communications main setting acquisition number on the G3PW By setting the communications main setting acquisition number from 1 to 8 the MV for the set number can be acquired from among the sent MVs and the corresponding output can be made If the communications main setting acquisition number is set to O the MV corresponding to the communications unit No will be acquired and output It is also possible to set Base up Value and Output Upper Limit or Output Lower Limit Communications main setting Output MV acquisition number Automatic Assignment according to the commu nications unit No CH3 Control Output A CH2 Control Output a A O Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Section 4 7 Communications main setting Output MV acquisition number CH3 Control Output Coating Jena Control Output Cooling N Caution When a base increase amount Output Upper Limit or Output Lower Limit has been set with the G3PW t
81. E Baud Rate Setting Setting 6510 15 75 Kops 19 2 kbps 38 4 Kbps 57 6 kbps 115 2 kbps See note OBH recommended Note If both channel 1 and channel 2 are used on the QU71C24 R2 make sure that the total baud rate for both channels is 115 2 kbps or less Note Make the same settings on the EJ1 E Communications Protocol Setting Communications protocol setting Programless Communications Protocol MC Protocol Format 5 MC Protocol format 5 0005H Note Make sure this setting is the same as the Programless Communi cations Protocol parameter E Station Number Setting Set to OOOOH to match the EJ1 setting If the station number of the Serial Communications Unit is set to any value except 0 set the programless communications node number in the EJ1 to the same value MELSEC QnA QnAS Make the settings shown in the following table for the channels being used A oes o o a Station number switch number switch Staton number swich switch X a protocol Binary mode Format 5 Transmission Operation setting Independent operation specifications Data bits bits 8 bits switch C 68 Note If both channel 1 and channel 2 are used make sure that the total baud rate for both channels is 115 2 kbps or less Note a If settings other than those listed above are made make the same settings on the EJ1 b Refer to the PLC operation manual for details on setting methods MELSEC An AnS FX3UC The settings a
82. No error Error There is an I O error Refer to O Error Status Bit 11 Lower level I O Error No error Error There is an error in the connected G3ZA Refer to Basic Unit Expand Unit Error Status Bit 12 I O Alarm No error Error There is an I O alarm Refer to O Alarm A Status and I O Alarm B Status Bit 13 Lower level I O Alarm No error Error An alarm has occurred in the connected G3ZA Refer to Basic Unit Expand Unit Alarm Status Bit 14 I O Notification No error Error There is an I O notification Refer to I O Notification A Status pitts Notused OOo o o Note The above information also applies to the G3PW 25 N Status Lists Appendix Device Error Status C4 84 0001 Bit position Bit description Bo Posa AUS EA Ws B owsa O S S Ba Notes Bs Noua O S S IN Bit 8 Configured Registration No error Error There is a memory error Data Error Error Bit 12 Model Information Mis No error Error There is a memory error matching Error Configuration Error A Status C4 84 0002 Bit position _ Bit description ptt ote Bit 4 Expand Unit Connec No error Error A communications response has not been received tion Fault from a G3ZA after it was registered in the configura tion E HO Bit N OUO A Bit 9 Bit 10 ENT EX TI O EXT Birta Notused Bit1S Notused ss Note The above information also applies to the GBPW 258 Status Lists Appendix Configuration Error B Status C4 84 0003 Bit O Expand
83. OC alarm output ON Normal See note 1 ON time See note 2 fe fc E ON Control output heating OFF Note 1 In the above diagram it is considered normal if the heater current is less than the heater overcurrent detection current When an excessive current flows in the heater the current will exceed the heater overcurrent detec tion value and a heater OC Alarm will be output 2 Heater overcurrents are not detected if the control output heating ON time is 100 ms or less Detection is also sometimes not possible if a con tactor is used for the control output Variable type Setting monitoring range Default D6 96 Heater Overcurrent 1 or 0 0 OC Alarm ON 100 0 See note 3 2 Detection 1 0 0 1 to 99 9 A 100 0 OC Alarm OFF E4 A4 Heater Overcurrent 1 or 0 1 to 100 0 A 0 1 See note 4 2 Hysteresis 1 0 C5 85 Heater Current Value 1 or 0 0 to 110 0 A 2 Monitor 1 0 Conditions for use There must be a CT input 100 Detecting Current Errors Section 4 5 3 The OC Alarm can be forced ON or OFF regardless of the actual heater current value by setting the OC Heater Overcurrent Alarm parameter to 0 0 or 100 0 Use the 0 0 and 100 0 settings to check operation 4 This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped The hysteresis setting prevents chattering at the detection point When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes effec tive the next ti
84. OFF during parameter registra ters tion after autotuning was completed and not all data was registered Bit 3 Registration of unit con No error Error Power was turned OFF during Unit configuration figuration Registration of registration or composite read registration and not multiple reads all data was registered Ba Note Bs Nate Be Nate Biz Note Bit 9 EEPROM RAM RAM Can confirm whether or not the setting is registered EEPROM EEPROM in EEPROM Bit10 Notas Bit 12 Configuration Regis Not regis Registered Configuration registration status can be confirmed tered tered BAS Notas ss Bit14 Nes Biti5 Notused OOOO 264 Status Lists Appendix Channel Status C4 84 0101 CH1 0201 CH2 0301 CH3 0401 CH4 Bit position a Bit description RUN STOP Run Stop can be confirmed Auto Manual Auto Manual can be confirmed AT Execute Cancel AT is AT Can confirm AT Execute Cancel stopped execution in progress Bit 3 SP Mode SP mode can be confirmed Bit 4 ST ST is ST is execut ST Execute Stop status can be checked stopped ing Bit 5 SP Ramp OFF Ramp is SP Ramp status can be checked executing B3 nowe OOO A B4 Notes Bes _ Notused A Channel Alarm Status C4 84 0102 CH1 0202 CH2 0302 CH3 0402 CH4 Bit position MA Bit description Bs nousa O S S pte Nate B9 Nate Bao Note Bitt1 Notused Bit 12 Set Point Limiter Out of The set point is outside the set point limiter range Range Bit 13
85. PTs using a Programmable Terminals RGB and Video Input Unit Opera NS series RGB and Video Input Unit including the tion Manual following information e Features system configuration and specifica tions e Functions setting methods and adjustment methods Smart Active Parts Reference Manual Describes the Smart Active Parts SAP function ality and the settings required to use the SAP library This document does not describe applica tion restrictions for specific Units or Components or restrictions in combinations Always refer to the operation manual for the products involved before using the SAP library xvii x a Software Manuals CXONE A eg asas EV3 ALL_ILID EV3 W463 Installation and overview of CX One FA Integrated CX One Ver 3 0 FA Integrated Tool Package Setup Manual Tool Package 446 CX Integrator Ver 3 0 Engl ver 20 en Manual Manual grator Network Configuration Tool for CS Cu CP and NSJ series Controllers SYSMAC WS02 CXPCL E V8 W Provides information on how to use the CX Pro CX Programmer Operation Manual grammer for all functionality except for function blocks Refer to the following manuals when program ming CJ Series CPU Unit Hardware Manual Cat No W472 and CJ Series CPU Unit Software Manual Cat No W473 CS Series Operation Manual for Setup Cat No CXONE Engl ver 20 en Manual EV3 CXONE ALLILID EV3 W464 Describes operating procedures for the CX Inte W339 and Programming Manual
86. Parameter List on page 235 for details on the settings 57 Setting Output Specifications Section 4 2 4 2 2 Control Output Method Note The time proportional output method is used for the control output The MV determines the percentage of time that the output is ON during each control period 100 80 60 40 20 LL wf Gf OFF gt Control period Note Control responsiveness improves as the control period is short ened but if relays are being used for heater control the relay life time will also be shortened so we recommend using a control period of at least 20 seconds Variable type Setting range Default E1 A1 Control Period 1 to 4 1 0 O to 99 s Conditions for use Control output must be assigned and set to 2 PID control These parameters are not valid for outputs 1 and 2 on Con trollers with linear outputs This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped If the parameter is set to O the period will be 0 5 s 4 2 3 Minimum output ON OFF width 58 Set the minimum output ON OFF width When using output relays this function can be used to prevent the relay from deteriorating The relationship between MV and actual output is shown in the following diagram aL Minimum output 2 1 ON OFF width 5 o O E 1 o 4 i 2 Minimum output o ON OFF width ae i MV 100 Example When the control period is 10 s the minimum output ON OFF width is 10 0 a
87. Possible cause Countermeasure The EJ1 does not appear in There is no power supply to Supply power from the EDU power the CX Integrator s Compo the EJ1 supply terminal Way F network Connection PC The Serial Communications Board SCB Unit SCU and the EJ1 communications set tings do not match SCB SCU RS 485 EJ1 SCB SCU CJ1W CIF11 RS 422A Converter RS 485 EJ1 Connection port Connection port Computer ETE EJ1 Port A EDU 216 CX one is not compatible with Use a version of CX One that is com patible with the EJ1 Ver 1 12 or later Correct the communications settings for the Serial Communications Unit User default settings User settings Serial communications mode Serial Gateway Data length 7 bit Stop bits 2 bit Parity Even bit Baud rate 38 4 kbps Refer to the CX Integrator Operation Manual W445 Note The Serial Communications Board SCB Unit SCU must be unit version 1 2 or later Refer to Unit Versions of CS CJ series Serial Communica tions Boards Units in the Serial Communications Board Unit Operation Manual W336 for information on checking unit versions Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors Direct Connection of NS series Section 8 4 No Communications Between the EJ1 and a Directly Connected NS Series PT Programmable Terminals Status o O Po
88. RDA gt AG lt Bs RD gt SDA ag SG DONOTUSE RS 422 RS 485 RS 232C RS 422 Port C communications Models with Connector Screw Terminal Terminals Block Model EDUA EDUC B B gt 6 A gt AC gt O RS 485 RS 485 EDUA Port A communications Port B communications EDUC Models with Connector Screw Terminal Terminals Block Model EDUA EDUC Note e f there are problems with communications noise performance when using the port A connector connect 110 to 125 Q of terminating resistance across terminals 1 and 2 of port A on the EDU e Specify both ends of the transmission path including the host computer as end nodes i e connect terminators to both end The minimum termi nating resistance is 54 Q E Connection Example Host Shield _ Terminator 110 to 125 Q 1 2 W 23 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 The RS 485 connection can be either 1 1 or 1 N RS 232C connections can only be 1 1 A maximum of 64 Units including the host can be con nected in 1 N systems The maximum total cable length is 500 m Use AWG28 cross sectional area 0 081 mm to AWG16 cross sectional 2 area 1 309 mm5 shielded twisted pair cable Cross sectional area of conductor AWG28 0 081 mm AWG16 1 309 mm2 Connecting to the G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller or G3PW Power Controller 24
89. Refer to the user s manual if using a Communications Module for the QnA QnAS Series 124 Programless Communications Section 5 1 2 Make the PLC settings Use the GX Developer to make the communications settings Start the GX Developer double click PLC Parameter under Parameter in the project tree click the I O Assignment Setting Tab click the Switch Setting Button on the I O Assignment Setting Tab Page and then set the communications port of the Serial Communications Unit as outlined below Channel Description Set Position Setting ae CH1 Transmission OBEEH on sete patabits fe o o o y ono Write during RUN Allowed b7 ON Setting modifica Allowed tions b8 to b15 Communications 115200 bps OBH rate setting SW02 f Communications protocol setting MC protocol format 5 0005H CH2 Swo8 Samesetingsasswor C C o O Station number setting a OOOOH Note 1 To set a different baud rate from that given above refer to Baud Rate Set ting on page 138 and change OB 2 Refer to MELSEC QnA QnAS Series on page 138 if using a Communi cations Module for the QnA QnAS Series 3 Make the EJ1 settings When using RS 232C turn ON pin 8 on SW 2 to select RS 232C and make the settings shown in the following table No other settings are re quired Variable type Setting Monitor values FO BO Programless Communications Protocol 5 MC protocol format 5 Common Port C Send Wait Time Common For the
90. Set Value Limiter No error Error The upper and lower set point limits are reversed Reverse Operation Bit 14 MV Limiter Reverse No error Error The upper and lower MV limits are reversed Operation Bit 15 Scaling Reverse No error Error The upper and lower scaling limits are reversed Operation 265 Status Lists Appendix HF CO Status C0 80 0001 Bitdescription Bitdescription INN INN IN AAA B2 Note Bs nowe OOOO O S Ba ows O G Bs nowe OOO O SSCS B6 w OOO O B7 Notes B8 ows A S Ca O S S Bo nowe OOO O Ca O S S B2 nowe A O Bas nowe OOO S SSCS Bia _ Notused O O Bs Notes Be nowe OO O S Baz Notes Bae nowe OOO O S O a MERO ERE SERRA Birzo Write Mode Backup so 21 Witte Mode _ RAM RAM Can confirm whether or not the setting is registered E TT in a Bit24 24 Not used used A ona O OOOO Beas Noted OOO O O S Beas Nous OOO O S O S Bitgo Nous OOO O S Best Noue OOO Cd 266 Status Lists Appendix Device A Status C4 84 0000 Bit O Device Error No error Error There is a memory error Refer to Device Error Status Configuration Error No error Error There is an error in the device configuration Refer to Configuration Error A Status Bit 3 External RAM Error at No error Error There is a memory error Operation Bit 4 Internal Communica No error tions Error Error There is a programless communications error Set when one of the programless error status bits turns ON
91. TC2 Co 80 Monitor 0000 Process Value CHT H FFFFF31 to H 0000270F 199910 9999 See note 2 EU en e a ane EEES TU O CA CI 0002 imtemalsP CHI H FFFFFBST1o H 0000270F 1999 o 9998 See note 2 eu em Je 0004 MV Monitor Heating CH1 H FFFFFFCE to H o000041A 50101050 e Ja fe 0005 MV Monitor Cooling CH1 HFEFFFFCE to HF 0000041A 5 010 105 0 e a Je j 0100 Process Value CH2 The rest are the same as channel 1 EA 0200 Process Value CH3 WE E COE Process Value CH4 A AAA AA AA A A A A A 2000 0080 Process value CH1 H FEFFFBS1 to H 0000270F 1999 10 9989 See note 2 Jeu Jn Je J 8001 0081 Process Value CH2 H FFFFF881 to H 0000270F 1999 t0 9999 See note 2 eu on fe M 2002 0082 Process Value CHS WT FFFEFES to H 0000270F 19591 9909 See noe 2 feu fn fo H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 2 JEU ch e 2004 0084 Chanel Alarm Saus OHT See Sats tson paee Je fe fa te 2005 0085 Channel Alarm Status 0H2 See Status Lists on page 2 e an fe 7 2006 0086 Channel Alarm Status OH3 See Status isis on page 258 e fan fe 7 2007 0087 Channel Alarm Status OH4 See Status isis on page 258 e an e 8008 0088 Channel Status CHI See Status Lisis on page 258 Pf fan fe 8009 0089 Channel Status OH2 See Status Lists on page 2 fe fan te e 8004 008A Channel Status CH8 See Status Li
92. TC4 CH1 Control Output Heating G3ZA CH2 Control Output Heating Channel 1 MV CH3 Control Output Heating Channel 2 MV CH4 Control Output Heating Channel 3 MV Channel 4 MV Operation Operation Operation Operation Set with the Source Channel parameter Channel 1 controlled variable Channel 2 controlled variable Channel 3 controlled variable Channel 4 controlled variable Set with the Slope and Offset parameters 111 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Initial Settings 1 2 3 Connection Example 112 Section 4 7 G3ZA settings CH1 Source Channel CH2 Source Channel CH3 Source Channel CH4 Source Channel 4 7 5 Using the G3PW The G3PW cannot be used in the condition in which it is shipped Make the following settings 1 Connect the G3PW to a Basic Unit Up to eight Units can be connected to one Basic Unit If more than eight Units are connected a configuration error will occur GPW Units and G3ZA Units cannot be used in combination Turn ON pin 7 of SW2 on the Basic Unit and make the following settings Set the main setting auto manual switch on the G3PW to auto 0 set the event input allocation to no allocation 0 or control method switch 1 set the main setting auto input switch to communications 1 set the main set ting auto manual switch default mode to auto 0 set the baud
93. UnitNo Channel Patameterneme _ _ da Common End Code Common End Code Common End Code Common End Code Common End Code Common End Code Common Erid Code Common End Code Common End Code Common End Code Common End Code Common End Code Common End Code Common End Code Common End Code Common End Code Common End Code Common End Code Common End Code Common End Code Darrian End Pada zj PLC Memory Orem o Reading Response Flag Doo gt o Reading Demand Flag Ee Setting Change Response Flag i ee Setting Change Demand Flag omen 2 Operation Command Response Flag pions 2 Operation Command Demand Flag 3 Communications Counter D1003 3 Operation Command MN poc Value D1004 is 1 Present Bank Set Point 5 2 Va pis s 2 PresentBank Set Point 6 peca pide s Common End Code 7 reco MA 7 Common End Code El Local SP Monitor pie s Common End Code 3 Remote SP Monitor Dima a Common End Code 10 a Monitor ping 10 Common End Code onitor Heating gt 1 MY Monitor Cooling CO 11 Common End Code 12 acai Fon pontos AM 12 Common End Code resent Bank Set Point Present Bank Proportional Band a chs ee re 15 Common End Code pms 15 Common End Code 16 Common End Code Dime i Common End Code 17 Common End Code MER 17 End Code 18 Common End Code Dime is Common End Code 19 Ti 19 20 pio 20 21 pine 21 2 Dia 22 23 bing 23 24 pigs 4 25 M a 26 Dime 26 ome 2 2 Doa 2 29 manda aa I p E 230 Te tS OO a O OA AS reir ie E
94. Units connected to the HFUSs are all the same model the HFU and Basic Unit settings can be copied to other HFUs and Basic Units overwriting the initial settings HFU Programless communications operation communications unit No See note Same operation as when the communications unit number is O Same operation as when the communications unit number is 1 Note When connecting using CX Thermo set the Communications Unit that is actually set on the unit 164 Connecting More Than One HFU Section 5 2 The communications unit numbers can be assigned sequentially S l EJ1 SYSMAC CS CJ Series HFU TC TC TC DDDO o cca 00 o RI RI ALA ID OS RS 485 Communications unit No 14 Communications Communications Communications unit No 32 unit No 0 unit No 1 The communications unit numbers can be assigned in the same configuration and the Basic Units can be copied in blocks Communications unit No 14 Communications Communications Communications unit No 39 unit No 0 unit No 1 165 Other HFU Functions Section 5 3 5 3 Other HFU Functions 5 3 1 Auxiliary Output Allocations The parameters that can be set for auxiliary outputs 1 to 4 are outlined below SUB2 SUB3 SU
95. Use a SAP for serial Programmable nection Terminal connection An E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial The CX Thermo Support Software NS series Conversion Cable is con and Programmable Terminals cannot nected to port A and the CX be used at the same time rn Thermo Support Software is Close the CX Thermo Support Soft started ware if using Programmable Termi nals PLC To temporarily use the CX Thermo CS CJ Support Software either turn OFF SCB SCU the Programmable Terminal or move the Programmable Terminal to the RS 485 EJ1 System Screen and stop Program mable Terminal communications The Serial Communications Correct the communications settings Board SCB Unit SCU and for the Serial Communications Unit the EJ1 communications set NS series tings do not match User default settings User settings Serial communications mode Serial Gateway Data length 7 bit Stop bits 2 bit Parity Even bit Baud rate 38 4 kbps PLC CS CJ SCB SCU CJ1W CIF11 RS 422A Converter RS 485 EJ Refer to the CX Integrator Operation Manual W445 Connection port Note The Serial Communications port Board SCB Unit SCU must PPT fe be unit version 1 2 or later PLC f Refer to Unit Versions of CS CJ series Serial Communica SCU Po tions Boards Units in the Serial Communications Board Unit Operation Manual W336 for information on chec
96. Value CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 to 9999 See note 1 EU s or BANK Function stops when set to 0 EU min 0105 02A5 Bank 3 SP Ramp Fall Value CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 to 9999 See note 1 EU s or BANK Function stops when set to 0 EU min Not used 0107 02A7 Bank 3 Manual Reset Value CH1 H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 BANK 0108 02A8 Bank 3 Cooling Coefficient CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 BANK e 0109 02A9 Bank 3 Dead Band CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 199 9 to 999 9 See note BANK F 2 Not used 010D o2AD Bank Aarm Value 1 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1899 t0 968 See note 1 0 EU eane Je gt 010E 02AE Bank Alarm Upper Limi Value 1 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU Bank e oro 02AF Bank Alarm Lower Limi Value 1 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU Bank e oro 0280 Banks Alarm Value 2 CH1 H FFEFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU Bank e or 0261 Bank Alarm Upper Limit Value 2 OHT H FFFFF881 to H 0000270F 1988 to 98999 See note 1 0 EU fean o J forte 0282 Bank Alarm Lower Limit Value 2 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F C1899 to 9989 See note 1 0 EU eane e ori 0283 Barks Alarm Value 3 CHI H FFFFFAS1 to H 0000270F 1909 to 9999 See note o EU Bank e H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999
97. Value BANK e Je A Present Bank SP Ramp Fall Value Bank e Je Present Bank Alarm Upper Limit Value Y ma fe fe Present Bank Alar Lower Limit Value t a e fe Present Bank Alarm Value 2 a fe fe Present Bank Alarm Upper Limit Value 2 mam o e Present Bank Alarm Lower Limit vawe aa fo e Present Bank Alarm Value 3 aa fe te Present Bank Alarm Upper Limit Value 3 ma o e Present Bank Alarm Lower Limit Valus 9 aa fo e input Vals 1 for Input Oorredion fa e te COI 000 COIN COIN E input Value 2 fr Input Correas o te te CE 1000 e CO 269 Parameters That Can Be Allocated for Programless Communications Appendix Function Paramor O aoue Upload Download Remarks Present Bank Integral Time fa fe fe Present Bank Derivative Time fa fe fe Present Bank Manual Reset Value O o Te e pe Present Bank Cooling Coote paa fo e Present Bank Dead Band aa fe te Present Bank Proportional Band Goong HER aa o fe Present Bank Integral Time Cooling ME paa fo e Present Bank Derivative Time Cooling BANK e Je IA TN CN e y O 0 ee e S yyy O 0 CI CO O E CN CO Hysteresis Heating a te te Hysteresis Cooling a te te CI E CIS CONOS CI 0 CIN CONS EEN swansea o o o te te Disturbance Time Gonsiant To o e gt Disturbance Rectification Band fe fe Disturbance Judgmentwath fa fe fe aza MEE CH1 Control variable Montar NUM fe e gt Spero He Control Variable Mantra e gt O o omscowovaia
98. Variable type Setting range _ Default F2 B2 Bus Input 1 to 3 Assignment TC4 0 to 132 Common TC2 0 to 69 Bus Output 1 to 3 Assignment TC4 0 to 150 Common TC2 0 to 87 Conditions for use No special conditions Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes effective the next time a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power is turned ON m Example Example In this example an All channels Alarm 1 OR output and an All channels Alarm 2 OR output are output to the End Unit s auxiliary outputs All channels Alarm 1 OR output Al channels Alarm 2 OR output Model Parametername Setvalues TC4 Bus Output 1 Assignment All channels Alarm 1 OR Bus Output 2 Assignment All channels Alarm 2 OR Ms channels Note Refer to 4 4 Setting Alarm Specifications Alarm 1 OR output for details on the alarm settings All channels Alarm 2 OR output Note When assigning bus l O disable all bus I O assignments first and then make the settings 4 7 4 Using G3ZA Multi channel Power Controllers Note 1 Version 2 G3ZA Power Controllers can also be connected to version 1 0 EJ1 Temperature Controllers 2 When using ST do not use MV calculation on the G3ZA Initial Settings The following procedure is required in order to use a G3ZA The G3ZA cannot be used in
99. W type When using RS 232C Normal RS 232C Transmission control procedure default 1 If any other settings are used change the setting for the EJ1 to the same settings 2 Refer to the user s manual for the PLC for setting methods 3 Make the EJ1 settings Make the following settings When using RS 232C turn ON pin 8 on SW 2 to select RS 232C No other settings are required Variable type Setting Monitor values Programless Communications Protocol 4 AnA AnU CPU Com Common mon Commands Port C Send Wait Time Common Port C Baud Rate Common 4 19 2 kbps For the default settings data registers in the PLC are allocated to the EJ1 monitor and set values as shown in the following table If the allocated words shown below are already in use change the words referring to Pro gramless Communications Upload Download Data Area Variable Type FO BO on page 134 and to Programless Communications Upload Down load Start Address Variable Type FO BO on page 135 Contents set value D01500 Read Request Bits D01501 Setting Change Request Bits 4 Check operation Turn OFF the power to the EJ1 and PLC and then turn the power back ON It does not matter which one is turned ON first Refer to the Basic Opera tions on page 126 and check the operation Programless Communications 5 1 3 Detailed Settings Link Data Settings Note Note Section 5 1 Link data settings are made to set which EJ1 valu
100. and the EJ1 the EJ1 supply terminal The Serial Communications Refer to the respective manuals and Board SCB Unit SCU wir wire the connection correctly ing is incorrect See Related Manuals on page xiv ES The port C communications Turn ON pin 8 on the HFU settings PLC are set to RS 485 switch 2 SW2 to set to RS 232C CS CJ The Serial Communications Connect the SCU RS 232C port to SCB SCU Board SCB Unit SCU RS the EJ1 RS 232C port 485 port is connected to the EJ1 RS 232C port The EJ1 programless commu nications parameters are incorrect Connection RS 232C EJ1 Refer to 5 1 Programless Communi cations in SECTION 5 Advanced Unit HFU Functions and check the set tings The Serial Communications Same as above Board SCB Unit SCU com munications settings are incorrect Connection port Connection port EJ1 Port C HFU RS 232C No communications between There is no power supply to Supply power from the EDU power the PLC and the EJ1 the EJ1 supply terminal The Serial Communications Refer to the respective manuals and Connection Board SCB Unit SCU wir wire the connection correctly See Related Manuals on page xiv Pe The port C communications Turn OFF pin 8 on the HFU settings PLC o are set to RS 232C switch 2 SW2 to set to RS 485 ing is incorrect CS CJ The Serial Communications Connect th
101. auxiliary outputs are sent from pins 3 to 6 Connector Terminal Block Model EDUC HFU EDU Output type Transistor Max operating voltage 30 VDC outputs Max load current 50 mA Residual voltage 1 5 V max leakage current 0 4 mA max When the heater burnout HB heater overcurrent OC or heater short HS alarm is to be used connect a Current Transformer CT across terminals A8 and A9 or terminals A7 and A9 no polarity on the TC2 21 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 CT2 HERZ 8 TC2 e Use a E54 CT1 or E54 CT3 Current Transformer Event Inputs Connect event inputs across terminals A4 and A6 for the TC2 and terminals A1 and A6 for the HFU Y DO EV4 a EV3 o gt Eve 43 43 Ga l EV2 EV2 qq EV1 162 SEE HFU Contact inputs Non contact inputs e The inflow current is approximately 4 mA e Use event inputs under the following conditions Contact inputs ON 1 KQ max OFF 100 kQ min Non contact ON Residual voltage 1 5 V max OFF Leakage current 0 1 mA inputs max Communications e For communications with the host connect communications across termi nals B7 and B8 or terminals A7 to A9 on the HFU or connect across ter minals 1 and 2 or terminals 6 and 7 on the EDU When using a connector terminal block model connect communications across terminals 7 and 8 22 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 nr 1 RDB gt B 4 B7 A7 gt SD gt SDB
102. be set separately for heating and cooling 17 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 Output l Heating Cooling MV Lower Limit MV Upper Limit Output Mode Selection Heating cooling control Variable type Parameter name Setting range Default D5 95 MV Upper Limit Channel 5 0 to 105 0 for standard control 105 0 0 0 to 105 0 for heating cooling control MV Lower Limit Channel 5 0 to 105 0 for standard control 105 0 105 0 to 0 0 for heating cooling control Conditions for use The control method must be set to 2 PID control and ST must be disabled Note Setthe limits so that the MV Upper Limit gt MV Lower Limit If the MV Lower Limit gt MV Upper Limit the larger value will function as the MV Upper Limit 4 3 8 Tuning Autotuning AT When autotuning AT is executed the MV is forcibly changed the control subject s characteristics are observed with the limit cycle method and the best PID constants are automatically set for the SP during execution e Autotuning cannot be executed while control is stopped during manual mode operation or during ON OFF control e Use an operation command to execute autotuning For details refer to 6 4 11 Operation Commands e The only parameters that can be received during autotuning are RUN STOP Auto Manual AT Execute Cancel Alarm 1 2 3 Latch Cancel and Alarm Latch Cancel All Other parameters cannot be changed e If the STOP parameter
103. by the time required for one cycle of communications with all Units E Power Interruptions If power is interrupted to one HFU communications will still continue for the other HFUs A communications standby time will occur for the HFU that does not have power and so communications will increase in length by the time required for one cycle of communications with all Units The operation of the HFU after power is restored is different for the master HFU and other HF Us A programless link error may occur depending on when the master HFU is started If the Selection of Programless Communications Operation during Error parameter is set to continue operation then communications will recover automatically after power is restored Other HFUs Communications will recover automatically after power is restored 163 Connecting More Than One HFU Section 5 2 5 2 3 HFU Communications Unit No In addition to O through 7 32 through 39 can also be used as HFU communi cations unit numbers Setting the communications unit number to 32 through 39 will result in the following improvements e Even when using 32 Basic Units the communications unit numbers can be assigned sequentially simplifying the settings for communications unit numbers including those for HFUs e The communications unit numbers for Basic Units can be assigned start ing from No O allowing bit specification operation commands to be effec tively used e If the Basic
104. command code Operation command command code Hexadecimal RUN STOP Manual Auto 40 AT Execute The Programless Communications Utility for EJ1 can be started under Start Program OMRON CX one CX Thermo Programless Communica tions Utility for EJ1 Example Calculation of Operation Command Codes for Programless Communications Channel Operation command Operation command code hexadecimal Run 2809 ooo oo All units All channels 2809 150 40 AT Execute 100 AT Execute AT Cancel Stop 2C09 Manual 3009 Auto 3409 3809 3C09 4009 Any unit number between 0 and 31 or all Units can be selected Any channel between 1 and 4 or all channels can be selected Programless Communications Section 5 1 Structure of Operation Command Codes for Programless Communications Bitposition Meaning OOo 4 All channels specified 1 bit Related information 2 bits 3 All Units specified 1 bit Unit specification 6 bits Command code 6 bits 151 Programless Communications Section 5 1 Details of Operation Command Codes for Programless Communications All channels specified Related Information All Units specified 7 6 5 4 Write Mode Software Reset un Stop Manual Auto 40 AT Execute 100 AT Execute AT Cancel Bank 0 Change Bank 1 Change Bank 2 Change Bank 3 Change Local SP Change Remote SP Change oO oO oO O O CO
105. connector terminal block has been added to the End Units EDU and the functions of previous models have been improved Information in this manual related to improved functionality is indicated with the mark The improved functionality is outlined below eBasic Units TC4 TC2 e Autotuning is provided for heating cooling control e Self tuning has been added e A switch can be used to display the output status on the operation indicators during operation e Modbus communications can be used to read and write all parameters and to executed any of the operation commands e A switch setting can be changed to use Modbus communications on port B e A switch setting can be used to set the baud rate of port B e A C0 80 status has been added for to the variable types e Up to eight G3PW Power Controllers can be connected to one Basic Unit Note 1 The G3PW can be connected to EJ1 V1 1 2 The G3PW and G3ZA cannot be used together e Advanced Unit HFU e Bit specification operation commands have been added to the parameters that can be specified for programless download settings This simplifies the program when operation commands are exe cuted e The G3ZA or G3PW Monitor parameter has been added to the parameters that can be specified for programless upload settings Up to four G3ZA Multi channel Power Controllers or up to four G3PW Power Controllers can be connected to one TC4 TC2 Unit e The maximum number of parameters that can be spec
106. data area in PLC memory With the Read Setting operation the value set under Programless Download Setting is read to the upload data area in PLC memory to confirm that the setting is correct 3 The EJ1 sets the Read Response Bits LC EJ1 Upload Area WA Download Area address Value _ K HFU T042 meo 0003 0003 a wet a AS p q 1 The Read Request Bits are Operation Command Operation Command set by the PLC Communications Operation etting m 4 Set Value A 4 Set Value A Set Value A Set Value A q Set Value A f Set Value A y Programless Same parameter hy 2 The EJ1 refreshes the monitor value Programless Communications Section 5 1 e Read Settings 2 The value set under Programless Download Setting is read to the down load data area in PLC memory This can be used to initialize settings in the PLC memory 3 The EJ1 sets the Read Response Bits PLC EJ1 Upload Area Ba Download Area Address vale JA Value 0004 nso 0004 Setting Change Setting Change Response Bits Request Bits nae Operation Command n42 Operation Command Response Bits Request Bits I I I 1 The Read Request Bits are set by the PLC Programless Download Setting E Set Value A i Set Value A Communications Operation Status Command Code Monitor Value m Set Value A I 2 The EJ1 refreshes the set value e Stop Operation Operation is stopped after a series of operations has been compl
107. default settings data registers in the PLC are allocated to the EJ1 monitor and set values as shown in the following table If the allocated words shown below are already in use change the words referring to Programless Communications Upload Download Data Area Variable Type FO BO on page 134 and to Programless Communications Upload Download Start Address Variable Type FO BO on page 135 Data register Contents monitor value Data register Contents set value DO Read Response Bits D1500 Read Request Bits Setting Change Response Bits D1501 Setting Change Request Bits Operation Command Response Bits D1502 Operation Command Request Bits Communications Status D1503 Operation Command Code Monitor Value A D1504 Set Value A 125 Programless Communications Section 5 1 Data register Contents monitor value Monitor Value B Data register Contents set value D1505 Set Value B 4 Check operation Turn OFF the power to the EJ1 and PLC and then turn the power back ON It does not matter which one is turned ON first Refer to the following infor mation and check the operation Basic Operations 126 E Monitoring EJ1 Set Values Use the following procedure to confirm that the channel 1 and channel 2 pro cess values can be read 1 2 3 1 Set the Read Request Bits allocated in PLC memory D1500 to 2 2 Confirm that the Read Response Bits DO are set to 2 3 Confirm that D4 and D5 are set to the channel 1 and ch
108. executed in tuning mode ENS Normal end The service was processed normally 199 Detailed Description of Services Section 7 5 Command Response Example The following command writes the set point of channel 1 Slave address H 01 Write start address H 0240 Write data H 03E8 to write a set point of 100 0 C Command 01 10 0240 0001 02 03E8 8BEE CRC 16 Response 01 10 0240 0001 01A5 CRC 16 7 5 3 Single Write to Variable Area Command Response 200 This service either writes data to the variable area or executes one of the operation commands given in the table in 2 Write Data below Function code Slave Write start Write data CRC 16 address address H 06 1 1 2 2 2 Function code Slave Write start Write data CACHE address address H 06 1 1 2 2 2 1 Write Start Address Set the write start address to H FFFF or H 0000 when using version NA when executing an operation command When writing to the vari able area refer to Parameter List on page 235 2 Write Data When executing an operation command place the command code in the upper byte of the write data and place the related information in the lower byte When writing data to the variable area refer to Parameter List on page 235 Operation command TC related information Write Mode 04 00 Backup 01 RAM Software Reset 06 Always 00 Detailed Description of Services Note Section 7 5 Operation command TC related information AN OR 0
109. fault occurs that causes an increase in tem perature while control is being applied to increase the temperature e g a solid state relay short circuit fault e Detection is not possible if a fault occurs that causes a decrease in tem perature while control is being applied to decrease the temperature e g a heater burnout fault 103 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Section 4 7 4 7 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 4 7 1 Bank Function Up to 4 banks can be created with the following parameters registered inde pendently e Set point e Proportional Band e Integral Time e Derivative Time e SP Ramp Rise Value SP Ramp Fall Value Manual Reset Value e Cooling Coefficient e Dead Band e Alarm Value 1to3 Alarm Upper Limit Value 1 to 3 Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 to 3 The currently selected bank s parameters can be read or written by reading or writing the Present Bank parameters Currently selected bank Present bank Set point Set noaint Proportional Band Proportional Band Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 to 3 Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 to 3 The following table shows the relationship between the banks and variable types Variable yoe Ba Present Bank Changing the Bank The bank can be switched with an event input internal bus or operation com mand Changing the Bank With The bank can be switched by setting Bank Bit 0 in the Event Input 1 Assign an Event Input ment and Bank Bit 1
110. for Input Correction for Input Correction Calculating Input Measure the temperature at two points the present value displayed by the Shift Values EJ1 and the location control target that needs to be displayed Preparations 1 Setthe input type to match the sensor being used 2 Prepare a thermometer capable of measuring the temperature of the con trol target as shown in the following diagram so that a 2 point shift can be performed A EJ1 Temperature Controller B Thermometer 54 Setting Input Specifications Section 4 1 Two point Shift Method 1 2 3 1 Shift the controller readout at two reference temperatures near room tem perature and near the value at which the temperature of the control target is to be controlled Bring the temperature of the control target close to room temperature and close to the set point and check control target tempera ture B and controller readout A 2 Check the temperature of the control target near room temperature B and the controller readout A and calculate the temperature difference as shown below Object temperature B Controller readout A Set the temperature difference as Input Shift 1 and set the controller read out A as Input Value 1 for Input Correction 3 Check the temperature of the control target near set point temperature B and the controller readout A and calculate the temperature difference as shown below Object temperature B Controller
111. for Programma ble Controllers Cat No W394 CJ Series CJ Series Programmable Controllers Operation Manual Cat No W393 and Program ming Manual for Programmable Controllers Cat No W394 SYSMAC WS02 CXPCL E V8 W447 Describes the functionality unique to the CX Pro CX Programmer Ver 8 0 Operation Manual grammer Ver 7 0 and CP series CPU Units or CS Function Blocks CJ series CPU Units with unit version 3 0 or later CS1G CPULILIH CS1H CPULITH based on function blocks Functionality that is the CJ1G CPULILH CJ1H CPUOOH same as that of the CX Programmer is described CJ1M CPULIL CP1H XOD00 0 14y 4AE enclosed CP1H XALILJLILI LJ CP1H YULII _ CPU Units SYSMAC CX Designer Ver 1 0 V088 Describes how to install and use the CX Designer NS CXDC1 V1 including screen data creation methods screen Operation Manual data transfer methods and system settings NSJ5 SQLUIL 1 B G5D NSJ8 TVULI B G5D NSJ10 TVUL B G5D NSJ12 TSULI B G5D Ladder Monitor Operation Manual Ladder Monitor l O NS Series V082 Describes the NS series PT monitoring function NS5 SQ0L B V1 V2 for CS CJ series PLC ladder programs including NS5 TQOL B V2 the following information NoE ies ae e Overview and features NS10 TVOL B V1 V2 soelupmetmods NS12 TSOL B V1 V2 mie ASIC OPRTANONS NSJ5 TQULI B G5D e Troubleshooting B Comment Extracting Tool xviii Conventions Used in This Manual Meanin
112. from Heater Burnout Detection 1 to Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 Note 1 Parameters with the following mark are supported only by version 1 1 Temperature Controllers Refer to Functional Upgrades on page xxvi for details on upgraded functionality 2 Can only be used by improved models For details on improved models refer to Functional Upgrades on page xxiv 243 Parameter List Appendix Vari CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit ia pie Category Add Address TC4 ype ress TC2 DA Canbe 0100 F000 G3ZA1 CH1 Slope H 00000000 to H 00000FA0 0 0 to 400 0 100 0 9A changed 9 during 0101 FOOt G3ZA1 CH2 Slope H 00000000 to H OOOOOFAO 0 0 to 400 0 100 0 operation 0102 F002 G3ZA1 CH3 Slope H 00000000 to H OOOOOFAO 0 0 to 400 0 100 0 NUM 0103 F003 G3ZA1 CH4 Slope H 00000000 to H OOOOOFAO 0 0 to 400 0 100 0 NUM G3ZA1 CT4 Heater Overcurrent Detec NUM tion Value G3ZA1 Offset Control H 00000000 Disabled 0 1 H 00000001 Enabled 1 H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to 165 5 N 0123 F023 0124 F024 Z C CAES je E e j wm fe E wm je wm je 0108 F008 GSZA1 CH1 Ofset H FFFFFo60 to H 00000FA0 4000104000 00 NUM e 0109 Foo Geza1 CH2 Ose H FFFFF060 to H 00000FA0 400 010 400 0 00 mum e 010A Fooa GSZAT CHG Offset F FFFFFOG0 to H 00000FA0 4000104000
113. har am All Alarm AND Input Error Alarm Alarm 1 to 3 OR RSP Input Error m larm RSP Input Error OR OC Heater Overcurrent Alarm HB Heater Burnout Alarm OR Process Value A HS Heater Short Alarm OR Internal SP fing poling OC Heater Overcurrent Alarm OR Local SP ae Remote SP ating poling doling Control Output Heating ling F ue Control Output Cooling i g polng Transfer Output Heating Transfer Output Cooling OS Alarm 1 to 3 AND HB Heater Burnout Alarm a A Note 1 Temperature Controller Error The Temperature Controller Error output will turn ON when an bit be tween bit O and bit 13 in the Device A Status is ON It can be used to out put EJ1 error status Refer to Status Lists on page 256 for details on Device A Status 2 If any parameters other than those marked with 1 and 2 are assigned to outputs for Controllers with linear outputs 100 will be output for ON and 0 will be outputs for OFF This will also apply to parameters marked with 2 if the control method is set to ON OFF control Variable type Parameter name Setting range Default E1 A1 Control Output 1 Assignment I O 0 to 144 Control Output 2 Assignment I O 0 to 144 Control Output 3 Assignment I O O to 144 Control Output 4 Assignment I O O to 144 Conditions for use No special conditions Note These parameters can be set only when operation is stopped Refer to
114. in writing to Omron within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original trans portation bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Products from Omron in the condition claimed Warranties a Exclusive Warranty Omron s exclusive warranty is that the Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron or such other period expressed in writing by Omron Omron disclaims all other warranties express or implied b Limitations OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ABOUT NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABIL 14 ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Products or oth erwise of any intellectual property right c Buyer Remedy Omron s sole obli gation hereunder shall be at Omron s election to i replace in the form originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof the non complying Product ii repair the non complying Product or iii repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price of the non complying Product provided that in no event shall Omron be responsi ble f
115. input type or related parameters For parameters that set ranges with upper and lower limits the specifications now allow the upper and lower limits to be reversed Refer to 4 1 3 Analog Inputs 4 3 4 Setting the Set Point and MV Limiter on page 77 in Section 4 Basic Units TC4 TC2 before using the EJ1 Automatic Offsetting Accompanying changes outlined under Fixed Values for Setting Ranges of Setting Values above there are no longer any restrictions in operations for the target value limiter or target values for changes in the input type Under the new specifica tions there is also no need to change control output assignments when oper ations such as selecting heating and cooling are performed Refer to 4 2 7 Control Output Assignments Heating Cooling Control on page 69 and 4 3 4 Setting the Set Point in Section 4 Basic Units TC4 TC2 before using the EJ1 6 1 1 Communications Specifications Parameter name EDU Port A Port B Transmission path connection Multipoint RS 485 Retry function e The following communications settings are used e EDU Port A The following settings are fixed Baud rate 38 4 kbps Communications data length 7 bit Communications stop bits 2 bit Parity Even bit e EDU Port B 170 Communications Settings Section 6 1 Setting range Default Setting method Unina 001068 or eww Port B communications protocol 0 CompoWay F se CompoWay 1 Modbus Port B communi
116. is effective only when using heating cooling control o Heating A Cooling Sn point S point Heating control Cooling control Variable type Setting range _ Default Hysteresis Heating Channel 0 1 to 999 9 EU Hysteresis Cooling Channel 0 1 to 999 9 EU 1 0 Conditions for use The control method must be set to ON OFF control Note The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the 0 decimal point position setting will be treated as setting 1 A f 65 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 E Three position Control In heating cooling control a dead band area can be set where the MV is 0 for both heating and cooling with a dead band 3 position control can be achieved Dead band Hysteresis Heating Hysteresis Cooling ON Heating side Cooling side OFF PV A Set point 2 PID Control Two The proportional band P integral time I and derivative time D must be degrees of freedom set for 2 PID control PID E PID Settings When the control characteristics are unknown perform autotuning AT or self tuning ST with MA When AT or ST with MAH is executed the opti mum PID constants for the set point at that time are set automatically When the control characteristics are already known the PID parameters can be set directly to adjust control The PID parameters are set with the Propor tional Band P Integral Time I and Derivati
117. is set during autotuning autotuning will be can celled and operation will stop Autotuning will not be restarted even if RUN is set again e Executing 40 AT is not possible for heating cooling control e When using the independent cooling heating PID method the PID con stant will be set automatically for the heating and cooling side e Normally the following parameters are left at their default settings Variable type Setting range Default E5 A5 AT Calculated Gain Common 0 110100 08 AT Hysteresis Channel 0 1 to 999 9 EU See note 2 Limit Cycle MV Amplitude Common 5 0 to 50 0 Temporary AT Execution Judgment Deviation 0 0 to 999 9 EU 150 0 Channel See note 2 Conditions for use The control method must be set to 2 PID control Note 1 This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 78 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the 0 decimal point position setting will be treated as setting 1 E AT Calculated Gain Sets the gain used when calculating the PID constants in autotuning When emphasizing flexibility decrease set value When emphasizing stability increase the set value E AT Hysteresis The limit cycle operation during autotuning has a hysteresis when switching ON and OFF This parameter sets that hysteresis value E Limit Cycle MV Amplitude Sets the M
118. liable for all unpaid accounts Cancellation Etc Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation unless Buyer indemnifies Omron against all related costs or expenses Force Majeure Omron shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery resulting from causes beyond its control including earthquakes fires floods strikes or other labor disputes shortage of labor or materials accidents to machinery acts of sabotage riots delay in or lack of transportation or the requirements of any government authority Shipping Delivery Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Omron a Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Omron Omron will not drop ship except in break down situations b Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier shall constitute delivery to Buyer c All sales and shipments of Products shall be FOB shipping point unless oth erwise stated in writing by Omron at which point title and risk of loss shall pass from Omron to Buyer provided that Omron shall retain a security inter est in the Products until the full purchase price is paid d Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only and e Omron will package Products as it deems proper for protection against nor mal handling and extra charges apply to special conditions Claims Any claim by Buyer against Omron for shortage or damage to the Products occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented
119. of Alarm ON and OFF Delays PV for an Upper limit Alarm Alarm settings Alarm hysteresis ON delay set time IN Alarm will not turn ON 89 Setting Alarm Specifications Section 4 4 e The alarm will not turn ON if the time that the alarm is ON is equal to or less than the ON delay set time Likewise the alarm will not turn OFF if the time that the alarm is OFF is equal to or less than the OFF delay set time elf an alarm turns OFF and then back ON during the ON delay time the time will be remeasured from the last time the alarm turns ON Likewise if an alarm turns ON and then back OFF during the OFF delay time the time will be remeasured from the last time the alarm turns OFF 4 4 8 Alarm SP Selection During SP ramping this parameter specifies whether alarm operation is per formed on the ramping SP or the SP that will be reached after ramping Using the Ramping SP Using the SP Temperature Temperature f Alarm output ON aarm output ON Time Time Note The alarm type is set to 1 Upper and lower limit Variable type Parametername Setting range Default E3 A3 Alarm 1 to 3 SP Selection 0 Ramping SP Channel 1 SP Conditions for use The alarm type must be set to a deviation alarm the SP Ramp function must be enabled and ST must be disabled Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 4 4 9 Channel Alarm Status The alarm status can be monitored Variabl
120. operate properly Switching to manual mode while ST is operating will cause ST to stop When using ST do not use MV calculation on the G3ZA When autotuning or self tuning is executed with RT selected PID con stants are automatically set that make it hard for control performance to degenerate even when control object s characteristics change e Selecting the RT mode in the following cases will help to prevent hunting from occurring e When the set temperature is not fixed and is changed in a wide range e When there are large variations in ambient temperatures due to factors such as seasonal changes or differences between day and night tem peratures e When there are large variations in ambient wind conditions and air flow e When heater characteristics change depending on the temperature 81 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 e When an actuator with disproportional I O such as a phase control type power regulator is used e When a rapidly heating heater is used e When the control object or sensor has a long dead time e When hunting occurs in normal mode for any reason e Even when hunting occurs for PID constants when AT ST is exe cuted in normal mode it is less likely to occur when AT ST is exe cuted in RT mode Temperature l Temperature o Much hunting occurs Hunting is reduced Set value F Set value Time A F Time Start of control Start of control e When the temperature PV falls sho
121. range Fa pie Category Add Address TC4 ype ress TC2 Can be 01CC FOCC G3ZA1 CH5 Soft Decrease Time yp H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 pe ele changed during 01CD FOCD G3ZA1 CH6 Soft Decrease Time H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 S NUM operation V2 G3ZA1 CH1 MV at Communications ypg H 00000000 to H 0000038 0 0 to 100 0 Error G3ZA1 CH2 MV at Communications F F Error F F FOCF G8ZA1 CH8 Soft Decrease Time AA AR s NUM FODO GOZAt CH1 Control Switch MV Thresh NUM G3zA1 CH4 Control Switch MV Thresh H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 20 0 NUM GAZA CH5 Control Switch MV Thresh H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 20 0 NUM G3ZA1 CH6 Control Switch MV Thresh H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 20 0 NUM CAZA CH7 Control Switch MV Thresh 20 0 NUM FOD7 CAZA CH8 Control Switch MV Thresh 20 0 NUM Zo NUM V V H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 Zo NUM ODA G3ZA1 CH3 MV at Communications Error ODB G3ZA1 CH4 MV at Communications Error V 2 2 2 FODC G3ZA1 CH5 MV at Communications Error V2 2 2 2 2 H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 Yo NUM Zo NUM H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 7o NUM FODD G3ZA1 CH6 MV at Communications Error V FODE G3ZA1 CH7 MV at Communications Error V DF FODF G3ZA1 CH8 MV at
122. rate to 57 6 kbps 3 set the communications unit No between 1 and 8 and set the communications main setting acquisition number from 0 to 8 For infor mation on the communications main setting acquisition number refer to MV Output from the G3PW on page 114 Settings can be made for the G3PW using key operations For details refer to the G3PW Power Controller User s Manual Cat No Z280 Turn ON the power supply to the Basic Unit and execute a Register Unit Configuration Reset operation command No G3ZA Units are registered in the default Basic Unit settings Turn OFF the power supply to the Basic Unit and then turn ON the power supply in the following order G3PW Units and then the Basic Unit When the Basic Unit starts it will automatically scan for connected G3PW Units Check the Configuration Error A Status to confirm that no errors have oc curred then execute a Register Unit Configuration Register operation command Always execute this command If the configuration is not regis tered correctly and the proper configuration cannot be recognized unex pected outputs may occur from the G3PW Power Controllers for the outputs from the Basic Units When the EJ1 starts it scans the connected G3PW Power Controllers and automatically assigns names to them such as G3PW1 G3PW2 etc in order starting with the lowest communications unit number Example In this example the Communications Units for the G3PW have been set to unit n
123. selected an alarm will not be output until the process value increases above the alarm set value e until it leaves the alarm range and then falls back below the alarm value Alarm type Lower limit alarm with standby sequence Alarm vatia plo 7 La L pawn hysteresis A Standby sequence canceled with standby sequence es E_ _ gt Alarms PO iO o without standby sequence Alarms E Restarting the Standby Sequence e If an alarm is output the standby sequence is canceled but the standby sequence will start again after any of the following operations Restart conditions When control starts including power ON or when the alarm value upper lower limit alarm value or input shift value upper lower limit temperature input shift value is changed e When the set point is changed e When the bank is switched e When the alarm type is changed SP changed M Alarm value p lo gt _ __ after change Alarm hysteresis O Standby sequence canceled Standby sequence restarted 4 4 5 Alarm Latch The alarm latch can be used to keep an alarm ON once it goes ON The latch can be released to turn OFF the alarm by executing an operation command Latch Cancel or Software Reset Refer to 6 4 11 Operation Com mands for details on the operation commands Variable type Setting range Default E3 A3 Alarm 1 to 3 Latch Channel 0 Disable
124. settings Port B Communications Data Length 7 bit Port B Communications Parity Even bit Port B Communications Stop Bits 2 bit The PT communications settings are made on the PT System Screen e Move to the System Screen display the Communications Settings Screen and set the destination for the communica tions port to Temperature Controller e Set the baud rate the same as the EJ1 baud rate There is an HFU connected to Port B cannot be used for communi the EJ1 cations if an HFU is connected to the EJ1 Hint When Using HFUs Connect to port A on the Programmable Terminal The following restrictions apply e The HFU cannot be used at the same time as the CX Thermo Support Software e The baud rate is fixed at 38 4 kbps If an HFU is Not Required Disconnect the HFU and restart the EJ1 Note The baud rate and communications distance sometimes depend on the com munications partner 218 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors Section 8 4 Serial Connection of No Communications Between the EJ1 and the NS Series PT Using Serial NS series Connection Programmable Terminals Status Possiblecause Countermeasure The Smart Active Part SAP There is no power supply to Supply power from the EDU power does not communicate with the EJ1 supply terminal the EJ1 The SAP is not compatible Use a SAP for the EJ1 with the EJ1 Connection The SAP is not for serial con
125. start address number of elements exceeds FFFF the address returns to 0000 176 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 2 Write to Variable Area This service writes to a variable area E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC Variable Write start Bit No of elements Write data type address position for No of elements 0 1 0 2 O O Y i 2 2 2 4 2 4 No of elements x 8 or 4 E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response code 01 0 2 2 2 4 1 Variable Type and Write Start Address Refer to Parameter List on page 235 2 Bit Position The EJ1 does not support bit access Fixed to 00 3 No of Elements Write data length No of elements For double word 8 digit variable type 39 max 0027H For word 4 digit variable type 79 max 004FH Note The following values apply for the DA 9A variable types Write data length No of elements For double word 8 digit variable type 24 max 0018H For word 4 digit variable type 48 max 0030H 4 Response Codes Response code Errorname Case 1002 Command too short The command is not long enough 1101 Area type error The corresponding variable type does not exist 1003 Number of elements The number of data does not match the number of data mismatch elements 1100 Bit position is not 00 Write data is out of setting range 2201 Operation error 2201 The command cannot be executed during operation 300
126. started to the G3ZA first Different baud rates are set in Set SW2 on the G3ZA to 3 the G3ZA and EJ1 and reset the EJ1 The unit configuration was Send the Resister Unit Con registered when the G3ZA figuration Reset operation was not connected to the EJ1 command to the EJ1 Basic default condition Unit to which the G3ZA is con nected to clear the Unit con figuration The settings will be valid after the EJ1 is reset The same unit number is set Set the G3ZA unit numbers so for more than one G3ZA that the same number is not used more than once for the same EJ1 Basic Unit The registered G3ZA Unit Send the Resister Unit Con configuration is different from figuration Reset operation the connected G3ZA Unit con command to the EJ1 Basic figuration Unit to which the G3ZA is con nected to clear the Unit con figuration and then reset the EJ1 When the EJ1 starts again send the Register Unit Configuration Register opera tion command to register the connected G3ZA Units in the configuration Note Bit 12 of variable type C4 84 0013 in Device B Status can be used to see if the connected G3ZA Unit configura tion has been regis tered The cable connecting the Replace the Connecting G3ZA and EJ1 is broken Cable between the G3ZA and EJT If the EJ1 cannot communicate with a G3PW that is connected to it the same error will occur as if the EJ1 were connected to a G3ZA Confirm with the table above while re
127. unit configuration examples 27 unit number setting 171 193 USB Serial Conversion Cable 26 using tool ports 26 V V1 1 version 1 1 xxvi W wiring 19 Index auxiliary outputs 21 communications 22 control outputs 20 CT inputs 21 event inputs 22 inputs 20 power supply voltage 19 wiring precautions 18 write to variable area 177 279 Index 280 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No H142 E1 04 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code Date Revised content February 2006 Original production 02 February 2007 Revised for addition of version 1 1 EJ1 Temperature Controllers and version 2 G3ZA Power Controllers March 2007 Internal block diagram for TC4 corrected and parameter tables revised Modbus addresses added and mistakes corrected 02B March 2007 Corrections made including the following Page 118 Changed the data register value from D1000 to D1001 for the Setting Change Request Bits in Monitoring EJ1 Set Values Page 122 Added the baud rate for port C 03 July 2008 Revised for addition of version 1 2 functions Basic Units TC4 TC2 e Autotuning is provided for heating cooling control e Self tuning has been added e Output status can be displayed on the operatio
128. value by setting the Heater Burnout Detection parameter to 0 0 or 100 0 Use the 0 0 and 100 0 settings to check operation 4 This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped The hysteresis setting prevents chattering at the detection point e Turn the heater ON before the EJ1 or turn both ON simultaneously If the heater power is turned ON after turning ON the EJ1 the HB Alarm will be output e Control will be continued even when there is an HB Alarm e The rated current value may sometimes differ slightly from the actual cur rent flowing to the heater Check the current value in an actual operating state in the Heater Current Monitor Value 1 or 2 parameter e f there is little difference between the current in normal and abnormal states detection may become unstable To stabilize detection set a cur rent value difference of at least 1 0 A for heaters of less than 10 0 A and at least 2 5 A for heaters of 10 0 A or more If the heater current is too low loop the load line several times through a CT as shown in the diagram below Looping it through twice will double the detection current Load line Cr E Heater Burnout Latch and Latch Cancel The heater burnout alarm latch can be used to keep the HB Alarm ON once it goes ON The latch can be released by executing an operation command Reset Error or Software Reset cycling the power or setting the Heater Burnout Detection Value to 0 0 A Refer to 6 4 11 Oper
129. 0 Channel STOP 02 Channel 3 33 01 Channel 2 All Alarm Latch Cancel 03 Channel 4 FF All channels Save RAM Data See note 1 Always FF Set E See 38 Always 00 note 2 5 EE RAM D ae 2 See note ee Always FF sae Unit Configuration 00 Reset 01 Register Set values that can be changed during operation are saved to EEPROM e Descriptions of and Precautions for Operation Commands Refer to Description of Operation Commands and Precautions on page 187 2 Performing set value initialization will initialize the port B communications protocol to 0 CompoWay F If you do not want to change the protocol turn ON No 3 of SW2 The protocol will be set to Modbus regardless of the port B communications protocol setting 3 All set values are saved in non volatile memory EEPROM 201 Detailed Description of Services 3 Response Codes Section 7 5 The following response codes are for operation commands For the re sponse codes for writing to the variable area refer to the response codes under 7 5 2 Multiple Write to Variable Area Function Error Cause code code H 86 H 01 Function code error A function code that is not supported was specified H 03 Variable data error i H 04 Operation error tuning mode e The command is too long e The command is not long enough e The command code does not match the related information in the write data e The command cannot be executed because the m
130. 0143H The test data must be within the following ranges depending on the com munications data length Communications data length Test data 8 bits ASCII H 20 to H 7E and H A1 to H FE 7 bits ASCII H 20 to H 7E 2 Response Codes Response code Error name Cause 1001 Command too long The command is too long 0000 Normal completion Processing was completed normally 185 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 11 Operation Commands The following parameter settings are made using operation commands e Write Mode e Software Reset e Run e Stop e Manual e Automatic e AT Execute e AT Cancel e Bank 0 Change to LSP Change e RSP Change e Reset Error Bank 3 Change e Alarm 1 to Alarm 3 Latch Cancel e All Alarm Latch Cancel e Save RAM Data e Parameter Initialization e Save RAM Data 2 e Register Unit Configuration E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC Command Related code information 310 015 2 2 2 2 E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response code 3101 101 5 2 2 4 1 Command Code by Unit and Related Information TC related information HFU related information 01 RAM Run 00 to 03 Channel Stop oB FF All channels Auto SC dO 40 AT Execute Alarm 3 Latch Cancel 340 All Alarm Latch Cancel 35 Save RAM Data See note 1 3 3 Parameter Initialization 38 Save RAM Data 2 See note 2 Register Unit Configuration 00 Reset 01 Register 34 35 7 8 9 3B 186
131. 02 EM1 2 H 00000003 EM2 3 H 00000004 EM3 4 H 00000005 EM4 5 H 00000006 EM5 6 H 00000007 EM6 7 H 00000008 EM7 8 H 00000009 EM8 9 H 0000000A EM9 10 H 0000000B EMA 11 H 0000000C EMB 12 H 0000000D EMC 13 MC protocol format 5 H 00000000 Data register D 0 H 00000001 Link register Ry Sy H 00000002 File register R 0033 A233 Programless Communications Upload Start H 00000000 to H COFRE gt to 32767 tat Address 0034 A234 Programless Communications Download Start H 00000000 to H 00007FFF 0 to 32767 ail Address 0035 A235 Programless Communications Receive Wait H 0000000A to H 00002710 10 to 10000 2000 ms Common Time See note 1 0036 A236 Programless Communications Node Address H 00000000 to H 00000063 0 to 99 Common See note 1 0037 A237 Programless Communications Maxi v1 1 H 00000000 to H 0000003F 0 to 63 Common mum Communications Unit Number i 0038 A238 Selection of Programless Communi H 00000000 Continue 0 1 cations Operation during Error 21 H 00000001 Stop 1 252 Parameter List Appendix Vari CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range able Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 Enabled 0040 A240 Output ON Scheduling Method H 00000000 No control 0 Common after H 00000001 1 2 1 resetting fH 00000002 1 4 2 Y TT e Not used 0042 A242 Delay Between Output Ch
132. 04 04 2244468 a ida ie 41 3 4 Controlling G3ZA Controllers Connected to Output Devices o ooooooooo 45 SECTION 4 Basic Units TC4 and TC2 Functions 49 Ast Setting Input Speciitcauons ripeado es hee A es 51 ASD Set ns Output Specifications sucia daa hee ie ond tachi ms vee EO we me eke es 57 4 3 Setting Control Specifications n snena ansas 64 4 4 Seting Alarm Specifications ri is ERA ES e a LS 86 Aes Detecting Curent ENOS eree arena See A Ss 91 4 6 Using the Loop Break Alarm LBA 0 0 eee eee eens 102 def Other Functions C4vand 1 C2 vss gow a a A Gow Rs Bee Sa Re ia 104 SECTION 5 Advanced Unit HFU Functions 117 del Prosr ml ss Communications chav ca eee teeta se ee eee 118 5 2 Connecting More Than One HEU 2 25 2 gusts a6 sii dbase ties Ade eee 157 3 Oter HF Functions 4 ocu ctaded sadsese ced eho hs cagdaeatleeagt dea dara 166 SECTION 6 CompoWay F Communications oooooooooooo 169 Gol Communications SCtUnOS uc caian iaa Card a dee BLS Cade ace do oats 170 6 2 Trame Conicuraion cup tesisidce hae he ate eaters eee neous hears izo 172 6 3 PINS sunt Text cuct eters raters ears A serie A a le ds 174 6 4 Detailed Description Of Services joc bak sad Sestak beets aide ge ate ae hbo ee degre dee 176 Xx TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 7 Modbus Communications ooooooooooooooooo 191 Tel Communications Senos n
133. 06 207 209 209 214 223 224 226 22a 205 Things to Check First Section 8 1 8 1 Things to Check First Check the indicators Check the switches and wiring Determine the error from the status Determine the error from the current situation 206 If an error occurs check the following items and take corrective measures if required Check the EJ1 operating status by looking at the indicators If the ERR indicator is lit cycle the EJ1 power supply If the ERR indicator does not light when power comes back ON check for noise as the cause of the error and take countermeasures With a version TC4 TC2 when No 6 of SW2 is turned ON the op eration indicator will display the output status Always turn OFF No 6 of SW2 for confirmation Check the switch settings and wiring e Power Supply e Is the power turned ON e Is the power supply voltage within the allowable range e Switches e Are the switch settings correct for the system being used e Wiring e Is the terminal block correctly wired e Is the polarity correct e Are any wires disconnected e Are any wires or cables broken or touching e Communications Conditions e Do the communications conditions match those of the host system If none of these check items needs correction or the error is not cleared even after performing the above checks use the communications function to inves tigate in more detail Check the EJ1 status Find the c
134. 1 Variable type E1 Address 0101 0000 0 5 s CH2 Control Period 2 Variable type E1 Address 0201 0000 0 5 s CH3 Control Period 3 Variable type E1 Address 0301 0000 0 5 s CH4 Control Period 4 Variable type E1 Address 0401 0000 0 5 s Note 3 2 4 Adjustment 40 e Connect the PT to port B e Set the write mode to backup mode e Set the PT s communications parameters the same as the port B commu nications parameters Execute autotuning AT to make the PID adjustments If self tuning ST is activated the PID will be automatically calculated when using standard control Refer to 4 3 8 Tuning for details Control Linked to a Host Device Section 3 3 3 3 Control Linked to a Host Device 3 3 1 Application In this example configuration a CJ1 series PLC controls a reflow oven and an EJ1 performs temperature control on 6 zones and 12 control loops in the oven NS8 Programmable Terminal 3G3RV Inverter CJ1W CIF11 RS 422A Converter E y
135. 1 2 2 1 4 invalid for TC2 Delay between Outputs O to 1000 ms Common See note 2 Conditions for use Control output must be assigned and set to standard control 2 PID control A Controller with pulse outputs must be used Note 1 When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes effec tive the next time a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power is turned ON 2 Set the Delay between Outputs parameter to an even number If an odd number is set the next smaller even number will be used N Caution e Set the Output Mode Selection parameters to Standard Control for all of the Unit s channels The Output ON Scheduling function will be disabled if the parameter is not set to Standard Control 59 Setting Output Specifications Section 4 2 Even if the Output ON Scheduling Method is set the outputs may be ON at the same time due to the delay in the output device s operation In this case you can prevent the outputs from being ON simultaneously by setting a delay with the Delay between Outputs parameter Refer to the following set ting examples for details on using the delay When using both this function and autotuning always set this function before performing autotuning If this function is set after autotuning control performance may deteriorate When using this function set the following parameters to their default set tings Output Scaling Upper Limit 1 to 4 Output Scaling L
136. 1000 reser op CH1 0104 02E4 Input Shift 2 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 199 9 to 999 9 See note 2 0 0 EU ch je j 0105 02E5 MV at PV Error CH1 Standard Control H FFFFFFCE to H 0000041A 5 0 to 105 0 ch Heating and Cooling Control H FFFFFBE6 to H 0000041A 105 0 to 105 0 0106 02E6 MV at Stop CH1 Standard Control H FFFFFFCE to H 0000041A 5 0 to 105 0 Heating and Cooling Control H FFFFFBE6 to H 0000041A 105 0 to 105 0 Not used 0109 02E9 MV Upper Limit CH1 Standard Control H FFFFFFCE to H 0000041A 5 0 to 105 0 Heating and Cooling Control H 00000000 to H 0000041A 0 0 to 105 0 010A 02EA MV Lower Limit CH1 Standard Control H FFFFFFCE to H 0000041A 5 0 to 105 0 Heating and Cooling Control H FFFFFBE6 to H 00000000 105 0 to 0 0 010B 02EB Hysteresis Heating CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 9 See note 2 11 0 EU ch Je j 010C 02EC Hysteresis Cooling CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 9 See note 2 10 EU ch Je j 010D 02ED Alpha CH1 H 00000000 to H 00000064 0 00 to 1 00 0 65 hn je j 010E 02EE Manual MV CH1 Standard Control H FFFFFFCE to H 0000041A 5 0 to 105 0 ch Heating and Cooling Control H FFFFFBE6 to H 0000041A 105 0 to 105 0 OTOF 02EF SP Uppor Limt CH1 H FFFFF88t 1o H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 Sea nate 1 0009 EU on e 0110 aro SP Lowertimi CHi H FFFFF83i to H 0000270F 1999 to
137. 2 186 188 201 Remote SP Enable 74 Remote SP Monitor 74 Reset Error 186 188 RSP Change 186 188 Run 150 186 RUN STOP 187 Save RAM Data 150 186 188 Save RAM Data 2 186 188 Scaling Lower Limit 53 Scaling Upper Limit 53 Set Point 71 Software Reset 150 186 187 SP Lower Limit 71 SP Ramp Fall Value 73 SP Ramp Rise Value 73 SP Ramp Time Unit 73 SP Upper Limit 71 ST 80 ST Stable Range 80 Stop 150 186 Temperature unit 52 Temporary AT Execution Judgment Deviation 78 Unit number 171 192 Write Mode 186 187 Write mode 150 parameters that can be allocated for programless communi cations 269 PID constants 66 PID settings 66 platinum resistance thermometer 51 PLC settings 137 programless communications 118 programless communications errors 156 programless communications protocol 134 programless communications upload download data area 134 programless communications upload download start ad dress 135 programless download settings 132 programless upload settings 132 PV process value xix Q Q compatible Serial Communications Unit 119 QnA compatible Serial Communications Unit 119 R ratings 230 read from variable area 176 reducing communications time 149 remote SP 73 75 removing terminal blocks 15 Request Bit 139 Operation Command Request Bits 139 Read Request Bits 139 Setting Change Request Bits 139 response codes 188 re
138. 3 34 Max communication unit number 32 33 E Startup When the power is turned ON communications will be started in order of the communications unit numbers E Power Interruptions If power is interrupted to one HFU communications will still continue for the other HFUs 5 2 2 MELSEC Q QnA QnAS series PLCs Up to eight Advanced Units HFU can be connected to one communications port on a Serial Communications Unit Use the following models when con necting more than one HFU Serial Communications Units Channel 2 of QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R4 Channel 2 of A1SJ71QC24N Channel 2 of AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24N R4 EJ1N HFU EJ1N HFUA NFL2 EJ1N HFUB NFL2 1 2 3 1 Connect the EJ1 and PLC 160 Connecting More Than One HFU Section 5 2 Always set the communications unit numbers of the HFU in order from O through 7 or 32 to 39 if using a version Unit and set the communi cations unit numbers of the Basic Units connected to each HFU to a differ ent communications unit number than the HFU This restriction does not apply when the communications unit number for the HFU is set to a num ber from No 32 to 39 NEW m Example The communications unit number of the Basic Unit is set to a number from O to 31 excluding 1 Set the communications unit number of another HFU to 0 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 1 e any number other than 1 One HFU can control up to 32 Basic Units When connecting 16 or more Basic Units use distributed placem
139. 3 Read only error An attempt was made to write to a read only vari able 7013 Operation error 7013 The command cannot be executed because the operation command cannot be received 7014 Operation error 7014 The command cannot be executed during backup 7015 Operation error 7015 The command cannot be executed during reset including startup 7041 Operation error 7041 The command cannot be executed in manual opera tion mode 7042 7042 Operation error 7042 The command cannot be executed in tuning mode 0000 Normal completion Processing was completed normally 7011 Operation error 7011 The command cannot be executed due to a device error 177 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 3 Composite Read from Variable Area This service reads in order the contents of specified addresses in a variable area E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC Variable Read address Bit Variable ona address postion type position type positio 0 1 0 4 0 10 Pt cos 0 2 2 2 4 2 4 gt E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response Variable Read data A code type 2 No of elements x 8 or 4 o Variable Read data type 2 No of elements x 8 or 4 The read data is read together with the variable type in the order specified in the command 1 Variable Type and Read Address Refer to Parameter List on page 235 Composite reads cannot be performed for the DA 9A variable types 2 Bit Position
140. 3ZA1 CT4 Heater OFF Current Moni H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to 165 pe NUM e 11 tor 0180 F080 G3ZA1 Send Standby Time See note 1 H 00000000 to H 00000063 0 to 99 NUM 0181 F081 G3ZA1 Communications Timeout Time H 00000000 to H 0000003C 0 to 60 min NUM See note 1 Function stops when set to 0 0182 F082 G3ZA1 Setting Operation for Errors H 00000000 Continue with error clear 0 NUM H 00000001 Continue without error clear 1 H 00000002 Stop 2 0183 F083 G3ZA1 Offset Value H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 20 0 A NUM e j 0184 F084 G3ZA1 Hysteresis H 00000001 to H 0000000A 1 to 10 NUM e 0185 F085 G3ZA1 SSR Drive Selection H 00000000 Zero cross SSR for single phase NUM heater optimum cycle control 0 H 00000001 Non zero cross SSR for single phase heater soft start optimum cycle control 1 H 00000002 Zero cross SSR for three phase heater three phase optimum cycle control 2 0186 FO86 G3ZA1 Current Monitor Display Selec H 00000000 0 to 50 A 0 NUM tion H 00000001 0 to 150 A 1 H 00000002 0 to 100 2 0187 F087 G3ZA1 Communications Hysteresis ma 00000000 to H 0000012C 0 0 to 30 0 AA NUM eJ 0188 F088 G3ZA1 Communications Timeout Time EA H 00000000 Disabled NUM 2 See note 1 H 00000001 to H 00000E10 1 to 3600 0189 F089 G3ZA1 CT1 Assignment See note 1 H 00000000 Disabled 0 PAS NUM a all H 00000001 ch1 1 018A G3ZA1 C
141. 422 Bus Input 3 Assignment 254 Parameter List Appendix Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range type Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 F2 B2 Enabled Not used O H 00000080 Channel 4 The same as channel 1 128 after resetting 0031 A431 Bus Output 2 Assignment The rest are the same as Bus Output 1 Assignment feo SY HFU 0 0032 A432 Bus Output 3 Assignment TC 6 HFU 0 0030 A430 Bus Output 1 Assignment H 00000000 Disabled 0 Common H 00000001 Temperature Controller error 1 H 00000002 All channels All alarm OR 2 H 00000003 All channels All alarm AND 8 H 00000004 All channels Alarm 1 OR 4 H 00000005 All channels Alarm 2 OR 5 H 00000006 All channels Alarm 3 OR 6 H 00000007 All channels Alarm 1 AND 7 H 00000008 All channels Alarm 2 AND 8 H 00000009 All channels Alarm 3 AND 9 H 00000004 All channels Input error OR 10 H 0000000B All channels RSP Input error OR 11 H 0000000D All channels HB Heater Burnout alarm OR 13 H 0000000 All channels HS Heater Short alarm OR 14 14 H 0000000F All channels OC Heater Overcurrent alarm OR 15 H 00000010 Event input 1 16 H 00000011 Event input 2 17 H 00000012 Event input 3 18 H 00000013 Event input 4 19 H 00000014 Bus input 1 20 H 00000015 Bus input 2 21 H 00000016 Bus input 3 22 Not used
142. 485 5 1 2 Checking Operation Checking Operation with SYSMAC CS CJ Series PLCs 1 2 3 This section describes how to check operation for the configuration shown below EJ1 SYSMAC CS CJ Series HFU a iol x 1 Connect the EJ1 and PLC Connect the EJ1N HFU and Serial Communications Unit as shown in the following diagram 119 Programless Communications Section 5 1 e RS 232C SYSMAC CJ CS Series EJ1N HFULJ NFLK RS 232C Turn ON pin 8 of SW2 to set RS 232C e RS 485 SYSMAC CJ CS Series EJ1N HFULJ NFLK RS 485 OIOLA OAOA ORO e Attach terminating resistance 110 to 125 Q to pins 6 and 7 on the EDU port B if there are problems with communications noise resistance Note Refer to Related Manuals on page xiv for the operating methods for SYSMAC CS CJ series CPU Units and Serial Communications Boards Units 120 Programless Communications Section 5 1 2 Make the PLC settings Use the CX Programmer to make the communications port settings for the Serial Communications Unit The settings can be easily made using lO Ta ble and Unit Setup Be sure to transfer the settings to the PLC DM Area Set Boa
143. 6 can be turned ON or OFF while the power is ON Not used OFF e EJ1 1 HFULI NFLK OFF RS 485 is selected ON RS 232C is selected e EJ1LJ HFULI NFL2 Not used OFF I O Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 1 2 1O Configuration and Main Functions 1 2 1 1 0 Configuration TC4 Four channel Basic om Control ne G3ZA communications Port A communications Internal bus 1 Port B communications Internal bus 2 Internal bus 3 e Internal device I O are connected via a connector to the adjacent Unit Inside the device TC2 Two channel Basic Unit Main input 1 Control Control output 1 Main input 2 FRENON Control output 2 z Control output 3 Event input 1 Control output 4 Event input 2 CT input 1 G3ZA communications CT input 2 Port A communications Internal bus 1 Port B communications Internal bus 2 Internal bus 3 Inside the device e Internal device I O are connected via a connector to the adjacent Unit HFU Advanced Unit Auxiliary output 1 Auxiliary output 2 Auxiliary output 3 Event input 1 Event input 2 Event input 3 Event input 4 Auxiliary output 4 Port C communications Internal bus 1 Port A communications Internal bus 2 Communications Internal bus 3 between Units Inside the device Control section e Internal device I O are connected via a connector to the adjacent Unit e Communications between devices are connected to TC4 or TC2 h
144. 7 1 1 Communications Specifications 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee 192 7 1 2 Unit Number Setting 2 0 0 0 0 eee 193 7 1 3 Other Communications Settings 0 0 0 0 ccc eee ees 193 7 1 4 Send Data Wait Time 0 0 0 cee 193 Tae PA MMCS A ee a oe ee he BA eo be ber eae pa E 194 7 2 1 Command Frames 0 022206 63400560 0o0e4s seers secnieees 194 72 2 Response Frames gh cnet teeta ecos pao a 195 7 3 Function Codes 6 024 604 cirios ee da a 196 TA Nanable ICIS erary erorar ads ed oo Soha ea ads 197 7 4 1 Ann 197 7 4 2 Number of Elements 0 0 0 cece eens 197 7 4 3 Communications Data 0 0 0 ene 197 7 5 Detailed Description of Services 1 0 0 0 0c ccc eee eens 198 7 5 1 Multiple Read from Variable rea oooooooooooooo 198 7 5 2 Multiple Write to Variable Area 0 00 eee 199 7 5 3 Single Write to Variable Area 1 0 0 0 0 eee 200 Jose Behoback Test ies nds agen aaa ee e a 203 191 Communications Settings Section 7 1 7 1 Communications Settings Communications are programmed on the host computer Descriptions of com munications in this manual are therefore written from the viewpoint of the host computer For example references to reading and writing mean reading data from the EJ1 to the host computer and writing data from the host computer to the EJ1 The EJ1 uses different communications specifications from existing products to improve communications operability
145. 8 H 0000003A ch1 Transfer Output Heating 58 TC2 H 0000003B ch1 Transfer Output Cooling 59 H 00000040 Channel 2 The same as channel 1 64 H 00000060 Channel 3 The same as channel 1 96 TC4 H 00000080 Channel 4 The same as channel 1 128 S 0101 0341 Control Period 1 H 00000000 to H 00000063 0 to 99 2 0 5 s period when set to 0 0102 0342 Linear Output 1 Type H 00000000 4 to 20mA 0 H 00000001 O to 20mA 1 0103 0343 Output Scaling Upper Limit 1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 100 0104 0344 Output Scaling Lower Limit 1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 Decimal Point C1 H 00000000 No decimal point 0 1 0105 0345 H 00000001 H 00000002 2 H 00000003 3 0106 0346 Minimum output ON OFF H 00000000 to H 000001F4 0 0 to 50 0 1 0 width 1 N Not used 0200 0540 Control Output 2 Assignment The rest are the same as from Control Output 1 TC4 79 Assignment to Decimal Point C1 TC2 79 0300 0740 Control Output 3 Assignment TC4 111 TC2 32 ES A 0400 0940 Control Output 4 Assignment TC4 143 TC2 64 E E E Note Parameters with the following mark are supported only by version 1 1 Temperature Controllers Refer to Functional Upgrades on page xxvi for details on upgraded functionality 24 Parameter List Appendix Variable CompoWay F Parameter name Setting monitor ra
146. 99 See note 1 EU s or BANK Function stops when set to 0 EU min 0105 0285 Bank 2 SP Ramp Fall Value CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 to 9999 See note 1 EU s or BANK Function stops when set to 0 EU min Not used 0107 0287 Bank 2 Manual Reset Value CH1 H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 BANK 0108 0288 Bank 2 Cooling Coefficient CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 01 to 99 99 11 00 BANK O 0109 0289 Bank 2 Dead Band CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 199 9 to 999 9 See note NN BANK P 2 Not used 010D 028 Bank2 Alarm Value 1 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 10 0099 See note 1 0 EU Bankje 010E 028E Bank Alarm Upper Limit Value 1 CH H FFFFFB81 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU Bank o oroF ozeF Bank 2 Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 CHT H FFFFF8S1 to H 0000270F 1998 to 9999 See note 1 o EU Bank e omo 0280 Bank2 Aarm Value 2 CH1 H FFFFF8S1 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 o EU ean e 0111 0291 Bank 2 Alarm Upper Limit Value 2 CHT W FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 8999 See note o EU ean e 0112 0282 Bank 2 Alarm Lower Limit Value 2 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F C1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 Eu Bank je orta 0203 Bank2 Alarm vaue3 CH1 H FFFFFAS1 to H 0000270F 199910 9999 See note o eu Bank fe H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK H FFFFF831 t
147. 99 to 9999 See note 2 EU eh je J 0006 Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 2 EU ch j 0007 Alarm Value 2 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 2 EU hh je J 0008 Alarm Upper Limit Value 2 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 2 EU ch 0009 Alarm Lower Limit Value 2 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 2 EU hh Not used 0103 SetPoint CH2 The rest are the same as channel 1 DEA 0203 Set Point CH3 SEEN 0303 Set Point CH4 ae re ee 8000 00G0 Present Bank Set Point CHT H FEFFFS31 to HT 0000270 1999 to 9999 See note 2 o EU BANK o J 8001 ooc1 Present Bank Set Point CH2 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 199910 9999 See note 2 0 EU BANK e 8002 00C2 Present Bank Set Point CH3 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 Seenote2 0 EU BANK e 8003 00C3 Present Bank Set Point CH4 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 2 0 EU BANK e Note 1 The values in the current bank will be used for all set values 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range type Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 Ca ea Monitor 0000 0000 Devesa Sans feee Saue Lero
148. A Operation YYYY E YY YY 3 The EJ1 repeatedly reads the set values Status I e Stop Operation Operation is stopped after a series of operations has been completed 1 The Setting Change Request Bits are cleared by the PLC PLC Upload Area Download Area OE EPOnES Read Request Bits 0000 0000 AAA ae Operation Command n42 Operation Command Response Bits Request Bits I I I Communications a Operation Status Command Code Monitor value YYYY 2 The EJ1 clears the Setting Change Response Bits Note 1 Always set the Setting Change Request Bits last If the Setting Change Request Bits are set before the set value is changed an unexpected value will be written 2 All programless download parameters will be updated when the Setting Change Request Bits are set If set values are not the same in EJ1 and PLC memory e g when the power is turned ON or the bank is changed always change the values in PLC memo ry first and then set the Setting Change Request Bits 145 Programless Communications Section 5 1 E Set Values e If the set value contains a decimal point omit the decimal point and set the value Example 100 0 1000 or O3E8H set value e When changing set values always set a new value within the setting range The set value will not be changed if a value outside the range is set Operation Commands When the EJ1 confirms that the Operation Command Request Bi
149. A 485 RS 422A 485 See note 4 See note 4 Use only products manufactured on or after December 20 1999 For details refer to the CS CJ Series Serial Communications Boards Units Operation Manual Cat No W336 2 Programless communications may stop if a momentary power interrup tion occurs at the CPU Unit when programless communications are being used for a communications port on the CPU Unit If they do stop either cycle the EJ1 power supply or execute a software reset 3 Use an RS 422A 485 port for 1 N connections 4 An Option Board sold separately is required Programless Communications Section 5 1 MELSEC Q QnA QnAS Series Note MELSEC An AnS Series Note MELSEC FX3UC Series Channel 1 Channel 2 Q compatible Serial QJ71C24N RS 232C RS 422 485 Communications Unit QJ71C24 QJ71C24N R2 RS 232C RS 232C QJ71C24 R2 Qni compatible Sera QnAS compatibl Serial Communica A45J710C24N R2 RS 232C RS 232C tions Unit Direct connections to the EJ1 are possible only with RS 232C or RS 422 Model Communications por An compatible Com AJ71UC24 RS 232C or RS 422 485 puter Link Unit AnS compatible Com A1SJ71UC24 R2 RS 232C puter Link Units A1SJ71UC24 R4 RS 422 485 A1SJ71UC24 PRF RS 232C Use an AnA or AnU CPU Module Name Model Communications port Communication Spe FX3U 232ADP RS 232C cial Adapter FX3U 485ADP RS 485 Function Expansion FX3U 232 BD RS 232C Board FX3U 485 BD RS
150. A B C D_E F OFF OFF 00 o1 02 03 04 05 06 oz 08 o9 10 11 12 13 14 15_ LON ON 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 Names of Parts Setting Switch 2 SW2 Settings EJ1 TC Basic Units Note Note EJ1_ HFU Advanced Unit Section 1 1 Set to ON when using the Modbus communications protocol for port B OFF The setting for port B communications protocol is used ON Modbus is used 4to5 Set the baud rate of port B 4 OFF 5 OFF Use the baud rate parameter setting for port B default 9 6 kbps 4 ON 5 OFF 19 2 kbps 4 ON 5 ON 115 2 kbps Set to ON to display the output status on the operation indicators OFF The operation status is displayed PWR RUN ERR and ALM ON The output status is displayed outputs 1 2 3 and 4 Note Normally keep this pin set to OFF so that the operation status can be checked ON G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller in operation ON when using a G3PW Power Controller Use when an HFU is used and Units are distributed See note To use an HFU with distributed positioning turn ON pin number 8 on SW2 on the TC Unit connected at the left end of the Block Refer to SECTION 2 Preparations for information on wiring HFU TC4 2 Turn ON pin 8 on SW2 Turn ON pin 8 on SW2 Make sure power to the Unit is turned OFF before changing the setting of any pin other than pin number 6 Pin number
151. AT to make the PID adjustments If self tuning ST is activated the PID will be automatically calculated when using standard control Refer to 4 3 8 Tuning When the CX Thermo Support Software is being used both EJ1 control and autotuning can be started stopped using operation commands The CX Thermo Support Software starts in Basic Mode by default If you want to set parameters that are not displayed in Basic Mode select View View Mode and switch to Advanced Mode to enable the advanced settings In addition the View Mode can be set to level group display or functional group display When functional group display is selected items are grouped by function rather than displayed separately as they are in the level group dis play mode 37 Multi channel Control Section 3 2 3 2 Multi channel Control 3 2 1 38 Application In this example configuration an EJ1 controls a 4 zone heater plate NS5 Programmable Terminal os CJ1W CIF11 RS 422A Converter RS 485 Wafer Sen al Sensor Heater plate BELEE Oo i Ph Sensor inputs Channels 1 to 4 U Ez TC4 EDU EJ1 Solid State Relays for single phase heaters e A single Temperature Controller can handle the 4 zone control if a 4 channel Basic Unit EJ1LJ TC4 is used Up to 16 Basic Units can be con nected to one EJ1C EDU End Unit to expand to a maximum of 64 chan nels Also the Temperature Controller s s
152. Applicable Applicable ew Applicable Apoteabie o EM Applicable Applicable 0 EMS Applicable Aplicable ii JEmA applicable 12 EMB applicable EMC applicable ee e MELSEC PLCs ae O default Data registers D Link registers W Note Not by the FX3UC File registers R Note anna registers R for the FX3UC Note 1 Make the programless upload settings in the Programless Communica tions Upload Data Area and the programless download settings in the Programless Download Data Area 2 Reset the EJ1 to enable settings E Programless Communications Upload Download Start Address Variable Type F0 BO Used to set the start address in the memory area set as the Programless Communications Upload Download Data Area for the parameters set as the Programless Upload Download Settings e The parameters will occupy the amount of PLC memory set in the Pro gramless Upload Download Settings from the address set as the Pro gramless Communications Upload Download Start Address e Refer to the following table and set a start address within the accessible range programiess PLCarea Seming Dean Communications range Programless Programless Protocol Communications Communications Upload Start Download Start Address Address NT Link 1 N DM 0000 to 32767 500 w 1 000 for version MC protocol Data registers 0000 to 12287 ee version format 5 Link registers 0000 to 1FFF ME
153. Assignment The rest are the same as Event Input 1 Assignment Not used 0010 A410 Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment H 00000000 Disabled 0 20 Common H 00000001 Temperature Controller error 1 Not used H 00000010 Event input 1 16 H 00000011 Event input 2 17 H 00000012 Event input 3 18 H 00000013 Event input 4 19 H 00000014 Bus input 1 20 H 00000015 Bus input 2 21 H 00000016 Bus input 3 22 0011 A411 Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment The rest are the same as Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment fate 0012 A412 Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment 22 fo 0013 A413 Auxiliary Output 4 Assignment 0 Not used 0020 A420 Bus Input 1 Assignment H 00000000 Disabled 0 Common H 00000001 All channels Bank bitO 1 H 00000002 All channels Bank bit1 2 H 00000003 All channels Stop 0 Run 1 H 00000004 All channels Run 0 Stop 1 H 00000005 All channels Auto 0 Manual H 00000006 All channels SP mode Local 1 6 H 00000020 CH1 Bank bitO 32 H 00000021 CH1 Bank bit1 33 H 00000022 CH1 Stop 0 Run 1 34 H 00000023 CH1 Run 0 Stop 1 35 H 00000024 CH1 Auto 0 Manual 1 36 H 00000025 CH1 SP mode Local 0 Remote 1 37 H 00000040 Channel 2 The same as channel 1 64 H 00000060 Channel 3 The same as channel 1 96 TC4 H 00000080 Channel 4 The same as channel 1 128 0021 A421 Bus Input 2 Assignment The rest are the same as Bus Input 1 Assignment 0022 A
154. B4 SUB2 SUBS and SUB4 can be set in the same way Settable parameters Disabled Temperature Controller Error Event inputs 1 to 4 Bus inputs 1 to 3 Temperature The Temperature Controller Error output will turn ON when any Controller Error bit between bit 0 and bit 13 is ON in the Device A Status It can be used to output EJ1 error status Refer to Status Lists on page 256 for details on Device A Status Event inputs 1 to 4 Output the ON OFF status of event inputs 1 to 4 Bus inputs 1 to3 Output the ON OFF status of bus inputs 1 to 3 Variable type Setting range Default F2 B2 Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Common 0 to 22 Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment Common 0 to 22 Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment Common 0 to 22 Auxiliary Output 4 Assignment Common 0 to 22 DN Conditions for use No special conditions Note 1 This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes effec tive the next time a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power is turned ON 2 Refer to Parameter List on page 235 for details on parameter settings 5 3 2 HFU Internal Buses The EJ1 has three internal device buses I O allocations can be made for these buses which enables simple sequencing to be incorporated by allocat ing output signals to buses bus output assignments and determining opera tions based on bus status bus input assi
155. C Name of servise Processing YO4 MO2 HFU 01 01 Read from variable Reads a set value Supported Supported area 01 02 Write to variable Writes a set value Supported Supported area 01 04 Composite read Reads more than one non con Supported Supported from variable area secutive set value 01 13 Composite write to Writes more than one non con Supported Supported variable area secutive set value 01 10 Composite registra Reads in order the contents of Supported Supported tion read addresses specified for compos ite read registration of set val ues 01 11 Composite read reg Specifies the addresses to be m istration read for a composite read of set values 01 12 Composite read reg Reads the contents of the regis i gt istration confirma tration for composite read of set tion values 05 03 Controller attribute Reads the model and communi Supported Supported read cations buffer size oo Controller status Reads the operating status Supported Supported read 01 Echobacktest test Performs an echoback test an echoback test Performs an echoback test Supported Supported or Eohopacktest com Executes RUN STOP AT exe Supported Supported mands cute AT cancel and other opera tions Note G3ZA set values can be read from the Basic Unit connected to the G3ZA The Basic Unit has variables for use with the G3ZA The G3ZA set values can be read and written by reading and writing these variables
156. Check the following items if the operation is incorrect e Are the wiring and settings correct e Was the power cycled once the EJ1 and PLC settings were completed The EJ1 settings are enabled only after the EJ1 is reset Checking Operation This section describes how to check operation for the configuration shown with the MELSEC Q below QnA QnAS Series EJ MELSEC Q QnA QnAS series PLC HFU TC EDU E D h tl e ch1 e Z5 B Pe del ae Be 92 Sae 33 dejad RS 232C 422 Unit Unit No 0 No 1 1 2 3 1 Connect the EJ1 and PLC Connect the EJ1N HFU and Serial Communications Unit as shown in the following diagram 123 Programless Communications Section 5 1 e RS 232C MELSEC Q QnA QnAS series PLC EJ1N HFULI NFLK RS 232C Bu Signa FR O 8 N e J I o D ep 0 832838818 1 CD NO a 09 Y dl S O CO N als Note QnA pin numbers are given in parentheses Turn ON pin 8 of SW2 to set RS 232C e RS 422 MELSEC Q QnA QnAS series PLC EJ1N HFULJ NFL2 RS 422 Shiels o amp NX 7 a A2 SDB AS 63 R aps Ho Se AS RDB L 69 as SDA y AD e Attach terminating resistance 110 to 125 Q to pins 6 and 7 on the EDU port B if there are problems with communications noise resistance e
157. Clamp Terminals Screw Terminals 1 1 2 Names of Parts on Front Panel Port A connector Operation Indicators Operation Indicators EDU TC2 or HFU TC4 Names of Parts Section 1 1 1 1 3 Meanings of Indicators Operation Indicators TC4 and TC2 Name Color Meaning When SW2 No 6is OFF Meaning When SW2 No 6 is ON MIE ERR S MER Red Flashes or lights when an error occurs Litwhen output Sis ON ALMA NEIL Red Lights when an alarm is activated Lt when output 4isON HFU Wane coor Ming PUN lewen SS ERR Red Flashes or lights when an error occurs SS ALM Red Lights when an alarm is activated Note Some time is required for the indicators to light after the power is turned ON 1 1 4 Using Setting Switches e Check that the EJ1 is turned OFF before operating the switches The set tings are enabled when the power is turned ON e Set the switches with a small flat blade screwdriver Do not set the switches midway between settings Setting the Unit SW1 and SW2 are used together to set the unit number to between 00 and Number 63 Note The factory setting is unit number 01 07 f Swi Unit Number Settings SW 14920 1121314 516 718 9
158. Connector The serial port setting in the The driver for the E58 CIFQ1 USB CX Thermo Support Soft Serial Conversion Cable is not ware communications settings installed does not show E58 CIFQ1 Install the driver from the CD ROM included with the product There is no device on the Specify a unit number in the commu communications path with the nications settings for a device on the specified unit number communications path There is a device on the com Change the unit number in the com munications path with the munications settings so that the unit same unit number numbers are not duplicated The Programmable Terminal Both the Support Software and a is connected directly to port A Programmable Terminal cannot be and performing communica connected to port A tions Either turn OFF the Programmable Terminal or move the Programmable Terminal to the System Screen and stop Programmable Terminal com munications E58 CIFQ1 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors Section 8 4 Status o O Possible cause Countermeasure Cannot connect online There is no power supply to Supply power from the EDU power the EJ1 supply terminal Connection There is no power supply to Supply power to the Interface Con the Interface Converter verter PC RS 232C The CX Thermo Support Soft Correct the communications settings ware settings are incorrect
159. Control Associated by the Output 1 Assignment CT1 Assignment Channel 1 Control Output Heating pe ena Since CT1 is associated with channel 1 channel 1 will operate according to the Operation During Error Selection B setting if an error is detected at CT1 85 Setting Alarm Specifications 4 4 Setting Alarm Specifications 4 4 1 Alarm Types Section 4 4 Set the alarm type for each of the alarms in Alarm 1 Type Alarm 2 Type and Alarm 3 Type variable type E3 A3 Alarm type Alarm Output Function When alarm value X is positive When alarm value X is negative LO Alarm function OFF Output OFF 1 Upper and lower limit See note 1 2 Upper limit Default 4 Upper and lower limit range See note 1 5 Upper and lower limit alarm with See note 1 standby sequence Upper limit alarm with standby See note 2 SP X h or a See note 4 ON sequence Lower limit alarm with standby sequence Absolute value upper limit Absolute value upper limit with standby sequence Absolute value lower limit with standby sequence a Absolute value lower limit LBA Loop Burnout Alarm Note 1 With set values 1 4 and 5 the upper and lower limit values can be set independently for each alarm type and are expressed as L and H 2 Set value 1 Upper and lower limit alarm Case 2 Case 1 Case 3 Always ON ee worn LH SP SP L H H SP L
160. D constant settings 83 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 Starting Conditions The Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function will operate after the pro for the Disturbance cess value PV has stabilized in the Disturbance Rectification Band and the Overshoot deviation is larger than the Disturbance Judgment Width Adjustment Function e When the Disturbance Judgment Width is positive the Disturbance Over 4 3 10 84 shoot Adjustment Function will operate if a disturbance causes the pro cess value PV to fall When the Disturbance Judgement Width is negative the Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function will operate if a disturbance causes the process value PV to rise e The Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function will not operate in the following situations e When the Disturbance Rectification Band or Disturbance Judgment Width parameter is 0 e When the set point is changed when the set point change width ex ceeds the Disturbance Rectification Band e During autotuning e During ON OFF control e During PD control I 0 0 Temperature l The Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function does not operate ONON EAS EA S Disturbance Rectification EE EI san oma mane a Band y Disturbance Judgment B Width The Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function operate Time Operation during Errors This parameter can be used to select the operation when an error occurred Variable type Setting range Default
161. Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 Note 1 Set values that can be changed during operation are saved to EEPROM 2 All set values are saved to EEPROM m Description of Operation Commands and Precautions e Write Mode Set either the Port B backup mode or RAM write mode using the related information The default is RAM write mode When the mode is switched from RAM write mode to backup mode the settings for the parameters that can be changed during operation are not written to EEPROM Execute the Save RAM Data command if required Note Settings that are changed from port A are always written to EEPROM Be sure to consider the limit to the number of writes when using port A e Software Reset Executes a software reset A software reset performs the same operation as when the power is cycled Execute a software reset only when control operations are stopped for all channels RUN STOP Starts or stops operation for the channels specified in the related informa tion Auto manual Switch Switches between manual mode and automatic mode for the channels specified in the related information When switching from automatic to manual mode the MV will be written to EEPROM An operation error is generated in the following instances e ON OFF control A Normal End is returned when Automatic Mode is executed when al ready in automatic mode or Manual Mode is executed when already in manual mode e Switching to Manual Mode during Execut
162. E Note For details on G3ZA functions refer to the G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller User s Manual Cat No Z200 237 Parameter List Appendix Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range type Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 co 89 Mentor 100 E000 _ GSPWi OuipatWentor F 00000000 10 F oo000sEB 0 010 1000 oo NUM fe foros eos ewm Sims O O O S d o ot ono E00A GSW Current Montor F 00000000 10 F 000008EE 0010750 oo A NUM Je J Masa OOOO SSS Not used 0200 E100 G3PW2 Output Monitor The rest are the same as the G3PW1 G3PW3 Output Monitor E G3PW4 Output Monitor E l G3PW5 Output Monitor EE G3PW6 Output Monitor EE G3PW7 Output Monitor MEMES G3PW8 Output Monitor C2 Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit type Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 DO 90 oe 0100 0240 Bank 0 Set Point CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK airing 0101 0241 Bank O Proportional Band CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 9 Seenote2 80 EU BANK e operation 0102 0242 Bank 0 Integral Time CH1 H 00000000 to H 00000F9F 0 to 3999 BANK O 0103 0243 Bank 0 Derivative Time CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 0 to 999 9 BANK 0104 0244 Bank 0 SP Ramp Rise Value H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 to 9999 EU s or
163. EU in units of 0 1 EU See note 4 Proportional band P 0 1 to 999 9 EU in units of 0 1 EU See note 4 EN EN Integral time 9 to 999 mum oros o o Derivative time 0 o 0109999 mamis arts i A E e Manual reset value 0 0 to 100 0 in units of 0 1 Alarm output setting range 1 999 to 9 999 decimal point position LS on input type Sampling period es RR 20 MQ min at 500 VDC 600 VAC 50 60 Hz for 1 min between current carrying terminals of different polarity Mieight T 1509 Note 3 W 0 5 of indication value PV or 3 C whichever is greater 1 digit max PLII 0 5 of indication value PV or 2 C whichever is greater 1 digit max K 30 WMA 0 5 of indication value PV or 1 C whichever is greater 10 digit max However up to 100 C is 2 C 10 digits max The indication accuracy of K T and N thermocouples at a temperature of 100 C or less and U and L thermocouples at any temperature is 2 C 1 digit maximum The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 C or less is unrestricted The indication accuracy of R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200 C or less is 3 C 1 digit max 4 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the O decimal point position setting will be treated as a setting of 1 e Influence of Temperature or Voltage R S B and W thermocouple inputs 1 of
164. Eran input circuit A Se ee Se Se ee ae a a eee A ee wee eee ee eens es He EI apura a ere input eS Connector between Units TC2 Sa a a a a a ee a eS ee 7 Para Men Impura eda en input iS A e CT input 1 CT CT input circuit circuit CT input 2 o CT input circuit x K input Event input 2 O A Feet ae T AAA A a a a a See note 1 e Connector between Units Note Waveform shaping circuit Waveform shaping circuit C shaping K shaping circuit Waveform shaping circuit Switch Microcomputer Port Acommu Port B commu G3ZA commu nications circuit Inications circuit nications circuit Drive aon YA Drive circuit Drive circuit Drive Pulse voltage gt a Internal buses 1 to 3 V eo ee eee Pulse voltage outputs O Control output 1 9 Control output 2 O Control output 3 Ll Suv c 0 D lt o D D 1 G3ZA communications l 1 I I 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 I I I I 1 I 1 I U e Connector between Units 1 l l 1 1 1 e A A A A A Switch mm ae oe 4 q II ES A Internal buses 1 to 3 Waveform shaping circuit Waveform shaping circuit Waveform shaping circuit Waveform shaping circuit Sheng Sheng circuit Waveform shaping circuit Microcomputer pres Y Drive e voltage Control output 1 circuit ira See note 2 Drive es voltage EAE ci
165. Expand Unit 6 Alarm OFF ON The G3ZA6 has a heater burnout overcurrent or SSR short circuit Bit 6 Expand Unit 7 Alarm OFF ON The G3ZA7 has a heater burnout overcurrent or SSR short circuit Bit 7 Expand Unit 8 Alarm OFF ON The G3ZA8 has a heater burnout overcurrent or SSR short circuit Bito Nes Bit10 Notused E A S Bit11 Notused E O S Bit12 Notused E O S Bit13 Notused E A Bit14 Notused S Bit15 Notused do o __ Note The above information also applies to the G3PW This alarm will also be caused by an SSR open failure 263 Status Lists Appendix Output Status C4 84 0012 Bit O Control Output 1 See The control output 1 status can be checked note i The control output 2 status can be checked Bit 1 Control Output 2 See OFF note OFF The control output 3 status can be checked Control Output 3 OFF Control Output 4 OFF The control output 4 status can be checked Bea nousa YS Bis Nous SYS Bre nousa SYS Bt7 Mowa SYS Bie nousa SYS Beo Notused ooo B0 nousa SY Ben nouse SYS B2 nousa SY Bas Nouse SYS Baa nousa YS Bais nouse ooo o Note Not supported by Temperature Controllers with linear outputs Device B Status C4 84 0013 Bit O Save RAM 1 No error Error Power was turned OFF while saving RAM1 and not all data was registered Bit 1 Save RAM 2 No error Error Power was turned OFF while saving RAM2 and not all data was registered Bit 2 Save Control Parame No error Error Power was turned
166. FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 Pie BANK a CH1 0115 02D5 Present Bank Alarm Lower Limit Value 3 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 Pole BANK er Present Bank Proportional Band H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 9 See note 2 EU BANK Cooling CH1 Present Bank Integral Tlme H 00000000 to H OOOOOF YF 0 to 3999 233 s BANK Cooling CH1 Present Bank Derivative Time H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 0 to 999 9 40 0 s BANK Cooling CH1 Present Bank Set Point CH2 The rest are the same as channel 1 AAA A AAA Present Bank Set Point CH3 O AA Present Bank Set Point CH4 i A Note 1 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the O decimal point position setting will be treated as a setting of 1 242 Parameter List Appendix Vari CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range able Category Add Address ress Can be 0100 02E0 Input Digital Filter CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 0 to 999 9 eri 0101 02E1 ea Value 1 for Input Correction H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 P E ET operation 0102 02E2 Input Shift 1 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 199 9 to 999 9 See note 2 0103 02E3 Input Value 2 for Input Correction H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1
167. G3ZA1 G3ZA2 etc in order starting with the lowest unit number Exa mple In this example the G3ZA Units have been set to unit numbers O 1 7 and 8 The following diagram shows how the G3ZA Units are associated with the EJ1 A leis Hep Unit O gt G3ZA1 2 Es a Unit 1 gt G3ZA2 a isa sae Unit 7 gt G3ZA3 a da Le Unit 8 gt G3ZA4 Orage Oia tal Of 2 das Ose oe lE 180 Kp Ep G3ZA O O O O LLPP DPPP DPPP OOOOS OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO fe ed To o Pe o Te o 291 el 211 Hi G O DODICO DODICO DODICO PODIDO OOOTO CN D0000 O00009 ZAS ZO Unit No O Unit No 1 Unit No 7 Unit No 8 109 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Section 4 7 Settings Sending MVs to the G3ZA G3ZA Models with 4 Channels 110 Unit number Variable type DA 9A G3ZA1 CH1 Slope G3ZA1 CH1 2 Slope 1 G3ZA2 CH1 Slope G3ZA2 CH1 2 Slope 7 G3ZA3 CH1 Slope G3ZA3 CH1 2 Slope G3ZA4 CH1 Slope G3ZA4 CH1 2 Slope The G3ZA settings are read and written through the Basic Unit Th
168. H 00000020 CH1 Alarm 1 32 H 00000021 CH1 Alarm 2 33 H 00000022 CH1 Alarm 3 34 H 00000023 CH1 All alarm OR 35 H 00000024 CH1 All alarm AND 36 H 00000025 CH1 Input error 37 H 00000026 CH1 RSP Input error 38 Not used H 00000028 CH1 HB Heater Burnout alarm 40 H 00000029 CH1 HS Heater Short alarm 41 H 0000002A CH1 OC Heater Overcurrent alarm 42 Not used H 00000032 CH1 Bank bitO 50 H 00000033 CH1 Bank bit1 51 H 00000034 CH1 Stop 0 Run 1 52 H 00000035 CH1 Run 0 Stop 1 53 H 00000036 CH1 Auto 0 Manual 1 54 H 00000037 CH1 SP mode Local 0 Remote 1 55 Not used H 00000040 Chamnel 2 The same as channel 1 64 H 00000060 Chamnel 3 The same as channel 1 96 255 Status Lists Appendix Status Lists Use the Status listed in the following tables to check EJ1 status TC4 TC2 CO Status C0 80 0001 Bit O Heater Overcurrent No error Error The heater current value exceeds See note 1 110 0 A Bit 1 Heater Current Hold Updated Hold The heater current monitor has not been See note 1 updated because the control output ON time is less than 100 ms Ba Wasa A A S Bs Nowa ooo S oo Ba Nowa ooo S S ws pows f o S Bit 8 Control aT ME Control output status can be checked See note 2 Bit 9 Control output Wa Control output status can be checked See note A eri Newsed O Bas Noted ooo S ooo Bae Nouse
169. H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L lt 0 en non ESTA M0 70 JHT IH gt L H LSP t f pL E H gt 0 L lt 0 SPH L H lt L 3 Set value 4 Upper and lower limit range Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Always OFF H gt 0 L lt 0 L H SP SPL A H SP L H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L lt 0 pm ME perras H lt 0 L gt 0 H lt L H gt L H LSP H gt L ALTE H gt 0L lt 0 SPH L H lt L 86 Setting Alarm Specifications Section 4 4 4 Set value 5 Upper and lower limit with standby sequence Note For the above upper and lower limit alarm e In cases 1 and 2 above the alarm is always OFF if the hystere sis overlaps the upper and lower limits e In case 3 the alarm is always OFF 5 Set value 5 Upper and lower limit with standby sequence e The alarm is always OFF when the hysteresis overlaps the up per and lower limits 4 4 2 Alarm Value Alarm values are indicated by X in the table on the previous page When the upper and lower limits are set independently H is displayed for upper limit values and L is displayed for lower limit values type DO 90 Alarm Value 1 to 3 BANK 1999 to 9999 EU O Conditions for use The alarm type must not be set to an upper and lower limit alarm or to an LBA Variable type Parameter name Setting range Default D0 90 Alarm Upper Limit Value 1 to 3 BANK 1999 to 9999 EU O Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 to 3 BANK 1999 to 9999EU O Conditions for use The alarm type mu
170. IABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted INNO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this manual e Nuclear energy control systems
171. Operation error The command cannot be executed due to a 7012 configuration error 7013 Operation error The command cannot be executed because 188 7013 the operation command cannot be received Execute retries until the 7013 response code is reset Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 Response code Error name Cause Operation error The command cannot be executed because 7014 EEPROM is currently being written Execute retries until the 7014 response code is reset 7015 Operation error The command cannot be executed during 7015 reset including startup 7016 Operation error The command cannot be executed during 7016 error latch status 7020 Operation error The command cannot be executed in the cur 7020 rent control mode 7021 Operation error The command cannot be executed because 7021 the control switching conditions have not been established 7030 Operation error The command cannot be executed in the cur 7030 rent output mode 7041 Operation error The command cannot be executed in manual 7041 operation mode 7042 Operation error The command cannot be executed in tuning 7042 mode Normal completion Processing was completed normally 189 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 190 SECTION 7 Modbus Communications This section describes how to use Modbus communications based on communications commands 7 1 Communications Settings asana aerae ee eee eens 192
172. PMENT OR SYSTEM Programmable Products Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable Product or any consequence thereof Performance Data Data presented in Omron Company websites catalogs and other materials is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitabil ity and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of Omron s test conditions and the user must correlate it to actual application require ments Actual performance is subject to the Omron s Warranty and Limitations of Liability Change in Specifications Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our prac tice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifica tions of the Product may be changed without any notice When in doubt spe cial part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application Please consult with your Omron s representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased Product Errors and Omissions Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions OMRON OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC THE AMERICAS HEADQUARTERS Schaumburg IL USA e 847 843
173. PV or 10 C whichever is greater 1 digit max Thermocouple input K 30 Naw 1 of PV or 4 C whichever is greater 10 digit max However up to 100 C is 10 C Other thermocouple inputs 1 of PV or 4 C whichever is greater 1 digit max But K Sensors 100 C max or 10 C max Platinum resistance thermometer inputs 1 of PV or 2 C whichever is greater 1 digit max Analog input 1 FS or 1 digit whichever is greater Conditions Temperature range 10 C to 23 C to 55 C Voltage range 15 to 10 231 Current Transformer Current Transformer Specifications a ia IO faon Jen Vibration resistance 50 Hz 98 m s Weim approx 1159 Approx 509 Accessories None Armatures 2 plugs 2 Note The maximum continuous current of the EJ1 is 100 A Dimensions E54 CT1 E54 CT3 232 Appendix ASCII Table Appendix ASCII Table Leftmost digit n digit nu oe SPACE 0 e ee OO CO CO E IC IC S 233 Sensor Input Ranges Appendix Sensor Input Ranges Set value ton Poe F e A Platinum Pioo lo 200to850 300101500 22010870 _ S40 10 1540 sowed 1 199 9 10 500 0 199 9 10 900 0 219 9 to 620 0 239 9 to 940 0 JPHOD 8 1999105000 199 9t09000 _ 219 9 to 620 0 239 9 to 940 0 a oowoo o0to2100 200t0120 0 40 0 to 250 0 Thermocou K 200to1300 _ 300t0 2800 220t01320 340t0 2340 pl e 20 006000 _
174. Programless Communications Section 5 1 we oa Parameter Bi Executedoperation command RUN STOP 100 AT Execute AT Cancel Auto Manual Switch to Manual Mode Switch to Auto Mode Note 1 When allocating the above parameters in the Programless Download Setting be sure to allocate RUN STOP and Auto Manual before allocat ing AT Execute Cancel If AT Execute Cancel is allocated before the oth ers AT Execute cannot be executed simultaneously with RUN or Auto 2 Even if AT execution has finished or been canceled the bit that was turned ON with AT Execute Cancel will not turn OFF automatically If the bit is left ON AT may start unexpectedly such as during a system reboot so make sure to turn OFF the bit when AT finishes or is canceled The status while AT is executing can be checked using the channel status bit 2 AT Execute Cancel 3 Bit specified operation commands may not function properly for distribut ed positioning if power is turned ON to a TC that is beyond the HFU or if the HFU cannot detect the TC due to noise or other factors If this occurs use an operation command to reset the HFU 155 Programless Communications Section 5 1 5 1 7 Programless Communications Errors Possible Causes of e A value outside the setting range was written Parameter Access e A non existent Unit was accessed Problems e An attempt was made to change a setting for which changes are prohib ited Example An attempt was ma
175. S ie oO Q 5 After selecting the row the menu of the copy is displayed by the right click Please select the row while pushing the Shift button to select some rows 132 Programless Communications Section 5 1 N Caution e There are 304 programless upload and 304 programless download set tings 604 each for version and 1 204 each for version MAP which are linked to data to the PLC memory from the start address to the end code OOFF Always set an end code at the end of linked data because all 304 pieces of data will be linked if there is no end code 604 for version and 1 204 for version MAMA Each start area contains a reserved area used to control programless communications from the PLC Information on how to use programless uploading and downloading is provided under 5 1 4 Description of Opera tion e The communications speed will drop if there is a lot of linked data Adjust the number of linked data items that are set to suit the system e If non existent settings are set programless uploading and downloading will not operate correctly The communications speed may also be affected so always use valid settings E Error Status The Error Status is used for detection of Basic Unit internal communications errors Leftmost bit Unit No Rightmost bit Error Status 1 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 e 5 4 3 2 1 lo lf an error occurs in communications with a Basic Unit the bit that corre spo
176. Step 1 Set from PLC user program D1505 Channel 2 Set Point Step 1 Set from PLC user program E If Not Operating Correctly Check the following items if the operation is incorrect e Are the wiring and settings correct e Was the power turned OFF once the EJ1 and PLC settings had been completed The EJ1 settings are enabled only after the EJ1 is reset e The Programless Communications Receive Wait Time may be too short Refer to Adjusting Communications Time with PLC on page 136 and change to a longer wait time Checking Operation This section describes how to check operation for the configuration shown with the MELSEC An below AnS FX3UC Series MELSEC An AnS FX3UC series PLC EJ1 HFU TC EDU ear Siles 1 A a aes EAS Sp CS gt E JS O ED RS 232C 485 422 Unit Unit No 0 No 1 1 2 3 1 Connect the EJ1 and PLC Connect the EJ1N HFU and Computer Link Unit as shown in the following diagram 127 Programless Communications Section 5 1 e RS 232C MELSEC An AnS FX3UC series PLC EJ1N HFULI NFLK RS 232C _ Shield 26 ao SD sm sa 7 as Note 1 AJ71UC24 pin numbers are given in parentheses 2 Pins 7 and 8 do not need to be connected for the FX3UC DASS SD _ DASS B8 A SG Turn ON pin 8 of SW2 to set RS 232C e When using an An A
177. T2 Assignment See note 1 EA H 00000002 eT NUM en F H 00000003 018B G3ZA1 CT3 Assignment See note 1 H 00000004 Bor NUM ia 018C G3ZA1 CT4 Assignment See note 1 pe iT NUM 01C0 FO8A G3ZA1 CH1 Soft Increase Time ma 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 eo NUM sA 01C1 FO8B G3ZA1 CH2 Soft Increase Time H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 Lo NUM ie j 01C2 FO8C G3ZA1 CH3 Soft Increase Time H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 ES NUM 01C3 FOCO G3ZA1 CH4 Soft Increase Time ma 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 Pol NUM s 01C4 FOC1 G3ZA1 CH5 Soft Increase Time ma 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 EC NUM 01C5 FOC2 G3ZA1 CH6 Soft Increase Time ma 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 err 7 NUM e e 01C6 FOC3 G3ZA1 CH7 Soft Increase Time mg 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 20 0 CO NUM 7 01C7 FOC4 G3ZA1 CH8 Soft Increase Time ma 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 20 0 aan NUM Ei 01C8 FOC5 G3ZA1 CH1 Soft Decrease Time ma 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 paa gt NUM E 01C9 FOC6 G3ZA1 CH2 Soft Decrease Time mpg 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 ple 2 NUM E 01CA FOC7 G3ZA1 CH3 Soft Decrease Time grz 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 CU NUM Fi 01CB FOC8 G3ZA1 CH4 Soft Decrease Time ma 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 ee le NUM 24 un Parameter List Appendix Vari CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor
178. The internal communications error status however is not set Programless Link Error No error Error There is a programless communications error B3 Nawa OO S B4 Note Bas nousa A A Device Error Status C4 84 0001 Bit position AA Bit description mo Mouws A A SS Bi atea Bte Note OOO OOO O SS S Bis noted Bts atea B7 noted Bte Notus O O No error Error Bit 12 Model Information Mis No error Error There is a memory error matching Error Bit13 Ne Bda Notused ss Biti5 Notuseh ss 267 Status Lists Appendix Configuration Error A Status C4 84 0002 Bit position Bit description mo fosa O A WS S B ows AO S S B2 nowe OOO O O S Bs Norte Ba Note Bs ows OO O S Be now OOO O B7 ows O S Bo ows O Bero nouse ooo Ben nouse ooo B2 nouse COCINA A O B4 Norte COC A S o Device B Status C4 84 0013 Bit position Ma Bit description Bo Notused Error Bit 1 Save RAM 2 No error Power was turned OFF while saving RAM2 and not all data was registered B2 nouse A A O O OC C S Bit 3 Registration of unit con No error Error Power was turned OFF during Unit configuration figuration Registration of registration or composite read registration and not multiple reads all data was registered Ba Note Bits Note Be Note Write mode can be confirmed EEPROM EEPROM in EEPROM ww ET CA IE A CSI TI CA A CASERO DESTE EN E ESE TIO O A Beta ota Bti5 Notuse ooo o G
179. The range set for output scaling is used as the output range for the transfer output Refer to 4 2 5 Output Scaling for information on output scaling m Example The following example outputs the process value on a transfer output Input Type 6 20 0 to 500 0 C Control Output 1 Assignment 43 channel 1 process value Linear Output 1 Type 1 O to 20 mA 62 Setting Output Specifications Section 4 2 Parameter TA TE Output Sealing Upper Limit Output Sealing Lower Limit oT Transfer output mA Process value C 0 300 0 500 0 Reverse scaling can also be performed with output scaling Transfer output mA Reverse scaling 20 4 r gt P gt Transfer output heating 0 100 Output Scaling Output Scaling Upper Limit Lower Limit 63 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 4 3 Setting Control Specifications 4 3 1 Starting and Stopping Control E Start Control RUN and Stop Control STOP The following two methods can be used to start stop control For details refer to the corresponding pages 1 Starting stopping control with an operation command 6 4 11 Operation Commands 2 Starting stopping control with an event input 4 7 2 Event Inputs TC2 E Operation After Power ON The operation after power goes ON can be set to Continue Stop or Manual mode operation This setting also applies to operation after a software reset Variable type Setting
180. Unit 1 Error No error Error There is an error in communications with the G3ZA1 Bit 1 Expand Unit 2 Error No error Error There is an error in communications with the G3ZA2 Expand Unit 3 Error There is an error in communications with the G3ZA3 Bit 5 Expand Unit 6 Error No error Error There is an error in communications with the G3ZA6 Bit 6 Expand Unit 7 Error No error Error There is an error in communications with the G3ZA7 Expand Unit 8 Error There is an error in communications with the G3ZA8 Be osa AS O AN B9 nousa O S S Bo Naua O S a Bu Note IA A IES IEA IN Expand Unit 4 Error There is an error in communications with the G3ZA4 Expand Unit 5 Error There is an error in communications with the G3ZA5 B4 Nate Bas nousa A A S Note The above information also applies to the G3PW 259 Status Lists Appendix Internal Communications Error Status C4 84 0004 Bit O Expand Unit 1 Commu No error Error There is an error in communications with the nications Error G3ZA1 Bit 1 Expand Unit 2 Commu No error Error There is an error in communications with the nications Error G3ZA2 Bit 2 Expand Unit 3 Commu No error Error There is an error in communications with the nications Error G3ZA3 Bit 3 Expand Unit 4 Commu No error Error There is an error in communications with the nications Error G3ZA4 Bit 4 Expand Unit 5 Commu No error Error There is an error in communications with the nications Error G3ZA5 B
181. Unit Configuration Examples Minimal Configuration e The two auxiliary alarm outputs transistor outputs provided on the End Unit can be used e The G3ZA or G3PW can be connected EJ1L1 TC4 or EJ111 EDU EJ101 TC2 Port A connector USB connection i can be made using the E58 CIFQ1 e i sold separately CX Thermo for setting E Computer QIZOQ TZ ZQ NIRO BIG NO PIENE a Ba 62 6 7 NTIA NA NM ANIN IE Multiple Units without an e The two auxiliary alarm outputs transistor outputs provided on the End HFU Unit can be used e G3ZA or G3PW outputs can be used e Distributed placement is possible by using multiple End Units
182. Upload Settings 16 Programless Upload Settings 17 Programless Upload Settings 18 Programless Upload Settings 19 Download settings Programless Download Settings 4 Unit No 1 CH1 Set Point Unit No 1 CH2 Set Point Unit No 1 CH3 Set Point Unit No 1 CH4 Set Point Unit No 2 CH1 Set Point Unit No 2 CH2 Set Point Unit No 2 CH3 Set Point Unit No 2 CH4 Set Point Unit No 3 CH1 Set Point Unit No 3 CH2 Set Point Unit No 3 CH3 Set Point Unit No 3 CH4 Set Point Unit No 0 Common End Code Programless Download Settings 5 Programless Download Settings 6 Programless Download Settings 7 Programless Download Settings 8 Programless Download Settings 9 Programless Download Settings 10 Programless Download Settings 11 Programless Download Settings 12 Programless Download Settings 13 Programless Download Settings 14 Programless Download Settings 15 Programless Download Settings 16 Note 1 Displayed when the CX Thermo s View Mode is set to Advanced Mode 4 Ue Control Linked to a Host Device Section 3 3 Note PLC 3 3 4 Adjustment 44 e The Programmable Terminal and E58 CIFQ1 Connecting Cable cannot be connected at the same time e When connecting the cable for the Support Software to an EJ1C EDU End Unit either turn OFF the Programmable Terminal s power supply or switch the Programmable Terminal s screen to the system menu The following example settings are for commun
183. User settings SCB SCU e Serial communications mode Serial Gateway CJ1W CIF11 e Data length 7 bit RS 422A Converter de Stop bits D bit RS 485 EJ1 e Parity Even bit e Baud rate Set the same baud rate as the EJ1 Connection port Refer to the CX Integrator Operation Manual W445 for port Note The Serial Communications Board SCB Unit SCU PT fee must be unit version 1 2 or later Refer to Unit Versions PLC f of CS CJ series Serial Communications Boards Units in the Serial Communications Board Unit Operation Man sou ual W336 for information on checking unit versions FER There is an HFU connected to Port B cannot be used for communi the EJ1 cations if an HFU is connected to the EJ1 Hint When Using HFUs Connect to port A on the Serial Communications Unit The following restrictions apply e The HFU cannot be used at the same time as the CX Thermo Support Software e The baud rate is fixed at 38 4 kbps If an HFU Is Not Required Disconnect the HFU and restart the EJ1 Note The baud rate and communications distance sometimes depend on the com munications partner 220 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors Section 8 4 Programless No Programless Communications between the PLC and the EJ1 Communications Status Possible cause Countermeasure No communications between There is no power supply to Supply power from the EDU power the PLC
184. V amplitude during limit cycle operation in autotuning Note This parameter is disabled for 100 AT E Temporary AT Execution Judgment Deviation When autotuning has been executed temporary autotuning will be executed if the deviation specified in this parameter is exceeded Note This parameter is disabled for 100 AT E 40 AT e The width of MV variation in the limit cycle can be changed with the Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter In this case autotuning will take longer to execute than it does with 100 AT e The timing of the limit cycle s onset depends on whether the deviation at the start of autotuning DV is less than the Temporary AT Execution Judgment Deviation Deviation gt Temporary AT Execution Deviation lt Temporary AT Execution Judgment Deviation Judgment Deviation ie Limit Cycle Limit Cycle vae MV Amplitude 40 YAMS MV Amplitude 40 Set point Set point Temporary AT Temporary AT l Execution Judgment Deviation Execution Judgment Deviation i Default 150 0 Default 150 0 i rn Time i i Time Autotuning starts Autotuning completed Autotuning starts Autotuning completed E 100 AT e When autotuning starts it operates as shown below regardless of the deviation DV When you want to shorten the time it takes for autotuning select 100 AT Note The Limit Cycle MV Amplitude and Temporary AT Execution Judgment Devia tion parameters are disa
185. address sip FINS mini command text ETX BCC H my AAA A 1 1 1 2 2 1 BCC calculation range This code indicates the beginning of the communications frame Always set to 02H e Set the unit number that is set on SW1 and SW2 on the EJ1 e Specify XX for a broadcast transmission No responses will be returned for broadcast transmissions e No responses will be returned from unit numbers other than the ones in the above range Sub address Not used by the EJ1 Always set to 0 SID Not used by the EJ1 Always set to 0 FINS mini com This text is the command For details refer to 6 3 FINS mini mand text Text ETX This code indicates the end of the communications frame Always set to 03H The BCC calculation result from the unit number to the ETX 172 Frame Configuration Section 6 2 BCC Calculation Example STX UnitNo Sub address SID FINS mini command text ETX BCC 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 35H 30H 30H BCC 30H 930H930H930H930H930H0935H 30HH30H 03H 35H XOR exclusive OR calculation Note No response will be returned unless the frame contains all elements up to the ETX and BCC Response Frame Text STX Unit No Sub address End code FINS mini command text ETX BCC D et A 1 2 2 2 1 1 BCC calculation range End Codes Endcode Name Meaning Error detection priority FINS command error The specified FINS command could not be executed B 10 Pari
186. ained herein Moreover because OMRON is con stantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT L
187. al 265 Input Error 265 RSP Input Error 265 273 Index RUN STOP 265 SP Mode 265 characteristics 231 checking operation 119 123 127 close in alarm 89 closed in alarm or open in alarm 89 command frame 172 BCC 172 ETX 172 FINS mini command text 172 SID 172 STX 172 Sub address 172 Unit No 172 command frame formant 172 communications settings 170 171 192 193 communications specifications 170 192 composite read from variable area 178 composite read registration 181 composite read registration confirmation 182 composite registration read 180 composite write to variable area 179 CompoWay F 172 Configuration Error A Status HFU 268 Illegal Unit Arrangement 268 Configuration Error A Status TC4 TC2 258 Expand Unit Connection Fault 258 Expand Unit Failure 258 Too Many Expand Units 258 Undefined Expand Units 258 Configuration Error B Status TC4 TC2 259 Expand Unit 1 Error 259 Expand Unit 2 Error 259 Expand Unit 3 Error 259 Expand Unit 4 Error 259 Expand Unit 5 Error 259 Expand Unit 6 Error 259 Expand Unit 7 Error 259 Expand Unit 8 Error 259 connectable devices 118 connecting more than one HFU 157 control output assignments 57 control output method 58 controller attribute read 183 controller status read 184 cooling coefficient 69 crimp terminals 19 CT Current Transformer 93 274 CT assignment TC2 91 Current Transformer 232 Current Transformer
188. al point position is determined by the sensor selection 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the 0 decimal point position setting will be treated as setting 1 53 Setting Input Specifications Section 4 1 Simple Shift One The temperature measurements at all points in the sensor range are shifted point Shift For example make the following settings if you want to increase the tempera ture by 1 2 C e Input Shift 1 Input Shift 2 1 2 Note Itis not necessary to set the Input Value 1 for Input Correction or Input Value 2 for Input Correction parameters Leave these parameters set to their default settings When the measured value after the setting is 200 C the process value will become 201 2 C Temperature Upper Looo _ pp limit After shifting Before shifting Input shift value Lower limit Input Advanced Shift Two A linear compensation can be applied by setting the Input Value 1 for Input point Shift Correction in Input Shift 1 and independently setting the Input Value 2 for Input Correction in Input Shift 2 If different shift values are set for Input Shift 1 and Input Shift 2 the slope of the line may be different before and after apply ing the input shift Display y Input Shift 2 After shifting Before shifting Input Shift 1 y Input Input Value 1 Input Value 2
189. and Response Bits Refer to Method for Canceling Communications Errors on page 156 for information on clearing the error When using the default Basic Unit settings programless communications will stop if a programless link error occurs This will make reading parameters changing settings and executing operation commands impossible When starting normal operation it is recommended that the programless communi cations error operation selection be set to continue operation The settings are the same as made when checking operation Refer to Check ing Operation with SYSMAC CS CJ Series PLCs on page 119 The settings are the same as made when checking operation Make settings based on the following table if the baud rate or transmission settings need to be changed Channel Switch number Bit position Description Oi SWO7 swo Communications protocol setting swo3 swo gt Communications protocol setting Common for both SW05 Station number setting CH1 and CH2 E Transmission Settings Note Be Description oFF ON Setting po Operation seting independent Linked l0 JE p1 Data bis Se note 7 B h p2 party bit Sse note No vs h gt bs Evoad pariy See note oad even H pa Stop bis See mote h b p TE C Noyes pe Write duringRUN Prohibited Allowed 1 Change the settings if required If changes are made make the same settings on the EJ1 137 Programless Communications Section 5 1
190. ands AT Execute Cancel TC2 No 24 to 31 Only for operation com mands Auto Manual TC2 No 00 to 07 Only for operation com mands Auto Manual TC2 No 08 to 15 Only for operation com mands Auto Manual TC2 No 16 to 23 Only for operation com mands Auto Manual TC2 No 24 to 31 Only for operation com mands RUN STOP TC4 No 00 to 03 Only for operation com mands RUN STOP TC4 No 04 to 07 Only for operation com mands RUN STOP TC4 No 08 to 11 Only for operation com mands RUN STOP TC4 No 12 to 15 Only for operation com mands RUN STOP TC4 No 16 to 19 Only for operation com mands RUN STOP TC4 No 20 to 23 Only for operation com mands RUN STOP TC4 No 24 to 27 Only for operation com mands RUN STOP TC4 No 28 to 31 Only for operation com mands AT Execute Cancel TC4 No 00 to 03 Only for operation com mands AT Execute Cancel TC4 No 04 to 07 Only for operation com mands AT Execute Cancel TC4 No 08 to 11 Only for operation com mands AT Execute Cancel TC4 No 12 to 15 Only for operation com mands AT Execute Cancel TC4 No 16 to 19 Only for operation com mands AT Execute Cancel TC4 No 20 to 23 Only for operation com mands AT Execute Cancel TC4 No 24 to 27 Only for operation com mands AT Execute Cancel TC4 No 28 to 31 Only for operation com mands Auto Manual TC4 No 00 to 03 Only for operation com mands Auto Manual TC4 No 04 to 07 O
191. ank1 Alarm Value 3 0H1 H FFEFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9990 See note 1 0 Eu Bank e H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK 0276 Bank 1 Proportional Band H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 9 See note 2 EU BANK Cooling CH1 0117 0277 Bank 1 Integral Tlme H 00000000 to H 00000F9F 0 to 3999 233 s BANK Cooling CH1 i 0278 Bank 1 Derivative Time H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 0 to 999 9 40 0 s BANK Cooling CH1 Not used 0200 0460 Bank 1 Set Point CH2 The rest are the same as channel 1 AA A AAA CACEN TA ANN 0400 0860 dan SEPARA EA NN o wa as es es ey em 239 Parameter List Appendix Vari CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit ae Category Add Address TC4 ype ress TC2 D2 Canbe 0100 0280 Bank 2 Set Point CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK 92 changed during 0101 0281 Bank 2 Proportional Band CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 9 See note 2 8 0 EU BANK e operation 0102 0282 Bank 2 Integral Time CH1 H 00000000 to H 00000F9F 0 to 3999 BANK 0103 0283 Bank 2 Derivative Time CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 0 to 999 9 BANK 0104 0284 Bank 2 SP Ramp Rise Value CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 to 99
192. annel 2 process values The EJ1 set value will be continuously read if D1500 is set to 2 Set D1500 to 0 to stop reading the set value Data register Value Meaning Procedure step number and confirmation Hem po f read Response Bits Step 2 Serto 2 by tne system p o etting Change Response Bits m o Operation Command Response Bis m Communications Status 05 D1500 Read Request Bits Step 1 Set from PLC user program D1501 0 Seting ChangeRequestBiis O00000 O E Changing EJ1 Set Values Use the following procedure to confirm that the channel 1 and channel 2 set points change 1 2 3 Set D1504 and D1505 in PLC memory to 100 Set the Setting Change Request Bits D1501 to 1 Set the Setting Change Response Bits D1 to 1 Use the CX Thermo Support Software to confirm that the EJ1 channel 1 and channel 2 set points have changed to 100 To check operation again set D1501 to O and once D1 has changed to O repeat the procedure from step 1 A Data register Value Meaning Procedure step number and confirmation item DO __ Read Response Bits A D1 Setting Change Response Bits Step 3 Setto 1 D1501 Setting Change Request Bits Step 2 Set from PLC user program E Operation Command Request Bits Programless Communications Section 5 1 Data register Value Meaning Procedure step number and confirmation item D1503 o Operation Command Code fo D1504 Channel 1 Set Point
193. annels See note 2 H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 to 1000 10 fms Common e Note 1 Not valid when an NT Link is being used 2 Set the Delay between Outputs parameter to an even number If an odd number is set the next smaller even number will be used 3 Parameters with the following mark are supported only by version 1 1 Temperature Controllers Refer to Functional Upgrades on page xxvi for details on upgraded functionality 4 Can only be used by improved models For details on improved models refer to Functional Upgrades on page xxiv 253 Parameter List Appendix Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range ype Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 F2 B2 Enabled 0000 A400 Event Input 1 Assignment H 00000000 Disabled 0 Common TC2 after H 00000001 All channels Bank bitO 1 resetting H 00000002 All channels Bank bit1 2 H 00000003 All channels Stop 0 Run 1 3 H 00000004 All channels Run 0 Stop 1 4 H 00000005 All channels Auto 0 Manual 1 5 H 00000006 All channels SP mode Local 0 Remote 1 6 Not used H 00000020 CH1 Bank bitO 32 H 00000021 CH1 Bank bit1 33 H 00000022 CH1 Stop 0 Run 1 3 H 00000023 CH1 Run 0 Stop 1 35 H 00000024 CH1 Auto 0 Manual 1 36 H 00000025 CH1 SP mode Local 0 Remote 1 37 Not used H 00000040 The rest are the same as channel 1 64 0001 A401 Event Input 2
194. ansistor Q gt 24 VDC Input power supply Y 24VDC gt ossesise os eae Sea Ses Sees Sa See eee eee SSeS aa id eee eS e be i Functional isolation Nasa 2222 10 SECTION 2 Preparations This section describes the preparations required to use the EJ1 including installation wiring and switch settings Za Instala cie be eae Oa le ae ae ale ae eee nga weed as 12 2 l Dimensions UNE 10M 2 6042 4 60a ceee do iene eee deeGwd eines 12 2 1 2 Mounting and Removing Terminal Blocks 13 2 2 Winne Terminals s405 10 04 ds34Gcnh6G cade meree Wee ete ee he eee beet 16 2 22 Terminal Arraneement lt 3 4 0 2440 0 sees bebe bees aa 16 22 2 Wining Precios bate aioe va bee NA A oe 18 Zasa WIN Aan O eee aloe 19 2 5 Usm TOOL POTS eerren Baa G ne bag Gite Swi heey eae oe oe faa 26 2 391 PrOceduiess lt s 5 onc dhe etd oath 2 sue eat ecag es ds 26 2 4 Unit Configuration Examples 0 eee eee eens 27 2 4 1 Connection Precautions 5 c044 pd AAA 29 11 Installation Section 2 1 2 1 Installation 2 1 1 Dimensions Unit mm TC4 TC2 and HFU Models with Screw Terminals 109
195. ater Burnout Alarm Operation H 00000000 Disable 0 NUM H 00000001 Alarm Level 1 1 H 00000002 Alarm Level 2 2 0192 F092 G3PW1 Total Run Time Exceeded Alarm H 00000000 Disable 0 NUM Operation H 00000001 Alarm Level 1 1 H 00000002 Alarm Level 2 2 0193 F093 G3PW1 Total Run Time Alarm Set Value H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 to 99 9 10 0 kh NUM j 0194 FO94 G3PW1 External Input Range Alarm Opera H 00000000 Disable 0 NUM tion H 00000001 Alarm Level 1 1 H 00000002 Alarm Level 2 2 0195 FO95 G3PW1 External Duty Input Alarm Operation H 00000000 Disable 0 NUM H 00000001 Alarm Level 1 1 H 00000002 Alarm Level 2 2 Not used 0200 F100 G3PW2 Internal Duty Setting The rest are the same as the G3PW1 0200 IE ae G3PWS Internal Duty Setting E ae 0400 0400 F300 G3PW4 Internal Duty Setting A A A N SS RONM A A A A A A N DD IDO ONO Ol A A A N 247 Parameter List Parameter name Vari CompoWay F Modbus able Category Add Address ress a Internal Duty Setting EE 0600 F500 G3PW6 Internal Duty Setting 0700 F600 G3PW7 Internal Duty Setting 0800 F700 G3PW8 Internal Duty Setting Parameter name Variable CompoWay F Modbus Re Category Add Address ress EO AO Not used Not used used 0100 0320 Input Type CH1 0101 0321 Temperature Unit CH1 0102 0322 Scaling Upper L
196. ation Commands for details on the opera tion commands Variable type Setting range Default Heater Burnout 1 or 2 Latch I O 0 Disabled 1 Enabled This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped Detecting Current Errors Installing Current Transformers CT HB Alarm Section 4 5 Connect the CT in advance to terminals A8 and A9 CT1 or A7 and A9 CT2 and pass the heater power line through the CT s hole Refer to Current Trans former on page 232 for details on compatible CT specifications models and dimensions 1 Single phase Heaters Install the CT as shown below Load Heater example AC line To CT input 2 Three phase Heaters Two CTs are required when using a three phase power supply regardless of the type of wiring a Delta Connection Referto the following diagram for CT installation po sitions Note Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered here so take that into account when setting the detection current Load Heater example AC line To CT input AC line To CT input b Star Connection Refer to the following diagram for CT installation po sitions Note Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered here so take that into account when setting the detection current Load Heater example AC line To CT input To CT input c V Connection Refer to the following diagram for CT installation posi tions Note Heater voltage fluc
197. ation for the com munications port on the Communications Setting Screen to Temperature Controller and the baud rate to 38 4 kbps 217 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors Section 8 4 Status o O Possible cause Countermeasure The Smart Active Part SAP There is no power supply to the Supply power from the EDU power does not communicate with EJ1 supply terminal the EJ1 The Programmable Terminal Refer to the Programmable Terminal connection is incorrect RS 422A Converter and EJ1 manu Connection als and wire the connection correctly The SAP is not compatible with Use a SAP for the EJ1 the EJ1 NS series The SAP is not for direct con Use a SAP for direct Programmable nection Terminal connection CJ1W CIF11 The RS 422A switch settings Refer to the product manual and RS 422A Converter are incorrect make the correct switch setting for the communications conditions The Programmable Terminal Set the PT s baud rate the same as communications conditions are the port B baud rate different from the EJ1 communi cations settings Connection port Hint Connection jo The EJ1 baud rate is set under the Port B Communications Port A Port B Baud Rate parameter e The available baud rate settings are 9 6 kbps default 19 2 kbps 38 4 kbps 57 6 kbps and 115 2 kbps See note EDU e Set the settings other than baud rate to the following default
198. ause of the error based on the data read by the EJ1 then correct the error If the cause of the error is still not clear after checking all these items infer the cause from the current situation and try countermeasures Determining Errors from Indicators Section 8 2 8 2 Determining Errors from Indicators The following table shows indicator status possible error causes and coun termeasures With a version TC4 TC2 when No 6 of SW2 is turned ON the opera tion indicator will display the output status Always turn OFF No 6 of SW2 for confirmation Status Possible causes Countermeasure PWR Not lit There is no power supply Check to see if the Units are linked properly Not lit The power supply voltage is out Adjust the voltage to within the range side the allowable range peel The Unit is malfunctioning Replace the Unit Not lit Green flashing 0 5 s The Unit is malfunctioning Cycle the power supply If the problem persists replace the Unit PWR ld RUN ERR E y li ALM The settings data is corrupted Send the Parameter Initialization operation com PWR ld Green flashing 1 s mand to initialize the parameters and then set RUN them again ERR pees ALM Not lit The Unit configuration informa Send the Register Unit Configuration Reset Red lit tion is corrupted Basic Units operation command and then cycle the EJ1 a only power supply The Unit is malfunctioning Replace the Unit
199. ay charge Buyer 1 1 2 interest per month or the maximum legal rate whichever is less on any balance not paid within the stated terms Orders Omron will accept no order less than 200 net billing Governmental Approvals Buyer shall be responsible for and shall bear all costs involved in obtaining any government approvals required for the impor tation or sale of the Products Taxes All taxes duties and other governmental charges other than general real property and income taxes including any interest or penalties thereon imposed directly or indirectly on Omron or required to be collected directly or indirectly by Omron for the manufacture production sale delivery importa tion consumption or use of the Products sold hereunder including customs duties and sales excise use turnover and license taxes shall be charged to and remitted by Buyer to Omron Financial If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory to Omron Omron reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory security or payment in advance If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise comply with these Terms or any related agreement Omron may without liabil ity and in addition to other remedies cancel any unshipped portion of Prod ucts sold hereunder and stop any Products in transit until Buyer pays all amounts including amounts payable hereunder whether or not then due which are owing to it by Buyer Buyer shall in any event remain
200. bled 79 Setting Control Specifications Self tuning ST Note Starting Conditions 80 Section 4 3 Process Limit Cycle value MV Amplitude 100 saan NA Time A A Autotuning starts Autotuning completed Self tuning ST finds the PID constants by using step response tuning SRT when the EJ1 is operated or the set point is changed Once the PID constants have been calculated ST does not execute when the next control operation is started as long as the set point remains unchanged Variable type Setting range Channel 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ST Stable Range 0 1 to 999 9 EU 5 Channel See note 2 E5 A5 Conditions for use The input type must be set to temperature input control output must be assigned and set to standard control the control method must be set to 2 PID control remote SP must be dis abled and the Output ON Scheduling function must be dis abled 1 Settings can only be made when Unit is stopped 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the 0 decimal point position setting will be treated as setting 1 When using self tuning turn ON the power for the EJ1 and the power for the load e g a heater simultaneously or turn ON the power for the load first If the power is turned ON for the EJ1 before turning ON the power for the load self tuning will not be performed properly and optimum contr
201. c nee 176 6 4 2 Write to Variable Area 0 0 0 ooo 177 6 4 3 Composite Read from Variable Area oooooooooo 178 6 4 4 Composite Write to Variable Area oooooooooooo 179 6 4 5 Composite Registration Read o ooooooooooooooooooo 180 6 4 6 Composite Read Registrati0N o o ooooooooooooooooooo 181 6 4 7 Composite Read Registration Confirmation 182 6 4 8 Controller Attribute Read 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 ene 183 6 4 9 Controller Status Read 0 nee 184 6 4 10 Bohoback Testo corria adds 185 6 4 11 Operation Commands cositas 186 169 Communications Settings Section 6 1 6 1 Communications Settings Communications are programmed on the host computer Descriptions of com munications in this manual are therefore written from the viewpoint of the host computer For example references to reading and writing mean reading data from the EJ1 to the host computer and writing data from the host computer to the EJ1 The EJ1 uses different communications specifications from existing products to improve communications operability Parameter Validity The conditions for parameter validity that depended on the model and setting status no longer apply Fixed Values for For example the setting range for the target value is fixed to 1 999 to 9 999 Setting Ranges regardless of the input type In other words the setting ranges under the new specifications will not change based on the
202. can be read H 10 Multiple Write to Vari Writes to a variable area able Area Multiple variables that are consecutive can be written Broadcasting is possible Single Write to Variable Writes to a variable area or an opera Area tion command Broadcasting is possible 08 H 08 Echoback Test Performs an echoback test 196 Variable Areas Section 7 4 7 4 Variable Areas The areas used for data exchange when communicating with the EJ1 are called the variable areas Present values can be read and set values can be read and written using the variable areas Operation commands do not use the variable areas Operation commands and Microprocessor responses Variable area Read write Personal computer 7 4 1 Addresses Refer to Parameter List on page 235 for parameter addresses Parameters with the following variable types can be used with the Modbus protocol C4 84 C5 85 and DO 90 to D6 96 7 4 2 Number of Elements The number of elements is expressed in 2 byte hexadecimal format The range for specifying the number of elements differs for each command Refer to 7 5 Detailed Description of Services 7 4 3 Communications Data Setting monitor value Communications data Negative values Decimal point See note Hexadecimal 2 bytes 2 s complement The decimal point is removed and the result is converted to hexadecimal Example 105
203. cations baud rate ia or swe 7 115 2 kbps Port B communications data length 0 7 7 bit Communications 1 8 bit Port B communications stop bits O 1 2 bit Communications 1 2 bit Port B communications parity 0 None 1 Even bit Communications 1 Even 2 Odd a Port B send data wait time O to 99 m 5 ms Communications Note Always set the port B communications protocol to CompoWay F 0 When using NAH always keep pin 3 on SW2 turned OFF 6 1 2 Unit Number Setting The unit number is set first The setting is made on SW1 and SW2 on the front of the EJ1 For information on the setting method refer to 1 1 4 Using Setting Switches 6 1 3 Other Communications Settings The communications baud rate communications data length communica tions stop bits communications parity and send data wait time are set using communications When using NAH the baud rate can be set on SW2 Refer to 6 4 2 Write to Variable Area for the setting procedure Use communications with the default communications settings to change any of these settings Refer to 6 4 2 Write to Variable Area for information on how to change set tings When the above settings are changed the changes will not be enabled until the EJ1 is reset or the power is cycled 6 1 4 Send Data Wait Time The send data wait time setting is used to adjust the time the host computer takes to switch from sending to receiving Specifically the send data wait t
204. circuits of the EJ1 2 Connect the computer s USB port to the port A connector on the EJ1 using the Cable Note A driver must be installed to use the Cable For details on installation methods refer to the users manual for the E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable 3 Connect the CX Thermo Support Software to set the communications pro tocol Select Communications Settings and set the following communications parameters Serial port COM See note 1 E58 CIFQ1 Serial Port 38400 Parity See note 2 Stop bits o Note 1 The serial port COM port number depends on the computer s settings 2 Verify the unit number which is set with switches SW1 and SW2 on the EJ1 s front panel 35 Minimum Configuration for Control Section 3 1 4 The following table shows the related parameter settings for this example CX Thermo Basic Mode Setting Example Set eat Remarks EJ1N TC2A QNHB 0 Control in progress parameters Bank 0 Set Point CH1 Bank Alarm Value 1 OH1 OCT Bank O Alarm Value 2 0H1 o AO Adjustment settings Control stopped parameters Input settings input Type CH7 sheme Output settings Control Period 1 OUT1 control period 2 s Alarm settings Alarm 1 Type CH1 2 Upper limit alarm Alarm 2 Type CH1 2 Upper limit alarm AA PA CIO Operation commands AT Cancel CH1 36 Minimum Configuration for Control Section 3 1 3 1 4 Adjustment Special Remarks Execute autotuning
205. d 1 Enabled Conditions for use The alarm type must not be set to 0 Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 88 Setting Alarm Specifications Section 4 4 4 4 6 Closed in Alarm or Open in Alarm When Close in Alarm is set the alarm output function s status will be output as is When Open in Alarm is set the alarm output function s status will be reversed before being output pd Alarm Output Function Alarm Output Close in Alarm Open in Alarm The alarm output will be OFF open when the power is interrupted and for about 3 seconds after the power is turned ON regardless of the Close in Alarm Open in Alarm setting Variable type Setting range Default E3 A3 Alarm 1 to 3 Open in Alarm 0 Closed Channel 1 Open Conditions for use An alarm must be assigned to the control output Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 4 4 7 Alarm Delay Delays can be set for the alarm outputs ON and OFF delays can be set for each alarm and also reflected in the Chan nel Alarm Status The alarm s ON delay will also operate when the power is turned ON or a software reset is performed Variable type Setting range Default Alarm 1to3 ON Delay O to 999 Seconds Channel Alarm 1 to 3 OFF Delay O to 999 Seconds 0 Channel Conditions for use The alarm type must not be set to O Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped Operation
206. d are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty lt may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this document has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions Vii Safety Precautions E Definition of Precautionary Information The following notation is used in this manual to provide precautions required to ensure safe usage of the product The safety precautions that are provided are extremely important to safety Always read and heed the information provided in all safety precautions The following notation is used Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not VANE o7 NUR ETO N avoided is likely to result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage E Symbols General Caution Indicates non specific general cautions warnings and dangers Caution Electrical Shock Caution AN Indicates possibility of electric shock under specific conditions ais General Prohibition Prohibition de pee Indicates non s
207. de to change the SP during autotuning In the above cases the Response Bits will be set to the following error values sits O o oprao Eorva Read Response Seting Change Operation Com Single Operation Commands 8001 ile Response ulti Operation Commands 8002 Single bit specification operation command 8003 Multi bit specification operation command If an error value is set for Response Bits check the following items e Setting range e Unit number e Whether or not the value being changed can be changed Use the following procedure to clear error values 1 2 3 1 Set the Response Bits to 0000 stop operation for the Request Bits for which the error value was set 2 Check the communications unit number and setting range be sure that the present value can be changed and correct the error 3 Set the Request Bits again Errors in If noise or other cause results in a communications error with the PLC the Communications with EJ1 will stop programless communications and set the Operation Command PLCs Response Bits to EEEE With version AE however communications will be stopped only when the Selection of Programless Communications Opera tion during Error parameter is set to 1 Stop E Method for Canceling Communications Errors 1 2 3 1 Set the Operation Command Request Bits to FFFF 2 The Operation Command Response Bits will be set to FFFF and the pro gramless communications will return to the initial status
208. decimal number Numbers or letters enclosed in quotation marks for example 00 are ASCII characters Modbus is a communications control method that conforms to the RTU Mode of the Modbus protocol specifications PI MBUS 300 Rev J of Modicon Inc Refer to the OMRON specifications for detailed specifications of the Modbus protocol 7 2 1 Command Frames Example of CRC 16 Calculation 194 1 2 3 In RTU Mode each frame begins and ends with a silent time interval that is at least 3 5 characters long Slave Function address code Data CRC 16 CRC 16 calculation range Silent interval at least 3 5 characters long Slave address Specify the unit number of the EJ1 between H 00 and H 3F 0 to 63 When broadcasting to all nodes specify H 00 Responses are not returned for broadcasts Function code The function code specifies the command from the host computer The code is set in hexadecimal and is 1 byte long For more infor mation refer to 7 3 Function Codes The text of command based on the function code Specifies vari able addresses and the values for set values in hexadecimal CRC 16 Cyclical Redundancy Check These two bytes store check code calculated from the slave address to the end of the data in hexadecimal Silent interval at least 3 5 characters long A message is processed 1 byte at a time in a 16 bit processing register called the CRC register 1 An initial value of H FFFF is set in the CRC
209. do dias bowed bdo aaa ae e dise ened 192 A A O O O 194 JS Funcion C odes avion in do ei tee a ate Rare oe 196 TE Nanable Areas scant so ened ee Se ee rs ne Bebe ee ee 197 1 3 Detaled Description of Services ax sh26th eus he hws thous Gee das 198 SECTION 8 Errors and Error ProcessiNg oooooooooooo 205 sel chines to Check First adas ne I in A eee 206 8 2 Determining Errors from Indicators o ooooooooooooo eee teens 207 8 3 Determining the Error from the Status 0 0 0 0 0 cece nes 209 8 4 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors 214 8 5 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Temperature Measurement Errors 223 8 6 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Temperature Control Errors 224 8 7 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Output Errors 226 8 8 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Heater Burnout Alarm Errors 221 APDCHOIX rara UU INE 2 aio 2 lo Revision HIStory o 0cioiicic ca 281 XXil About this Manual This manual describes the EJ1 Modular Temperature Controllers and includes the sections described below Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to set up or operate an EJ1 Modular Temperature Controller e Overview Section 1 Outline describes the features nomenclature and functions of the EJ1 e Se
210. dress The unit number that was specified in the command frame is returned here This is the unit number of the responding EJ1 Function code The function code that was received is returned here In an error response frame H 80 is added to the value to indicate that this is an error response Example Received function code H 03 Function code in error response frame H 83 Error code An end code that indicates the error CRC 16 Cyclical Redundancy Check These two bytes are a check code calculated from the slave address through the end of the data in hexadecimal No Response In the following cases the received command is not processed and a response is not returned A timeout will occur at the host device e The slave address in the received command is different from the commu nications unit number set in the EJ1 e A parity error framing error or overrun error occurred due to a transfer error or other error e A CRC 16 code error occurred in the received command frame e A time interval greater that 3 5 characters occurred between data while receiving a command frame In the following case the command is processed but a response is not returned e Broadcast transmission Slave address H 00 195 Function Codes Section 7 3 7 3 Function Codes Function code Name Deseripton 03 H 03 Multiple Read from Vari Reads from a variable area Multiple able Area variables that are consecutive
211. ds 233 BANK Derivative Time Cooling 0 0 to 999 9 Seconds 40 0 BANK Conditions for use The control method must be set to heating cooling control and 2 PID control Note 1 Refer to 4 7 1 Bank Function for details on banks 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the 0 decimal point position setting will be treated as setting 1 Air cooling water Provides control for applications that have non linear cooling cooling characteristics e g plastic molding machines Provides good adaptability and stable response Provides control for applications that have linear cooling char acteristics 70 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 Water Air cooling cooling mb o Cooling capacity O O MV cooling 100 Note When using a relay for cooling output the minimum output ON OFF width can be used to prevent relay degradation For details on this setting refer to page 58 4 3 4 Setting the Set Point These parameters set the set point Variable type Setting range Default D0 90 Set point BANK 1999 to 9999 EU 0 Note The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection Refer to 4 7 1 Bank Function for details on banks Set the set point so that it is within the input range as well as the set point lim iter range If the set point is out of range the internal set point actually used for control will be limit
212. e Always connect the HFU on the left side of the TC4 TC2 Units Incorrect EJiLI TC4 EJ1L1 HFU or EJiLI TC2 Correct EJ10 HFU EJ1L TC4 or EJiLI TC2 SECTION 3 Typical Control Examples This section describes the basic applications of the EJ1 using specific control examples 3 1 Minimum Configuration for Control o o o oooooooomomom o o 34 Sele Application 34 E2 WIN eee Sai eh ow ioe Pees acca eat as ee es 35 ee SeU O 35 Seled sACIUSUMENE 2 25 ep teoct tech ala Shes See 37 3 2 Multi channel Control iii ect 2s vee eee hed a ad 38 Se22l ADPNCAUON ai a 38 Bee WANN i ke oe Otte oe BE eos Rasa eae a ee eel 39 22 3 DCMUP Teor at Ova etude kas ooh Eee eh eed ee eae Sz 39 Jd A A E 40 3 3 Control Linked to a Host Device 2 0 0 0 ce eens 41 Sel APplcdtlONa rata bo aca sehen bo ace asias 41 Io IWIN ses tes ida Cio be aiid wean eee owes 42 Pa A eh he eh SY 43 SrA Adusi ey ts Be ae ne Dis Ga eee a Olt ta a 44 3 4 Controlling G3ZA Controllers Connected to Output Devices 45 del ADPNCAION sidad a dal aa dl adds 45 PA Wie epia aee TEE AEE NE 47 SAS Da ee hae aan ed aun Ae a eee eee 48 S424 Adjustment oc oes at ee ba ee eo tk a ee beeen eet doce stn geet 48 33 Minimum Configuration for Control Section 3 1 3 1 Minimum Configurati
213. e Basic Unit has addresses allocated in its variable area for use with the G3ZA The G3ZA set values can be read and written by reading and writing that variable area Refer to Parameter List on page 235 for details on the vari able area for the G3ZA Refer to the G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller User s Manual Cat No Z200 for details on the corresponding functions and settings m Example In this example G3ZA settings are changed Unit No 1 Host device Send the following command from the host device to TC4 when setting the Channel 2 Heater Burnout Detection Value to 10 A in the G3ZA with unit number 1 STX 0100001029A0219000001000A ETX BCC Unit No O Unit No 1 The G3ZA s unit number and model determine which MVs are sent from the EJ1 to the G3ZA The EJ1 uses the G3ZA s unit number to determine whether to send heating outputs or cooling outputs Other Functions TC4 and TC2 G3ZA Models with 8 Channels MVs Output from the G3ZA TC4 CH1 Control Output Heating CH2 Control Output Heating e G3ZA Units with unit numbers 0 to 7 G3ZA Channel 1 MV CH3 Control Output Heating Channel 2 MV Caution CH4 Control Output Heating Channel 3 MV Channel 4 MV Section 4 7 e G3ZA Units with unit numbers 8 to 15 TC4 G3ZA CH1 Control Output Cooling Channel 1 MV CH2 Control Output Cooling Channel 2 MV CH3
214. e SCU RS 485 port to the SCB SCU Board SCB Unit SCU RS EJ1 RS 485 port 232C port is connected to the AS 485 EJ A Porn Alternatively connect the RS 422A or Converter to the RS 232C port to convert to RS 485 then connect to PC the EJ1 RS 485 port PLC The EJ1 programless commu Refer to 5 1 Programless Communi CS CJ nications parameters are cations in SECTION 5 Advanced Unit SCB SCU incorrect HFU Functions and check the set tings CJ1W CIF11 RS 422A Converter The Serial Communications Same as above RS 485 EJ Board SCB Unit SCU com munications settings are incorrect Connection port Connection port suoj EJ1 Port C HFU RS 485 221 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors Section 8 4 G3ZA or G3PW v1 1 222 Note Use the following table when the EJ1 cannot communicate with an G3ZA con nected to it ss Status Possible cause Countermeasure Communications are Power is not supplied to the Supply power to the G3ZA not possible between G3ZA from the power supply termi the G3ZA and EJ1 nals and reset the EJ1 the COMS indicator The G3ZA is not connected to Connect the G3ZA to the EJ1 does not flash using an EJ1C CBLA050 Connecting Cable Pin 7 on SW2 on the EJ1 is Turn ON pin 7 on SW2 on the not ON EJ1 Power was not supplied to the Supply power to the G3ZA G3ZA when the EJ1 was and EJ1 at the same time or
215. e or delay by Omron in exercising any right and no course of dealing between Buyer and Omron shall operate as a waiver of rights by Omron b Assignment Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder without Omron s written consent c Law These Terms are governed by the law of the jurisdiction of the home office of the Omron company from which Buyer is purchasing the Products without regard to conflict of law princi ples d Amendment These Terms constitute the entire agreement between Buyer and Omron relating to the Products and no provision may be changed or waived unless in writing signed by the parties e Severability If any provi sion hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid such provision shall not invalidate any other provision f Setoff Buyer shall have no right to set off any amounts against the amount owing in respect of this invoice g Definitions As used herein including means including without limitation and Omron Compa nies or similar words mean Omron Corporation and any direct or indirect subsidiary or affiliate thereof Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use 1 Suitability of Use Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the Product in the Buyer s application or use of the Product At Buyer s request Omron will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
216. e type Setting range Default C4 84 Channel Alarm Status Refer to Channel Alarm Channel Status on page 265 Conditions for use The alarm type must not be set to 0 90 Detecting Current Errors Section 4 5 4 5 Detecting Current Errors 4 5 1 CT Assignment TC2 This parameter specifies which output s current is being measured Three phase heater burnout detection can also be performed by assigning two CTs to one output variable ype _Farameternane Betigrengo Detaul CT1 en I O O Disabled a A Control output 1 2 Control output 2 3 Control output 3 4 Control output 4 CT2 Assignment Conditions for use There must be a CT input Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped m Examples Example 1 Heater burnout detection is performed on each channel s control output heating Associated by the Control Associated by the Output 1 Assignment CT1 Assignment Channel 1 Control Output Heating CT1 Assignment 1 OUT1 Channel 2 Control Output Heating CT2 Assignment 2 OUT2 Associated by the Control Associated by the Output 2 Assignment CT2 Assignment Example 2 Three phase heater burnout detection is performed on channel 1 s control output heating Channel 1 Control Output Heating CT1 Assignment 1 OUT1 CT2 Assignment 1 OUT1 4 5 2 Heater Burnout Alarm HB Alarm
217. ea 199 MV at PV Error 84 Index MV at PV error 77 MV at Stop 77 MV limiter 77 N names of parts on front panel 2 no response 195 NT Link 134 O OC Heater overcurrent xix ON OFF control 65 one point shift 54 open in alarm 89 operation after power ON 64 operation at startup 73 operation command 146 multi operation command 147 single operation command 146 stop operation 149 operation command codes 150 operation command codes for programless communications 152 operation commands CompoWay F 186 operation indicators 3 operation stopped 140 output ON scheduling function 59 output scaling 61 Output Status TC4 TC2 264 Control Output 1 264 Control Output 2 264 Control Output 3 264 Control Output 4 264 output type 21 overlap band 69 P P proportional band 67 parameter list 235 100 AT Execute Cancel 187 40 AT Execute Cancel 187 Alarm 1 to 3 Hysteresis 87 Alarm 1 to 3 Latch 88 Alarm 1 to 3 OFF Delay 89 Alarm 1 to 3 ON Delay 89 Alarm 1 to 3 Open in Alarm 89 Alarm 1 to 3 SP Selection 90 Alarm 1 to Alarm 3 186 Alarm 1 to Alarm 3 Latch Cancel 150 Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 to 3 87 Alarm Upper Limit Value 1 to 3 87 Alarm Value 1 to 3 87 All Alarm Latch Cancel 150 186 Alpha 68 AT Calculated Gain 78 AT Cancel 150 186 AT Execute 150 186 AT Hysteresis 78 Auto 150 Auto manual Switch 187 Automatic 186 Auxiliary Output 1
218. ection AAA ee NUM i Value G3ZA1 CH3 Heater Burnout Detection Value H 00000000 to H 00000032 Oto50 Jo JA NUM e G3ZA1 CT3 Heater Burnout Detection PA eee NUM A Value G3ZA1 CH4 Heater Burnout Detection Value H 00000000 to H 00000032 Oto50 0 Ja NUM e G3ZA1 CT4 Heater Burnout Detection cio cess e e NUM e Value G3ZA1 CH1 SSR Short Circuit Detection Value NUM e G3ZA1 CT1 SSR Short Circuit Detection NUM e at Value G3ZA1 CH2 SSR Short Circuit Detection Value NUM j G3ZA1 CT2 SSR Short Circuit Detection NUM E Value G3ZA1 CH3 SSR Short Circuit Detection Value NUM j G3ZA1 CT3 SSR Short Circuit Detection NUM 9 Value G3ZA1 CH4 SSR Short Circuit Detection Value NUM G3ZA1 CT4 SSR Short Circuit Detection NUM PTE Value G3ZA1 CH1 Heater Overcurrent Detection Value NUM e G3ZA1 CT1 Heater Overcurrent Detec NUM Ai tion Value G3ZA1 CH2 Heater Overcurrent Detection Value NUM e G3ZA1 CT2 Heater Overcurrent Detec NUM i tion Value G3ZA1 CH3 Heater Overcurrent Detection Value NUM e j G3ZA1 CT3 Heater Overcurrent Detec NUM A tion Value dl G3ZA1 CH4 Heater Overcurrent Detection Value NUM e ee ee ee 244 Parameter List Vari CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range ae Category Add Address type ress DA 0140 F040 G3ZA1 CH1 Control Variable Monitor H 00000000 H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 NUM 9A 0141 F041 G3ZA1
219. ed to a value within the input range and set point limiter range E Set Point Limiter These parameters apply a limit to the set point s setting range so that the con trol subject does not reach an abnormal temperature Variable type Setting range Default D5 95 SP Upper Limit Channel 1999 to 9999 EU 9999 SP Lower Limit Channel 1999 to 9999 EU 1999 Conditions for use No special conditions Note The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection Set the SP Upper and Lower Limits within the input range and also set the SP Upper Limit gt SP Lower Limit Ifthe SP Lower Limit gt SP Upper Limit the larger value will function as the SP Upper Limit In addition if the limit range is set outside of the input range it will be limited to the input range The SP will not be changed automatically even if the input type or SP Limiter is changed Although the SP will not be changed automatically the internal SP used for control will be limited to the input range or SP Limiter whichever range is narrower 71 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 WE SP Limiter range Y Internal SP When the input type is changed the input range is narrowed Input range SP Limiter range Internal SP Note The SP is not changed but the internal SP used for control is lim ited by the upper limit of the input range m SP Setting Example The internal SP which is actually used for control is li
220. edure The input terminals for a thermocouple input are shorted lsConnectathermocouplee ss a lsConnectathermocouplee ss The thermometer was changed or the switch settings e Cycle the power changed while power was ON Easy Method for Checking Thermometers Platinum resistance thermometers 1 Connect a 100 Q resistor between thermometer input terminals A and B and short B and B 2 The EJ1 is working if the measured temperature is 0 0 C or 32 0 F Thermocouples 1 Short the thermometer input terminals 2 The EJ1 is working normally if the temperature in the vicinity of the ter minal block is measured 223 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Temperature Control Errors Section 8 6 8 6 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Temperature Control Errors Temperature Is Not Rising Ale e O Cotes The connection terminal screws are loose and the connec Tighten the screws securely tion is imperfect The heater power is not turned ON e Turn ON the heater power Heater is burnt out or deteriorated e Replace with a better quality heater The heater s heating capacity is insufficient e Replace with a heater with a bigger heating capacity e f more than one heater is used check for burnt out heaters and replace if necessary An overheating protection device is operating e Set the set value for the overheating protection device to higher than the EJ1 set value Setting The normal and rev
221. een bit O and bit 13 is ON in the Device A Status It can be used to output EJ1 error status Refer to Status Lists on page 256 for details on Device A Status Event inputs 1 to 4 Outputs the ON OFF status of event input 1 to event input 4 Bus inputs 1 to 3 Outputs the status of bus input 1 to bus input 3 Variable type Setting range Default F2 B2 Bus Output 1 to Bus Output 3 Assign 0 to 22 ment Common Conditions for use No special conditions This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes effective the next time a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power is turned ON Refer to Parameter List on page 235 for details on the settings 167 Other HFU Functions Section 5 3 e Temperature Controller Error The Temperature Controller Error output will turn ON when any bit between bit O and bit 13 is ON in the Device A Status It can be used to output EJ1 error status Refer Status Lists on page 256 for details on Device A Status m Example Example 1 Switch all channels between Run and Stop according to the ON OFF status of the event input Outputs the ON OFF status of the event input Switches between Run Stop based on the bus ON OFF status aul A Model Parameter name eer valle Bus Output 3 Assignment Event input 1 Bus Input 3 Assignment All channels Run 0 Stop 1 Bu
222. elements x 8 or 4 o Variable Read data type 2 No of elements x 8 or 4 1 Response Codes Response code Error name Cause 1001 Command too long The command is too long 110B Response too long The number of elements exceeds the maximum 7011 Operation error 7011 The command cannot be executed due to a device error 0000 Normal completion Processing was completed normally 2 Variable Type Refer to Parameter List on page 235 3 No of Read Data Items Read data length No of read data items For double word 8 digit variable type 20 max 0014H For word 4 digit variable type 180 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 6 Composite Read Registration This service specifies the addresses to be read when using the composite read registration from variable area service The registered data is saved in EEPROM E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC Variable Read address Bit Variable Read address Bit type position type position O 1 1 1 0 0 010 2 2 2 4 2 2 4 2 E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response code 011 1111 2 2 4 1 Variable Type and Read Address Refer to Parameter List on page 235 Composite reads writes cannot be registered for the DA 9A variable types 2 Bit Position The EJ1 does not support bit access Fixed to 00 3 No of Registered Data Items Variable Type Read Address Bit Posi tion Registered data length No of registered data item
223. emomrr fe S ooo Orta Control Variable Monitor n fe S SyS CHS Control Variable Monitor te S ooo OH Control Variable Mentor a te S S ooo OH7 Control Variable Monitor a fe e S SyS CHE Control Variable Monitor fe e S ooo CET E CA 0 CN ET ON COTO TT fm OCOC SOOCOCS o ratas a te oS CT CN E SS CO 200 CN ESAS oo CAT TAN CONAN ESOS E CO CN E S S CHT Heater ON Our Montar te e SSS ooo S S OH Heater ON Current Monitor fe e S SyS CHS Heater ON Current Manera fe eo SSS Soo oS CH Heater ON GurentMontor a fe eo SSS ooo o S HT Heater OFF Current Montar fe dm S ooo CHE Heater OFF Current Monitor a fe S S SoS CHS HeaterOFF Current Montar ma S S oo S oH Heater OFF Cunen hmp p gt oo A CU CO ES Other See Not used te 4 Error status 1 For address adjustment only Monitoring only Monitoring only Only for operation com mands Error status 2 RUN STOP TC2 No 00 to 07 RUN STOP TC2 No 08 to 15 Only for operation com mands Only for operation com mands RUN STOP TC2 No 16 to 23 RUN STOP TC2 No 24 to 31 Only for operation com mands AT Execute Cancel TC2 No 00 to 07 Only for operation com mands 270 Parameters That Can Be Allocated for Programless Communications Appendix Others See note 4 Note AT Execute Cancel TC2 No 08 to 15 Only for operation com mands AT Execute Cancel TC2 No 16 to 23 Only for operation com m
224. ent be cause 16 would exceed the maximum number of side by side connections e RS 422 EJ1 MELSEC Q QnA QnAS series PLC HFU TC EDU oOo El eli ets ch1 5 3 Sel ae Ko y o iz KD i saol ode S Ea SG ZA Cpe OBS RS 422 Unit Unit No 0 No 1 EJ HFU TC EDU E al 98 a F ae ES E 155 E ES ED ade ode Ake 6ke a Unit Unit No 7 No 0 Note Set the unit number of the Basic Unit to any number that was not set for the HFU 161 Connecting More Than One HFU Section 5 2 MELSEC Q QnA QnAS series PLC EJ1N HFULI NFL2 RS 422 a mis Shield 62 ey SDA AAN A2 SDB 63 a ag ee ES EJ1N HFULI NFL2 ASPE Y S AS D 66 a D A RDB da SB a amp ISELE AS 459 amp Ad de Ad ES AS Es RDB AS 7 87 a SOB RDA G 488 RS 422 L 69 CNE f AS 2 Make the PLC settings Refer to Make the PLC settings on page 125 3 Make the EJ1 settings Make the following setting in all HFUs that are connected Variable type Setting Monitor values Port C Send Wait Time Programless Communications Protocol 5 MC protocol format 5 Programless Communications Maximum Set the unit number to Unit Number See note one less than the number
225. er ON Current Monitor ITAN F1 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to 165 o ax num fo gt GZAT CH2 Heater ON Current Monitor H 00000000 to H 00000037 01055 o a nm e G3ZA1 CT2 Heater ON Current Monitor ITAM H 00000000 to H 000000A5 O10 165 o ax nom e G3ZA1 CH3 Heater ON Current Monitor H 00000000 to F 00000037 010 55 o a Num fe f _ G3ZA1 CT3 Heater ON Current Monitor ITAN H 00000000 to H 00000045 0 to 165 0 a num fe _ G3ZA1 CH4 Heater ON Current Monitor H 00000000 to H 00000037 010 55 o a Num fe f _ Eine a a G3ZA1 CH1 Heater OFF Current Monitor terre PLA G3ZA1 CT1 Heater OFF Current EA H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to A Monitor 0115 E015 G3ZA1 CH2 Heater OFF Current Monitor H 00000000 to H 00000037 0 to 55 CO CO ee G3ZA1 CT2 Heater OFF Current EA H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to 165 A Monitor 0116 E016 G3ZA1 CH3 Heater OFF Current Monitor H 00000000 to H 00000037 0 to 55 es EC E G3ZA1 CT3 Heater OFF Current EA H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to 165 A Monitor 0117 E017 G3ZA1 CH4 Heater OFF Current Monitor H 00000000 to H 00000037 0 to 55 e AM fe G3ZA1 CT4 Heater OFF Current H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to 165 A Monitor Not used 0200 E100 G3ZA2 CH1 Control Variable Monitor The rest are the same as the G3ZA1 0300 E200 G3ZA3 CH1 Control Variable Monitor 0400 E300 G3ZA4 CH1 Control Variable Monitor AN NN AA ANN Pee We SS A NN A T
226. erse operation settings are incorrect e Make the correct settings The PID constant is unsuitable e Execute AT or ST with to make the PID adjustments e Set a suitable PID constant RUN STOP is set to STOP e Set to RUN Operation After Power ON is set to STOP status e Set RUN STOP to RUN e To change to RUN the next time the power is turned ON set Operation After Power ON to Continue and turn OFF the power while in RUN mode The MV limiter is preventing the MV from increasing e Change the MV limiter to a suitable value A cooling fan is operating e Stop the cooling fan The Measured Temperature Increases Above the Control Temperature O Possiecause OO Comtermeasare OOO O O Connection Measured temperature is wrong e Perform the action outlined in 7 5 The load is connected to the incorrect channel so the e Rewire correctly heater is being controlled using control output from another channel The contacts for the relay driven by control outputs are e Replace with a higher quality relay welded together The SSR has short circuited e Replace with a better quality SSR Leakage current from the SSR is flowing to the heater e Connect breeder resistance to prevent the action of leakage current Settings The normal and reverse operation settings are incorrect e Make the correct settings The PID constant is unsuitable e Execute AT or ST with to make the PID adjustments e Set a suitable PID constant The MV
227. es This may reduce the communications time Review these settings based on system requirements Note The above measures may result in an inability to communicate It is recom mended that a record is kept of the set values when communications are suc cessful to ensure recovery is possible 149 Programless Communications Section 5 1 5 1 5 Operation Command Codes for Programless Communications e Write mode e Auto e All Alarm Latch Cancel The following parameters are executed using operation commands e Software Reset e Run e Stop e Manual e AT Execute e AT Cancel e Bank 0 Change to Alarm 1 to Alarm 3 Bank 3 Change Latch Cancel e Save RAM Data Register Unit Con figuration Command codes for programless communications operation commands differ from command codes in CompoWay F communications because the data length is limited to 16 bits Operation command codes for programless communications can be checked using the Programless Communications Utility for EJ1 in the CX Thermo Sup port Software x E Programless Communications Utility for EJ1 a e EF i Hide Back Print Options Calculation of operation command code E 3 Programless Communications Utility for E Y Calculation of operation command c 3J Analysis of operation command codi Operation command for each channel Unit No Channel All units gt All channels gt Calculate operation
228. es to monitor or change e Monitor The parameters to be monitored are set under Programless Upload Set tings The HFU collects monitor values based on these settings for the Units con nected to the HFU and transfers the values to PLC memory Reserved Communications Status a 0004 Parameter A to be monitored ag 0005 Parameter B to be monitored O2 a 1 The limit is 600 parameters for version MARI The limit is 1200 parameters for version NAW 2 The final address is 025B for version NAM The final address is 04B3 for version NA e Changing Settings The parameters to be changed are set under the Programless Download Settings The HFU reads the values in a PLC memory area according to these set tings and then refreshes the settings for Units connected to the HFU 300 0002 Reserved Operation Command Request Bits 0003 Reserved Operation Command Code 0004 Parameter A to be changed 0005 Parameter B to be changed 012F See note 2 1 The limit is 600 parameters for version MARI The limit is 1200 parameters for version Na 2 The final address is 025B for version NAM The final address is 04B3 for version WE E Programless Upload Download Settings e Use the CX Thermo Support Software to make the settings 131 Programless Communications Section 5 1 e The following parameters can be set Up to 300 settings can be made for version V1 0 up to 600 s
229. et the Remote SP Enable parameter to Enable and select the remote SP with an event input or operation command 73 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 12 CH1 oe CH2 P Channel 3 Remote SP of channel 1 TC4 CH1 CH2 TC4 CH3 CH4 Channel 4 Remote SP of channel 2 Selected bank s Process value SP Process value If remote SP mode is enabled lt the process value operates as the remote SP input Local SP Remote SP d lt Switch with an event input or operation command SP Ramp y Control wm _ Internal SP y Manipulated variable Local SP Sets the selected bank s set point Remote SP Sets the process value of the channel specified as the remote SP input Internal SP This is the set point actually set for use in control Variable type Parameter name Setting monitoring range FO BO Remote SP Enable Common 0 Disabled See note 1 1 Enabled C4 84 Local SP Monitor Channel 1999 to 9999 EU See note 3 Remote SP Monitor 1999 to 9999 EU See note 2 Channel See note 3 Conditions for use No special conditions Note 1 When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes effec tive the next time a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power is turned ON 2 The remote SP function can be used for channel 1 or channel 2 for the TC4 bu
230. et to the channel 1 process value by the system D00005 D00005 Step 3 Channel 2 Process Value Step 3 Set to channel 2 process value by the system D01000 0002 Read Request Bits Step 1 Set from PLC user program D01001 0000 Setting Change Request Bits 122 1 2 3 E Changing EJ1 Set Values Use the following procedure to confirm that the channel 1 and channel 2 set points change 1 2 Set D01504 and D01505 in PLC memory to 0064 Set the Setting Change Request Bits D01501 to 0001 Programless Communications Section 5 1 3 Confirm that the Setting Change Response Bits D00001 have been set to 0001 4 Use the CX Thermo Support Software to confirm that the EJ1 channel 1 and channel 2 set points have changed to 100 To check operation again set D01501 to 0000 and once D00001 has changed to 0000 repeat the procedure from step 1 DM Area Value Meaning Procedure step number and confirmation item 00000 0000 Read Response Bits o D00001 0001 Setting Change Response Bits Step 3 Set to 0001 by the system 901500 0000 Read Request Bits C D01501 0001 Setting Change Request Bits Step 2 Set from PLC user program 001502 0000 Operation Command Request Bits O Z O OZO SSS OO D01503 10000 _ Operation Command Code SN D01504 0064 Channel 1 Set Point Step 1 Set from PLC user program D01505 0064 Channel 2 Set Point Step 1 Set from PLC user program E If Not Operating Correctly
231. eted 2 The EJ1 clears the Read Response Bits PLC Upload Area de Download Area Setting Change Setting Change mi Operation Command Operation Command 1 The Read Request Bits A Response Bits is Request Bits are cleared by the PLC is Communications n43 Operation y Status Command Code I i I I I I I E Monitor Values If the monitor value has a decimal point keep the decimal point in mind when handling the monitor value Example monitor value O3E8H or 1000 100 0 The set value in the EJ1 will not change even if the monitor value is changed 143 Programless Communications Section 5 1 E Checking Programless Communications Operation from the PLC Setting Changes PLC Upload Area ie Address m 0 Bits m 0001 1 I I I Status 144 Value Read Response Operation Command Response Bits Communications Monitor Value Upload Area i HESPONSS Read Request Bits PA mido Operatio n 2 Operation Command Response E Request Bits Communicat Operation Monitor value Y nea yyyy i l The EJ1 clears the Setting Change Response Bits 6 To confirm that programless communications are working from the PLC con firm that reserved bit 15 of the Communications Status under the Programless Upload Settings is changing Bit 15 repeatedly turns ON OFF during commu nications Bit 15 alternates between ON and OFF changing at each program less co
232. ettings operation and monitoring can be performed from a Programmable Terminal without creating a commu nications program by using Smart Active Parts SAP Multi channel Control Section 3 2 3 2 2 Wiring Connect the Temperature Sensor to the input terminals according to the sen sor s input type Connect the Solid State Relays for zones 1 2 3 and 4 to output terminals OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 and OUT4 respectively When an EJ1L1 TC4 is used wire the circuits as shown below EJ1L1 T1C4 OUT4 OUT3 Heater plate 3 2 3 Setup The settings are made through communications The CX Thermo Support Software can be connected using an E58 CIFQ1 Connecting Cable to set the parameters from a personal computer The following table shows the related parameter settings for this example OUT2 Control Output 2 Assignment Variable type E1 Address 0200 004F Channel 2 MV heating 008F Channel 4 MV heating CH1 Direct Reverse Operation Variable type E5 Address 0100 0000 Reverse default 0000 2 PID default CH1 Output Mode Selection Variable type E5 Address 0107 39 Multi channel Control Section 3 2 Related parameters CHS Set Point Variable type D4 Address 0300 047E 115 0 C CH4 Set Point Variable type D4 Address 0400 047E 115 0 C CH1 Control Period
233. ettings can be made for version NAK and up to 1 200 settings can be made for version PAA TC2 4 Programless upload Variable types C4 84 C5 85 D4 94 Th D6 96 and settings C9 89 however G3ZA1 to G3ZA4 Programless download Variable types D4 94 D5 95 and a settings Note HFU parameters other than those listed in the following table cannot be used when making programless upload download settings If parameters that do not appear in the table are used internal communication errors will occur and programless communications will be delayed Programless upload Error status Refer to the Error Status section on page settings 133 Programless download Bit specified operation commands Refer to page 154 settings for details e Parameters can be set to Not used to reserve words for future use Note The words set to Not used cannot be used for any other purpose except the programless function e Only channels 1 and 2 can be set for TC2 Units e Unit numbers can be between O and 31 but one HFU can manage only up to 16 Basic Units CX Thermo Programless Upload Settings Setting Screen Programless Communications Parameter Editor pe 18 x Protocol Baud Rate DataLength Stop Bits Parity Close Programless Upload Settings Programless Download Settings StattAddress Error Occurring Address Start Address Error Occuring Address ri Esporsv poa Esport CSV PLC Memory No UnitNo Channel Pstametername Ja Lo
234. f NS series PTs includ NS5 SQ0L1 B V1 V2 NS5 TQOL1 B V2 ing screen configurations object functions and NS5 MQOL1 B V2 NS8 TVL host communications for the PT NS10 TVOL1 B V1 2 NS12 TSOL1 B V1 V2 NS5 SQ1LJLI V2 NS5 TQ1LILI V2 NS5 MQ1L 11 V2 Programmable Terminals Programming Manual XVI IND S a NSJ Series Provides the following information about the NSJ NSJ5 TQULI B G5D series NSJ Controllers NSJ5 SQUI 1 B G5D Overview and features NSJ8 TVIL1 B G5D a NSJ10 TVOO B G5D Designing the system configuration NSJ12 TSLIL B G5D Installation and wiring NSJ5 TQUIL1 B M3D I O memory allocations NSJ5 SQU 1 B M3D Troubleshooting and maintenance NSJ8 TV LI B M3D Use this manual in combination with the following NSJ Series Operation Manual manuals SYSMAC CS Series Operation Manual W339 SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual W393 SYSMAC CS CJ Series Programming Manual W394 and NS V1 V2 Series Setup Manual V083 NSH Series Provides an outline of and describes the design NSH5 SQROOB V2 installation maintenance and other basic opera NSH5 SQG00B V2 tions for the NSH series NSH5 Hand held Pro Hand held Programmable Terminal Operation Manual grammable Terminal Information is also included on features system configuration wiring I O memory allocations and troubleshooting NS Series Describes how to display external video images or NS CA002 analog RGB imagines on NS series
235. ged Afterwards changes are made only to parameters for which values have been changed Operation 0000 Stop operation Stops operation after a series of operations has been completed Command 0001 Single Executes the operation command set in the Operation Command Code Request Bits 0002 Multi The first time the operation command set in the Operation Command Code is executed Afterwards the operation command is executed each time the Operation Command Code changes 0003 Single Executes the bit specification operation command a single time Bit specification 0004 Multi The first time all bit specification operation commands are executed Bit specification Afterwards operation commands for channels that have been changed are executed Note To change the Request Bits first set the Request Bits to 0000 then change the setting The same applies when periodically executing the same operation command Example Changing a Single Action to a Multi Action 1 2 3 1 For a single action the Response Bits are set to the single action value 0001 Note The Request Bits cannot be changed directly to 0002 because the setting will not be accepted 2 Change the Request Bits to 0000 then confirm that the Response Bits have been set to 0000 139 Programless Communications Section 5 1 3 Then change the Request Bits to the multi action setting of 0002 e Each set of Request Bits has a corresponding set of Response Bits Once
236. gnments Note Bus inputs cannot be used if a Basic Unit is used without an HFU Even if an HFU is used bus inputs cannot be used for Basic Units connected to the RS 485 communications lines using distributed positioning 166 Other HFU Functions Note Bus Output Assignment Settings Note Note Section 5 3 Set using bus output assignments Set using bus input assignments Set using bus output assignments Set using auxiliary output assignments SUB1 HFU TC2 TC4 EDU 1 BUS1 and BUS2 are connected to SUB1 and SUB2 on the EDU 2 HFU event inputs and auxiliary outputs can be linked 3 Information output to buses can be accessed by the outputting Unit The parameters that can be set for bus output assignments are outlined below Refer to the following examples when setting parameters Make correct bus settings for each Unit making sure the settings match oper ations in the EJ1 system E HFU Bus Output Assignments e The status of functions shown in the following diagram can be allocated to output them to bus outputs 1 to 3 Bus output 1 Bus output 2 Bus output 3 Sable Bus output 2 and bus output 3 can be set in the same way Disabled Temperature Controller Error Event inputs 1 to 4 Bus inputs 1 to 3 Temperature The Temperature Controller Error output will turn ON when any Controller error bit betw
237. gs of Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used in parameter names figures and in text explanations These abbreviations mean the following HFU EDU RSP LSP LBA Engineering unit See note Note EU stands for Engineering Unit EU is used as the minimum unit for engineering units such as C m and g The size of EU varies according to the input type For example when the input temperature setting range is 200 to 1300 C 1 EU is 1 C and when the input temperature setting range is 20 0 to 500 0 C 1 EU is 0 1 C For analog inputs the size of EU varies according to the decimal point position of the scaling set ting and 1 EU becomes the minimum scaling unit X X XX TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 OUD 12 O 1 Ir Names OEP aida it deso rociar dla ds 2 1 2 T O Configuration and Main Functions 0 0 0 ccc eee eee eens 5 123 Internal Block Did Grams z e ctas sd wie dee wees wae ete Bae 9 SECTION 2 PreparaviOns escasea AL DA A CATA OM A cece tr cocoa E ante se dere re nahi eee Cane enh eee ee 12 2e2 Wiring Termas arcada ans Mew hese se 16 2 3 sine Tool POs Vii ad ad doi lil 26 2 4 UnmeConnevraiomE Xx amples 200 IA AA RA dos 27 SECTION 3 Typical Control Examples cccceeceeeeee 33 3 1 Minimum Configuration for Control 0 0 00000 eee eee 34 322 Multischantel Controls 22200 nadia ra lapa cis ca laa ates pl ados eee 38 3 3 Control Linked to a Host Device 2
238. guration 18 Mount the product to a DIN Rail mounted vertically to the ground 19 Always turn OFF the power supply before wiring the product replacing the product or changing the product configuration 20 Attach the enclosed cover seal to the connector opening on the left end Unit during installation 21 Do not use port B on the End Unit when using port C on the HFU X Precautions for Correct Use O Installation 1 Do not connect an End Unit directly to an HFU 2 Always connect an End Unit to the right side of the Basic Units 3 Always connect the HFU to the left side of the Basic Units 4 The EJ1 cannot be used linked to a CJ series PLC 5 Use the EJ1G LIL for gradient temperature control Use the EJ1N LILI for any other type of temperature control 6 When removing the terminal block to replace the Unit be sure to confirm that the new Unit is the same as the Unit that is being replaced O Service Life 1 Use the product within the following temperature and humidity ranges Temperature 10 to 55 C with no icing or condensation Humidity 25 to 85 When the Temperature Controller is incorporated in a control panel make sure that the controller s ambient temperature and not the panel s ambient temperature does not exceed 55 C 2 The service life of electronic devices like the Temperature Controller is determined by the service life of internal electronic components Component service life is affected by the a
239. he MV set in the Manual MV parameter can be output Variable type Parameter name Setting range Default D5 95 Manual MV Channel 5 0 to 105 0 for standard control 105 0 to 105 0 for heating cooling control conditions for use K control method must be set to 2 PID control in manual mode Actual MV Actual MV 105 0 100 0 Standard 1000 k control or Manual MV 0 0 heating eee Cooling Manual MV 100 0 output 105 0 100 0 105 0 Use an event input or operation command to switch between auto mode standard control and manual mode When using an event input to switch modes set the Event Input Assignment parameter to Auto 0 Manual 1 After the event input is set it will operate as follows Event input OFF Ao Mode Manual Mods Note Refer to 6 4 11 Operation Commands for details on using an operation com mand to switch the mode Check the Channel Status parameter variable type C4 84 to confirm whether the Controller is in auto mode or manual mode Operation When The following diagram shows the operation when the mode is switched Switching between Auto between auto mode and manual mode and Manual Modes By Inherits the MV that existed before the mode change Time MV Power Power MV M changes OFF ON changes aie Power Auto interrupted 76 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 E MV at Stop This parameter sets the MV when control
240. he area in PLC memory that will be allocated to the parameters set with the Programless Upload Download Settings Set this parameter according to the Programless Communications Protocol e SYSMAC CS CJ Series PLCs Set value Applicable areas by CPU Unit CJ1H CPU67H CJ1H CPU66H CJ1H CPU65H CJ1G CPU44H CJ1M CJ1G CPU45H CPU43H CPU42H 0 erun DM Applicable Appicabie Appicable Applicable Applcable 1 EMO Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable IN 2 EMT Applicable Apolcable_ Appicabie S 3 EM2 Applicable Applicable Apploable 4 EMS Applicable Applicable E EMA applicable Applicable eo o e EMS Applicable Applicable e eooo z EMG Applicable Applicable eo o 5 ew apice E 9 EMB Applicable ff to EM9 Applicable e e e 11 EMA Applicable f 12 EMB Applicable fe 13 EMC Applicable ode Set value Applicable areas by CPU Unit CJ2H CJ2H CJ2H CPU68 EIP CPU66 EIP CPU65 EIP CPU67 EIP CPU64 EIP O default DM Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable 134 Programless Communications Section 5 1 Set value Applicable areas by CPU Unit CJ2H CJ2H CJ2H CPU68 EIP CPU66 EIP CPU65 EIP CPU67 EIP CPU64 EIP 2 EW Applicable Applicable Applicable 3 EM2 Applicable Applicable Applicable 4 EM Applicable Applicable Applicable 5 Appicable Appcale e feme Aolcablo Applable EMG
241. he output value calculated by the G3PW will be out put the output may be something other than 0 0 until the time that the EJ1 starts operating Take this into consideration when making these settings m Setting Example In this example the TC4 control output is output to the G3PW 1 When the communications main setting acquisition number is set to Auto 0 TC4 G3PW CH1 Control Output Heating a CH1 Control Output Heating ar mae ee ou or Le a ne CH2 Control Output Heating EA CH2 Control Output Heating CH3 Control Output Heating DK CH3 Control Output Heating CH4 Control Output Heating gt CH4 Control Output Heating Because this is communications unit No 5 CH1 Control Output Cooling is output CH1 Control Output Cooling A CH1 Control Output Cooling CH2 Control Output Cooling A CH2 Control Output Cooling CH3 Control Output Cooling EY CH3 Control Output Cooling CH4 Control Output Cooling CH4 Control Output Cooling Communications unit No 5 no no no 2 When the communications main setting acquisition number is set to 3 CH3 Control Output Heating TC4 G3PW ht Coe Oupa Wang f Conte Opa aa CH2 Control Output Heating oH Cool ouput etna Ha Control Guput Heating CH4 Control Output Heating pote Control Ouput Heating CH3 Control Output Heating is output os Conos ouput cooing oe cee o
242. hen insert the wiring into the wire hole The wire will be clamped when the screwdriver is removed Use pin terminals for wiring that match the cross sectional area of the wir ing material We recommend the following pin terminals Weidmuller H sleeve Series Connect the power supply to models with screw terminals EDUA 8 and 9 as shown below When using a connector terminal block model EDUC connect the power supply to terminals 9 and 10 avoe MC input power supply Models with Screw Connector Terminal Terminals EDUA Block Model EDUC EDUA EDUC Models with Screw Connector Terminal Terminals EDUA Block Model EDUC e If reinforced insulation is required connect the input and output terminals to a device without any exposed current carrying parts or to a device with standard insulation suitable for the maximum operating voltage of the power supply I O section e Conforming to Safety Standards The power supply terminals must be supplied from a SELV limited current source A SELV separated extra low voltage source is a power supply having double or reinforced insulation between the primary and the sec ondary circuits and having an output voltage of 30 V r m s max and 42 4 V peak max or 60 VDC max Recommended power supply S8VM Series or S8VS Series both manu factured by OMRON Note Select a power supply that suits the operating environment e To comply with the standards for noise terminal voltage f
243. hen using two thermocouples to measure a temperature difference or using a external cold junction com pensator for even greater precision Variable type Seting range Default EO AO Cold Junction Compensation O External Method Common 1 Internal Conditions for use The input type must be set to thermocouple or infrared temperature sensor Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 4 1 3 Analog Inputs When an analog input is selected scaling can be performed as needed by the control application e The Scaling Upper Limit Scaling Lower Limit and Decimal Point Position parameters are used for scaling These parameters cannot be used when a temperature input type is selected e The Scaling Upper Limit parameter sets the physical quantity to be expressed by the upper limit value of input and the Scaling Lower Limit parameter sets the physical quantity to be expressed by the lower limit value of input The Decimal Point Position parameter specifies the num ber of digits below the decimal point e The following example shows scaling of an analog input 4 to 20 mA After scaling the humidity can be read directly In this case the decimal point is set for 1 digit below the decimal point Display humidity Upper limit 95 0 Lower limit 10 0 Input mA 52 Setting Input Specifications Section 4 1 Variable ype Parameter name Seting range Default EO AO Scaling Upper Lim
244. hes with the G3ZA 8AL 103 FLK e A slope coefficient and offset value can be set for each branch output Power Solid state Relays 45 Controlling G3ZA Controllers Connected to Output Devices Section 3 4 Using the G3ZA s MV Calculations for Slope Gradient Control G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller Channel 1 sensor input Channel 2 sensor input Channel 3 sensor input Channel 4 sensor input Control value Source channel MV x Slope a Offset b 46 Controlling G3ZA Controllers Connected to Output Devices Section 3 4 3 4 2 Wiring Connect the Temperature Sensors to the input terminals according to the sen sor s input type e Connect the EJ1 and G3ZA with the EJ1C CBLA050 Cable e Connect the Solid State Relays to the G3ZA s output terminals When using an EJ1L1 TC4 and G3ZA 4H203 FLK wire the circuits as shown in the following diagram G3ZA 4H203 FLK TC4 Control power supply 100 to 240 VAC 50 or 60 Hz Load power supply 100 to 240 VAC 50 or 60 Hz Temperature Sensor EJ1C CBLA050 Cable SW1 settings G3ZA 4H203 FLK SW2 settings G3ZA 4H203 FLK SW2 settings EJ1LI TC4 SW1 11234 SW2 Description SW2 Description Un
245. iable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit Target Unit type Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 E5 A5 0000 9280 AT Calculated Gain H 00000001 to H 00000064 0 1 to 10 0 TU E Se lA 0001 9281 Limit Cycle MV Amplitude H 00000032 to H 000001F4 5 0 to 50 0 20 0 Common 0002 9282 Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function H 00000000 Disabled O Common H 00000001 Enabled 1 Not used 0100 03A0 Direct Reverse Operation CH1 H 00000000 Reverse operation 0 ch H 00000001 Direct operation 1 0101 O3A1 SP Ramp Time Unit CH1 H 00000000 Seconds 0 1 ch H 00000001 Minutes 1 0102 03A2 AT Hysteresis CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 9 EU ch See note 0103 03A3 Temporary AT Execution Judgement Deviation H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 9 150 0 EU ch CH1 See note 0105 03A5 RT CH1 H 00000000 Disabled 0 ch H 00000001 Enabled 1 0106 03A6 PID OnOff CH1 H 00000000 2 PID control 0 ch H 00000001 ON OFF control 1 0107 03A7 Output Mode Selection CH1 H 00000000 Standard control 0 ch H 00000001 Heating cooling control 1 0108 03A8 SP Tracking CH1 H 00000000 Disabled 0 ch H 00000001 Enabled 1 Not used 010C 03AC ST CH1 ME H 00000000 Disabled 0 ch H 00000001 Enabled 1 eae 03AD ST Stable CH1 NA H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 9 15 0 EU ch See note ie O3AE
246. ications with port 2 of a CJ1W SCU41 Serial Communications Unit Port 2 User custom settings Custom settings Port 2 Serial communications mode NT Link 1 N Port 2 Baud rate High speed Port 2 NT Link 1 N maximum unit number O Execute autotuning AT to make the PID adjustments If ST is activated the PID will be automatically calculated when using stan dard control Refer to 4 3 8 Tuning for details Controlling G3ZA Controllers Connected to Output Devices Section 3 4 3 4 Controlling G3ZA Controllers Connected to Output Devices 3 4 1 Application In this example configuration G3ZA Multi channel Power Controllers are used to control the temperature in a 4 zone heater plate with a single control loop by applying a fixed coefficient slope to the results of the EJ1 s PID calcula tions NS5 Programmable Terminal EJ1 TC4 EDU 6 CJ1W CIF11 RS 422A Converter RS 485 EJ1C CBLA050 Cable EJ1 channel 1 Temperature Sensor Up to 8 Units G3PA G3ZA Multi channel Power Controllers Terminating resistance e Up to eight G3ZA Controllers can be connected to the EJ1L1 TC4 using the special communications ports It is not necessary to create a program for communications between the EJ1 and G3ZA e Also the G3ZA s internal parameters can be set to split a single EJ1 channel s control output into 4 branches with the G3ZA 4HL103 FLK or 8 branc
247. ified for programless upload download setting has been increased from 600 to 1200 each e The maximum number of TC4 TC2 Units that an HFU can control has been increased from 16 to 32 Units e Communications unit numbers 32 to 39 can be used in the HFU via programless communications This allows the communications unit numbers of TC4 TC2 connected to an HFU to be numbered sequentially making it easy to copy HFU and TC settings to other HFUs and TCs eSupport Software Use version 4 10 or higher of the CX Thermo when using the upgraded functions e identifying Upgraded Models The new functionality can be used with version 1 2 V1 2 Check the label on the Temperature Con troller or the box to determine the version Models not marked Ver 1 1 are version 1 0 Box Label Temperature Controller Label Version wee EJ TEMPERATURE CONTROL UNIT TEMPERATURE CONTR TEMP MULTI RANGE A VOLTS Adus ee eee ve LOTNO vane 5W U NIT LOT No OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN XXV Functional Upgrades XXV EJ1 Temperature Controllers with linear outputs EJ1N TC2A CNB and EJ1N TC2B CNB have been added and the functions of the previous EJ1 Controllers with pulse outputs have been improved Infor mation in this manual related to improved functionality is indicated with this mark MAKI The improved functionality is outlined below eBasic Units TC4 TC2 e M
248. il a response is returned is monitored using the Programless Communications Receive Wait Time e This time will differ depending on the PLC cycle time Consider the PLC system configuration and allow sufficient margin when setting the response wait time Communications will not be normal if this setting is too short Variable type Setting range Default FO BO Programless Communications 10 to 2000 Receive Wait Time Common 10000 ms Conditions for use The Programless Communications Protocol cannot be NT Link 1 N Reset the EJ1 to enable the setting Either continuing or stopping operation can be selected for when errors occur in the programless link Variable type Setting range Default FO BO Selection of Programless Communi 0 Continue 1 cations Operation during Error 1 Stop Common Conditions for use for Conditions for use No special conditions Programless Communications Section 5 1 PLC Settings Note Note SYSMAC CS CJ Series MELSEC Q Series Reset the EJ1 to enable the setting 0 Continue Programless communications will be restarted automatically when the cause of the programless link error has been removed and communications are possible with the PLC 1 Stop Read write operations for PLC memory will not be performed even after the cause of the programless link error has been removed and communications are possible with the PLC Instead EEEE will be set in the Operation Comm
249. ime for the EJ1 is the time from after a response has been created after data has been received until the EJ1 switches to sending Host device Send status Send N 4 Receive Receive Send Est Recelvestatus Send status Response created Send data wait time The setting of the Send Wait Time parameter can be shortened to reduce the communications time at the host device as long as there are no problems 171 Frame Configuration Section 6 2 6 2 Frame Configuration The communications protocol is CompoWay F Commands from the host computer and responses from the EJ1 are con tained in data blocks called frames The structures of the command and response frames are described below In the following explanations hexadecimal values are expressed by adding the suffix H after the number e g 02H All other alphanumeric values in the explanations indicate ASCII characters Note CompoWay F CompoWay F is OMRON s standard communications format for general serial communications It uses commands compliant with the well established FINS used exten sively with OMRON Programmable Controllers together with a consistent frame format to facilitate communications between more than one compo nent and between personal computers and components FINS Factory Interface Network Service The FINS protocol provides message communications between control lers in OMRON FA networks Command Frame Format Text STX UnitNo Sub
250. imit CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 1000 a e 0103 0323 Scaling Lower Limit CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 ee Decimal Point Position CH1 m Type CH2 En Type CH3 EF AA 0400 Input Type CH4 Le ee 248 H 00000000 H 00000001 H 00000002 H 00000003 H 00000004 H 00000005 H 00000006 H 00000007 H 00000008 H 00000009 H 0000000A H 0000000B H 0000000C H 0000000D H 0000000E H 0000000F H 00000010 H 00000011 H 00000012 H 00000013 H 00000014 H 00000015 H 00000016 H 00000017 H 00000018 H 00000019 H 0000001A H 0000001B H 0000001C H 0000001D H 0000001E H 00000000 H 00000001 H 00000000 H 00000001 H 00000002 H 00000003 Setting monitor range Setting monitor range Pt100 A Pt100 1 Pt100 2 JPt100 3 JPt100 4 DLIOIRONO ne N q 10 to 70 C 21 60 to 120 C 22 115 to 165 C 23 140 to 260 C 24 4 to 20 mA 25 0 to 20 mA 26 1 to 5 V 27 O to 5 V 28 0 to 10 V 29 K MA 30 TO F 1 KER Ne decimal point 0 kk ee 5 kek 3 The rest are the same as channel 1 Appendix Target Unit Target Unit TC4 TC2 Target Unit Target Unit TC4 TC2 0001 9200 Cold Junction Compensation H 00000000 Externally T 1 Common Method H 00000001 Internally 1 pere paria Parameter List Appendix Parameter name Setting mo
251. ion of AT or ST with NAA If AT or ST when using NAH is being executed AT or ST with MAA is canceled and the mode is switched to manual mode 40 AT Execute Cancel and 100 AT Execute Cancel Selects executing or canceling autotuning for the channels specified in the related information An operation error is generated in the following instances e When the run stop parameter is set to stop e When the auto manual parameter is set to manual e During ON OFF control e When 100 AT Execute is specified during 40 AT Execute execu tion e When 40 AT Execute is specified during 100 AT Execute execu tion Bank O Change to Bank 3 Change Switches between banks 0 to 3 Refer to 4 7 1 Bank Function for details on banks An operation error will occur if autotuning is already being performed for a specified channel 187 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 e LSP Change and RSP Change Sets SP Mode LSP local SP RSP remote SP An operation error will occur if autotuning is already being performed for a specified channel e Reset Error Clears the following errors heater burnout latch HS alarm latch heater overcurrent latch heater overcurrent and operation during error selec tion B e Alarm Latch Cancel Cancels alarm latches This command is enabled when the alarm latch function is used e Save RAM Data 2 Writes the settings for parameters that can be changed duri
252. ions Monitoring can be performed for the EJ1 and the settings can be changed by simply reading and writing to memory No time consuming communications programming required Communications with PLCs from OMRON SYSMAC CS CJ Series and Mit subishi Electric NELSEC Q QnA QnAS An AnS FX3UC Series can be per formed without creating ladder programs Using programless communications enables monitoring and changing set tings for the EJ1 by simply reading and writing to PLC memory The EJ1 auto matically performs communications with PLCs so no time consuming communications programming is required The read monitor value is The HFU reads the TC4 written to the PLC memory monitor value PLC EJ1 TC4 2 PV Manipulated variable Status Monitor PV PV Manipulated variable lt Manipulated variable Status Status The HFU automatically performs communications with the PLC SP SP Settings SP change Alarm value 1 Alarm value 2 Alarm value 1 gt Alarm value 1 Alarm value 2 Alarm value 2 The HFU reads the value The read setting is written written to the PLC memory to the setting for the TC4 5 1 1 Connectable Devices SYSMAC CS CJ Series CP1 Series 118 om wae e Note CPU Unit CS CJ Series I RS 232C CP1 Series RS 232C or RS 232C or RS 422
253. is stopped For heating cooling control the MV at Stop parameter applies to the cooling side if the MV is negative and to the heating side if the MV is positive The default is 0 0 so an MV will not be output for either standard or heating cooling control with the default setting Variable type Parameter name Setting range Default D5 95 MV at Stop Channel 5 0 to 105 0 for standard control 105 0 to 105 0 for heating cooling control Conditions for use The control method must be set to 2 PID control The order of priority is as follows Manual MV gt MV at Stop gt MV at PV Error E MV at PV Error This parameter sets the MV when an input error or remote SP input error occurs Variable type Setting range Default D5 95 MV at PV Error 5 0 to 105 0 for standard control Channel 105 0 to 105 0 for heating cooling control Conditions for use The control method must be set to 2 PID control The order of priority is as follows Manual MV gt MV at Stop gt MV at PV Error E MV Limiter This function limits the MV output by applying upper and lower limits to the calculated MV e The following MVs take priority over the MV limits e Manual MV e MV at Stop e MV at PV Error Output gt 100 Y MV Upper Limit MV Lower Limit Output Mode Selection Standard control e For heating cooling control upper and lower limits are set on overall heat ing cooling control They cannot
254. it Channel 1999 to 9999 See note Scaling Lower Limit Channel 1999 to 9999 9 Decimal Point Position Channel 0 no decimal point 1 kkk kk kk E 3 k k kkk Conditions for use The input type must be set to analog input Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped Always set the Scaling Upper Limit gt Scaling Lower Limit If the Scaling Lower Limit gt Scaling Upper Limit the larger value will function as the Scaling Upper Limit m Setting Example In this example scaling is set to display 0 to 5 V as 10 0 to 95 0 Scaling Upper Limit 950 Scaling Lower Limit 100 Decimal Point Position 1 4 1 4 Input Shift Correction lf there is a significant difference between the temperature at the measure ment point and the location where the temperature display is needed so that the display control performance is unsatisfactory at the present sensor posi tion measurement point the temperature difference can be set as an input shift correction value Variable type Parameter name Setting range Default D5 95 Input Value 1 for Input Correction 199 9 to 999 9 EU Channel See note 1 Input Shift 1 Channel 199 9 to 999 9 EU See note 2 Input Value 2 for Input Correction 1999 to 9999 EU 1000 Channel See note 1 Input Shift 2 Channel 199 9 to 999 9 EU See note 2 Conditions for use No special conditions Note 1 The decim
255. it 5 Expand Unit 6 Commu No error Error There is an error in communications with the nications Error G3ZA6 Bit 6 Expand Unit 7 Commu No error Error There is an error in communications with the nications Error G3ZA7 Bit 7 Expand Unit 8 Commu No error Error There is an error in communications with the nications Error G3ZA8 Be owsa AS O Bs Note Bao nausa O a Bu Nawa o S S B2 Note Btis Notused o S S B4 Nouws O S S Bicis nousa OOO S SSS Note The above information also applies to the G3PW I O Error Status C4 84 0005 Bit position AAA Bit description Bitrate Bs Nate B6 Nate B7 Note te Nate B9 Nate Bo Note Bu Note B2 Note B3 Nate B4 Note 260 Status Lists Appendix I O Alarm A Status C4 84 0006 Bit position _ Bit description Ba Note pts nawsa o o S Ba Note Bs Nowa o o S Be Nowa o o S B7 Note Be Nosa O a Bs nousa O O e S Bo nousa O S S Bu Nawa oO a S B2 Note Bas Nota Baa Note Bicis nousa OOO Ci I O Alarm B Status C4 84 0007 Bit position a Bit description Bits CT2HS Alarm Bt Noted oo a CSS pte Note Bs Note tio Note Bu Nawa AU A S B2 Note Bas Nowa ooo O S S B4 Note 261 Status Lists Appendix I O Notification A Status C4 84 0009 Bit position a Bit description CT1 Heater Current Updated Hold The heater current monitor has not been updated Hold because the control output ON time is less than 100 ms Will also hold when a CT is not connected ptt N
256. it number 01 02 03 04 3 Baud rate 57 6 kbps 7 ON Use G3ZA CJ1W CIF11 EJ1C EDU To NS5 E communications RS 485 port A o Description ON Terminator connected ON 2 wire method ON 2 wire method 24 VDC Not used OFF No RS control of RD continual reception ON RS control of SD 47 Controlling G3ZA Controllers Connected to Output Devices Section 3 4 3 4 3 Setup The settings are made through communications The CX Thermo Support Software can be connected using an E58 CIFQ1 Connecting Cable to set the parameters from a personal computer The following table shows the parameters related to the G3ZA that can be set from the Temperature Controller as well as example settings Variable type DA 0100 G3ZA CH1 Slope 028A 65 0 Note 3 4 4 Adjustment 48 o1o1__ Unit number 0 G3ZA Unit number 02 Same as G3ZA Unit number 01 e The Programmable Terminal and E58 CIFQ1 Connecting Cable cannot be connected at the same time e When connecting the cable for the Support Software to an EJ1C EDU End Unit either turn OFF the Programmable Terminal s power supply or switch the Programmable Terminal s screen to the system menu Execute autotuning AT to make the PID adjustments If ST is activated the PID will be automatically calculated when using stan dard control Refer to 4 3 8 Tuning for details Set the slope and offset values independently to match the system
257. iter Out of Range Set Value Limiter Reverse Operation MV Limiter Reverse Operation Scaling Reverse Operation 211 Determining the Error from the Status Section 8 3 Bits 8 to 9 Not used Bit 10 1 0 Error 1 I O Error Status C4 84 0005 Main Input 1 Count Error Main Input 2 Count Error Main Input 3 Count Error Main Input 4 Count Error Bits 4 to 7 Not used Bits 8 to 11 Not used A Bits 12 to 15 Not used Lower level I O Error 1 Basic Unit Expand Unit Error C4 84 000F Expand Unit 1 Error Expand Unit 2 Error Expand Unit 3 Error Expand Unit 4 Error Expand Unit 5 Error Expand Unit 6 Error Expand Unit 7 Error Expand Unit 8 Error Bits 8 to 11 Not used g Bits 12 to 15 Not used I O Alarm 1 I O Alarm A Status C4 84 0006 BitO CT1 Heater Overcurrent Bit 1 CT2 Heater Overcurrent Bits 2 to 3 Not used Bits 4 to 7 Not used Bits 8 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used I O Alarm B Status C4 84 0007 CT1 HB Alarm CT1 HS Alarm CT1 OC Alarm Not used CT2 HB Alarm CT2 HS Alarm CT2 OC Alarm Not used Bits 8 to 11 Not used g Bits 12 to 15 Not used Lower level I O Alarm 4 Basic Unit Expand Unit Alarm Status C4 84 0010 Expand Unit 1 Alarm Expand Unit 2 Alarm Expand Unit 3 Alarm Expand Unit 4 Alarm Expand Unit 5 Alarm Expand Unit 6 Alarm
258. king unit versions 219 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors Section 8 4 status Possiblecause Countermeasure The Smart Active Part SAP There is no power supply to the Supply power from the EDU power does not communicate with EJ1 supply terminal the EJ1 The SAP is not compatible with Use an SAP for the EJ1 the EJ1 Connection The SAP is not for serial con Use an SAP for serial Programmable nection Terminal connection The Serial Communications Set the Serial Communications NS series Board SCB Unit SCU and Board s or Unit s baud rate the same the EJ1 communications set as the port B baud rate tings do not match Hint The EJ1 baud rate is set under the Port B Communications Baud Rate parameter SCB SCU e The available baud rate settings are 9 6 kbps default 19 2 kbps 38 4 kbps 57 6 kbps and 115 2 kbps See note RS 485 EJ e Set the other parameters the same as the Serial Communi cations Unit as well e data length 7 parity even and stop bits 2 The values in parentheses are the default set tings NS series Refer to the PT and PLC manuals for PT and PLC communi cations settings See Related Manuals on page xiv Set the communications conditions for the Serial Communica tions Unit as follows e User default settings
259. limiter is preventing the MV from decreasing e Change the MV limiter to a suitable value The EJ1 is outputting in manual mode e Stop manual mode Procedure The control system is radiating heat Execute heating and cooling control Execute heating and cooling control and cooling control The overshoot is too large e Use the countermeasures listed in the Overshooting or Undershooting troubleshooting table 224 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Temperature Control Errors Section 8 6 Overshooting or Undershooting a Possible cause Countermeasure Connection Measured temperature is wrong Perform the action outlined in 7 5 the action outlined Perform the action outlined in 7 5 7 5 A general purpose thermometer with slow thermal e Change to a sheathed thermometer response has been connected to a control system with fast thermal response Setting The proportional band value is too low e Increase the proportional band within a range with an acceptable response delay e Execute AT or ST with to make the PID adjustments The integral time is too short e Increase the integral time within a range with an acceptable response delay e Execute AT or ST with to make the PID adjustments The derivative time is too short e Increase the derivative time within a range that does not adversely affect the stability of stabilization time e Execute AT or ST with to make the PID adjus
260. lines to protect the EJ1 from external noise e Use AWG22 cross sectional area 0 326 mm to AWG14 cross sec tional area 2 081 mm twisted pair cable for power supply and AWG28 cross sectional area 0 081 mm to AWG16 cross sectional area 1 309 mm for all other cables The stripping length is 6 to 8 mm e Use crimp terminals when wiring the terminals e Tighten the terminal screws to a torque of 0 40 to 0 56 N m e Up to two wires of the same size and same type or two crimp terminals can be inserted into a single terminal e Use the following types of crimp terminals for M3 screws JO 5 8 mm max Y C 5 8 mm max en 2 Wiring Terminals Wiring Procedure for Screw Less Clamp Terminals y B1 B2 D B3 B4 B5 eID Be ere B7 Kero B8 i B10 EH YU Ly Wy 2 2 3 Wiring Power Supply Voltage A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 Section 2 2 There are two holes for each terminal The hole on the right is the operating hole the hole on the left is the wire hole Insert a flat blade screwdriver with a width of 2 5 mm into the operating hole and t
261. lowing can be used by setting event input assignments Run stop auto manual remote SP local SP and bank switching e Both screw terminals and screw less clamp terminals are available e Terminal blocks can be detached and attached e An HFU monitors the Basic Units and collects data e Up to sixteen Basic Units or 32 version Units can be connected to one HFU e Data can be exchanged between the EJ1 and PLCs using programless communications e With version V1 0 up to 300 data items can be read from a PLC to the EJ1 and up to 300 data items can be written from the EJ1 to a PLC With version NAM up to 600 data items can be read from a PLC to the EJ1 and up to 600 data items can be written from the EJ1 to a PLC With ver sion NEM up to 1 200 data items can be read from a PLC to the EJ1 and up to 1 200 data items can be written from the EJ1 to a PLC I O Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 End Unit EDU e OMRON CS CJ series PLCs and Mitsubishi Q QnA QnAS An AnS FX3UC series PLCs can be connected Version or higher must be used for An AnS FX3UC series PLCs e The End Unit supplies power to connected Basic Units and HFUs e An End Unit is always required when using the EJ1 e A total of up to 16 HFUs and Basic Units can be connected to one End Unit e The End Unit has two communications ports port A and port B Write Mode is valid for port B If settings are changed from port A they are always written to EEPROM
262. mands can be executed by turning bits ON or OFF Settings for the parameters for these operation commands can be made only using programless download settings Caution e The following parameters operate by setting the Operation Command Request Bit to 0003 Single bit specification or to 0004 Multi bit speci fication Refer to 5 1 4 Description of Operation for details e Do not execute operation commands on communication unit numbers that do not exist e When using parameters for both the TC4 and TC2 with duplicate commu nications unit numbers only the data that corresponds to an existing TC2 TC4 communications unit number will be reflected Example When TC2 No 0 and TC4 No 1 are connected to the HFU the data indicated in gray shading in the following table will be reflected Fortcz No7 nos Nos Nod nos noz Noi NO For TC2 RUN STOP AT Execute Cancel and Auto Manual parameters are available as follows By turning the respective bit ON or OFF the operation command for the channels of the corresponding communications unit number is exe cuted Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 For TC4 RUN STOP AT Execute Cancel and Auto Manual parameters are available as follows By turning the respective bit ON or OFF the operation command for the channels of the corresponding communications unit number is exe cuted Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 INE GHA che om 154
263. manually set the LBA detection time set the LBA Detection Time pa rameter to twice the LBA reference time given below 1 Set the output to the maximum value 2 Measure the time required for the width of change in the input to reach the LBA band Measurement time Tm PV gt 104 Band le MV 100 Time LBA Detection Time Tm x 2 3 Set the LBA Detection Time parameter to two times the measured time e The LBA operates when one of the alarm types is set to LBA e Loop burnout alarms are not detected during SP ramping e Loop burnout alarms are not detected during autotuning manual opera tion or while stopped e If the LBA Detection Time LBA Level LBA Band and PID settings are not appropriate alarms may be detected inappropriately or alarms may not be output when necessary e Loop burnout alarms may be detected if unexpectedly large disturbances occur continuously and a large deviation does not decrease e lf a loop burnout occurs when the set point is near the ambient tempera ture the temperature deviation in a steady state may be less than the LBA level preventing detection of the loop burnout e If the set point is so high or low that it cannot be reached even with a sat urated manipulated variable a temperature deviation may remain even in a steady state and a loop burnout may be detected e Detection is not possible if a
264. max Heater burnout HB alarm setting range 0 1 to 99 9 A in units of 0 1 A 0 0 A Heater burnout HB alarm output turns OFF 100 0 A Heater burnout HB alarm output turns ON Min detection ON time 100 ms See note 1 Heater short HS alarm setting range 0 1 to 99 9 A in units of 0 1 A 0 0 A Heater short HS alarm output turns ON 100 0 A Heater short alarm HS output turns OFF Min detection OFF time 100 ms See note 2 Heater overcurrent OC alarm setting 0 1 to 99 9 A in units of 0 1 A range 0 0 A Heater overcurrent OC alarm output turns ON 100 0 A Heater overcurrent OC alarm output turns OFF Min detection ON time 100 ms See note 1 Note 1 Heater burnouts and heater overcurrents are not detected if the control output heating ON time is 100 ms or less 230 Specifications Appendix Detection is also sometimes not possible if a contactor is used for the control output 2 A heater short is not detected if the control output heating OFF time is 100 ms or less Detection is also sometimes not possible if a contactor is used for the control output Characteristics SS TC4 TC2 CCT EDU Indication accuracy Thermocouple input 0 5 of indication value PV or 1 C which platinum resistance ever is greater 1 digit max See note 3 thermometer input Analog input 0 5 FS 1 digit max EN EN Heater burnout CT input 5 FS 1 digit max EN EN Hysteresis 0 1 to 999 9
265. mbient temperature the higher the temperature the shorter the service life and the lower the temperature the longer the service life Therefore the service life can be extended by lowering the temperature of the Temperature Controller 3 Mounting two or more Temperature Controllers side by side or mounting Temperature Controllers above each other may cause heat to build up inside the Temperature Controllers which will shorten their service life If the Temperature Controllers are mounted above each other or side by side use forced cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the Temperature Controllers However be sure not to cool only the terminals Doing so will result in measurement errors O Ensuring Measurement Accuracy 1 When extending or connecting the thermocouple lead wire be sure to use compensating wires that match the thermocouple types 2 When extending or connecting the lead wire of the platinum resistance thermometer be sure to use wires that have low resistance and keep the resistance of the three lead wires the same 3 Mount the Temperature Controller so that it is horizontally level 4 Ifthe measurement accuracy is low check to see if input shift has been set correctly O Precautions for Operation 1 It takes a certain amount of time for the outputs to turn ON from after the power supply is turned ON Due consideration must be given to this time when designing control panels etc 2 It takes 30
266. me a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power is turned ON e Control will be continued even when there is an OC Alarm e The rated current value may sometimes differ slightly from the actual cur rent flowing to the heater Check the current value in an actual operating state in the Heater Current Value 1 or 2 Monitor parameter e f there is little difference between the current in normal and abnormal states detection may become unstable To stabilize detection set a cur rent value difference of at least 1 0 A for heaters of less than 10 0 A and at least 2 5 A for heaters of 10 0 A or more If the heater current is too low loop the load line several times through a CT as shown in the diagram below Looping it through twice will double the detection current Load line CT E Heater Overcurrent Latch and Latch Cancel The heater overcurrent latch can be used to keep a heater OC Alarm ON once it goes ON The latch can be released by executing an operation command Reset Error or Software Reset cycling the power or setting the Heater Overcurrent Detection Value to 100 0 A Refer to 6 4 11 Operation Commands for details on the operation commands Variable type Setting range Default E4 A4 Heater Overcurrent 1 or 2 Latch 0 Disabled 1 0 1 Enabled Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped Installing Current For details refer to Installing Current Transformers CT HB Ala
267. minutes from the time the product is turned ON until the correct temperature is indicated Always turn ON the power supply at least 30 minutes before starting temperature control 3 Avoid using the Temperature Controller near a radio television set or other wireless device lts use would result in reception disturbance Xii Preparations for Use Be sure to thoroughly read and understand the manual provided with the product and check the fol lowing points Checkpoint tas OZ O Purchasing the product Product appearance After purchase check that the product and packaging are not dented or otherwise damaged Damaged internal parts may prevent optimum control Product model and Make sure that the purchased product meets the required specifica specifications tions Setting the Unit Product installation Provide sufficient space around the product for heat dissipation Do location not block the vents on the product Terminal wiring Do not subject the terminal screws to excessive stress force when tightening them Make sure that there are no loose screws after tightening terminal screws to the specified torque of 0 40 to 0 56 N m Be sure to confirm the polarity for each terminal before wiring the ter minal block and connectors Power supply inputs Wire the power supply inputs correctly Incorrect wiring will result in damage to the internal circuits Operating environment Ambient temperature The ambient operating tempe
268. mited by the input range and SP Limiter range Actual SP setting range A Input range Set Point Limiter Internal SP 4 3 5 Setting the SP Ramp 72 The SP ramp function restricts the width of changes in the set point as a rate of change When the SP ramp function is enabled and the change width exceeds the specified rate of change this function can restrict the set point within an area as shown in the following diagram While the SP ramp function is operating control will be performed not for the specified set point but rather for the set point restricted by the rate of change set for the SP ramp function h SP Ramp SP SP after change SP Ramp Rise Value SP Ramp Time Unit Time SP before change Point of change The rate of change during SP ramp operation is specified by the SP Ramp Rise Value SP Ramp Fall Value and SP Ramp Time Unit parameters The SP ramp function will operate when the SP Ramp Rise Value or SP Ramp Fall Value is not set to O disabled The Ramp SP can be checked by using the Internal SP parameter Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 Variable type Parameter name Setting monitoring range E5 A5 See note 1 SP Ramp Time Unit 0 Seconds 1 Channel 1 Minutes DO 90 SP Ramp Rise Value O to 9999 EU s or min BANK See note 2 SP Ramp Fall Value O to 9999 EU s or min BANK See note 2 C4 84 Internal SP Channel 1999 to 9999 EU ST m
269. mmand is too long o 1 P error 7011 The command cannot be executed due A 1 a device error a 5 Operation error 7015 The command cannot be executed while resetting including during star tup Normal completion Processing was completed normally 183 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 9 Controller Status Read This service reads the operating status and error status E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC 0J6 011 2 2 E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response Operatingi Related code status Informa 016 tion 2 2 1 Operating Status e TC4 TC2 Bit positon Meaning 00 Operating 01 Error output 10 Stopped 11 In manual operation CH4 Ci e HFU Fixed to 00 2 Related Status e Jo uo OO TOA az o Sara processing Sup processing 03 Contiguration confirmation Configuration confirmation oa Configuration errr Configuration eror 05 hom a aee o O hna oO 3 Response Codes Response code Error name Cause 1001 Command too long The command is too long Normal completion Processing was completed normally 184 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 10 Echoback Test This service performs an echoback test E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC Testdata 0181011 2 2 0 to 323 E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response code Test data A ____ _ _ 2 2 4 0 to 323 1 Test Data Up to 323
270. mmunications Example Multi Read Each time all the parameters set under Programless Upload Settings are written to the PLC bit 15 changes between ON and OFF To change EJ1 settings from the PLC first change the values in the Download Area in the PLC memory and then set the Setting Change Request Bits The EJ1 will then read the Download Area in the PLC memory and change the corresponding settings e Single Action All of the parameters set in the Download Area are written 4 The EJ1 sets the Setting Change Response Bits EJ1 Download Area adres vamo Read Request Bits E TC4 2 FU Operation Command ite Request Bits ae 2 The Setting Change Request n 3 Operation Bits are set by the PLC Command Code pr Hm 3 The EJ1 reads the set value 1 Set value is changed by the PLC A Download Area 5 The Setting Change Request Bits are cleared by the PLC Programless Communications Section 5 1 e Multi Action The first time all of the parameters set in the Download Area Setting are changed Afterwards changes are made only to parameters for which val ues have been changed 2 The EJ1 sets the Setting Change Response Bits EJ1 Upload Area UE Download Area Address Value address Vale HFU TOM dy Response o Read Request Bits MI y 1 The Setting Change Request Joga J A VON Bits are set by the PLC me Operation Comrfte lo Operation Command E Response Bits AAA AA
271. n be used to adjust the propor tional band P for the control output assigned to cooling Use this to achieve balanced control between the heating side and cooling side The proportional bands P for the control outputs assigned to the heating cooling sides can be calculated using the following equations e P for the heating side P e P for the cooling side P for the heating side x Cooling coefficient The cooling P is obtained by multiplying the heating P by the cooling coeffi cient so the cooling output control characteristics are different from the heat ing output control characteristics Output Output 7 Heating P Heating P Cooling P L EN PV AS PV 0 A 0 A Set point Set point Heating P x 0 8 Heating P x 1 5 Variable type Setting range Default DO 90 Cooling Coefficient BANK 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 Conditions for use The control method must be set to heating cooling control and 2 PID control and the independent heating cooling PID method must be disabled Note Refer to 4 7 1 Bank Function for details on banks E Dead Band The dead band is set with the set point as its center Setting a negative value produces an overlap band Output Dead band Output Overlap band Positive dead band width Negative dead band width i Heatin Heat g p Cooling D A A Set point Set point Cooling side 69 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 Variable type Setting range DO 90 Dead Band BANK
272. n indicators e Modbus communications can be used to read and write all parameters and to exe cuted any of the operation commands e A switch setting can be changed to use Modbus communications on port B e Parameters and status have been improved e Support has been added for G3PW Power Controllers Advanced Unit HFU e Bit specification operation commands have been added This simplifies program ming ladder diagrams e G3ZA monitor parameters have been added e The maximum number of parameters that can be specified for programless setting has been increased to 1 200 e Communications unit numbers 32 to 39 can be used in the HFU via programless communications This makes it easy to copy HFU and TC settings to other HFUs and TCs 281 Revision History Revision code Dae Revised content 04 February 2010 Page 32 Deleted restriction on directly connecting an HFU to EDU Page 73 Added restriction for SP ramp operation Page 89 Corrected mistake in alarm delay description Page 105 Added note on event inputs TC2 Page 106 Added note on internal buses TC4 TC2 Page 118 Corrected RS 485 wiring diagram Page 122 Added countermeasure for communications noise resistance for RS 422 communications Page 131 Corrected description of error status Page 153 Added note on resetting HFU using operation command Page 157 Corrected wiring diagram for 1 N connections to HFU Page 182 Corrected mistake in related status for Co
273. n pag M eje fo 000 0001 Device Eror Status See Status istson page 250 domme ff RE 0008 0003 Configuration Eror B Status See Status isis on page 258 Joammenje 0004 0004 Internal Communications Eror Status See Status isis on page 258 gt gt Common 0005 0005 1O Error Status See Status Listson page258 gt gt Common fe 0006 0005 vo Alarma Status See Status Listson page 258 commenje 0007 0007 VO Alarm B Status See Status Listson page 255 gt gt Common LEA NN Not used 0009 0009 VO NotiicaionASiaus See Status isis on page258 J gt J oommmn e J CN Not used 0008 0008 enorohamelA Sieus See Status Listson page 258 J gt gt Common e 000F 000F Basic UnivExpand Unt Enor See Status Listson page 258 J gt J gt common 0010 0010 Basic Uni Expand Unt Aarm See Status isis on page 255 gt gt Common fe 0012 0012 Output Status ee Status sis on page 256 J gt J gt Comon J 0013 0013 Deve Status See Status Listson page 258 gt gt commonje e CEA Not used 0020 0020 veson mooom oorr TA TA ommon e Je 0100 0200 Process value Cm1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 199910 9899 See note EU n Je gt forot 9201 Cranner Status See Siats Lists on page 2 ja fe did 0102 0202 Channel Alarm Status CHT See Status Lists on page 258 fo ja e 0103 0208 Internal SP CHT ___ H FFFFF8St to H 0000270F 1990 10 9999 See n
274. n the LBA Detection Time the loop burnout alarm will turn ON e If the control deviation is reduced in the area between 5 and 6 i e the set point is approached and the control deviation is reduced by at least the LBA Band value the loop burnout alarm will turn OFF e If the control deviation is reduced in the area between 6 and 7 i e the set point is approached and the control deviation is reduced by less than the LBA Band value the loop burnout alarm will turn ON Variable type Setting range Default LBA Detection Time Channel 0 to 9999 Seconds O LBA Level Channel 0 1 to 999 9 EU See note 2 LBA Band Channel 0 0 to 999 9 EU See note 2 Conditions for use The alarm type must be set to 12 Note 1 This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the 0 decimal point position setting will be treated as a setting of 1 Refer to 4 7 1 Bank Function for details on banks 102 Using the Loop Break Alarm LBA Section 4 6 Determining the LBA Detection Time 1 2 3 Operating Conditions Temperature e Automatic Settings The LBA detection time is set automatically by autotuning It is not set automatically for heating cooling control If the optimum LBA detection time is not obtained by autotuning set the LBA Detection Time parameter e Manual Settings To
275. nS PLC disable checking the RS 232C CD terminal at buffer memory address 10BH Setting Example Xn7 A 108 128 Programless Communications Section 5 1 e RS 485 MELSEC An AnS FX3UC series PLC EJ1N HFULI NFLK RS 485 RS 485 ASADAS e If noise immunity is a problem in communications connect terminating resistance of 110 to 125 Q to pins 6 and 7 of port B on the EDU 2 Make the PLC settings When using an An AnS series PLC use the switches on the front of the Computer Link Unit to make the settings shown in the following table Switch Setting Station setting OO Taneler speciicaon Pay bi Computer link multidrop link Computer link See note 1 19 2 kbps Note 1 This setting is not used on the A1SJ71UC24 R2 or A1SJ71UC24 PRF 2 If any other settings are used change the setting for the EJ1 to the same settings 3 Refer to the user s manual for the PLC for setting methods 129 Programless Communications Section 5 1 130 Note Contents monitor value D00000 Read Response Bits D00001 Setting Change Response Bits If using an FX3UC series PLC use the GX Developer to make the commu nications settings Start the GX Developer double click PLC Parameter under Parameter in the project tree click the PLC System Setting 2 Tab select the channel to use select the option to set communications and then make the follow ing settings E O O Parity Even Stop bits H
276. nce Rectification Band 0 0 to 999 9 EU Channel See note 2 Disturbance Judgment Width 199 9 to 999 9 EU Channel See note 2 Conditions for use The control method must be set to 2 PID control Note 1 This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the 0 decimal point position setting will be treated as setting 1 E Disturbance Gain e Overshooting due to a disturbance can be suppressed more by increasing the Disturbance Gain e Overshooting due to a disturbance can be increased by decreasing the Disturbance Gain e f the Disturbance Gain is set to 0 the Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function will not operate Disturbance Gain 1 Temperature os a Disturbance Gain 0 5 4 I Disturbance Gain 0 Disturbance Gain 0 5 Disturbance Gain 1 0 Time E Disturbance Time Constant The recovery time from the disturbance can be made longer by increasing the Disturbance Time Constant The Disturbance Time Constant is normally left at its default setting of 1 Use this parameter for fine tuning when adjusting the Disturbance Gain alone is not sufficient Temperature Disturbance Time Constant 1 JO Disturbance Time Constant 2 oe 2 4 0 Time Note The waveform shown in the diagram above will vary depending on the control object s characteristics and the PI
277. nd Unit 6 Error Expand Unit 7 Error Expand Unit 8 Error Bits 8 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used C4 84 000B Error Channel A Status Bito CH1 Cia Bit 1 CH2 Bit2 CH3 Bit3 CH4 Bits 4 to 7 Not used Bits 8 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used CH2 to CH4 are the same as CH1 C4 84 0004 Internal Communications Error Status Expand Unit 1 Communications Error Expand Unit 2 Communications Error Expand Unit 3 Communications Error Expand Unit 4 Communications Error Expand Unit 5 Communications Error Expand Unit 6 Communications Error Expand Unit 7 Communications Error Expand Unit 8 Communications Error Bits 8 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used C4 84 0001 C4 84 0002 C4 84 0003 C4 84 0101 ch 1 C4 84 0201 ch 2 C4 84 0301 ch 3 C4 84 0401 ch 4 Channel Status RUN STOP Auto Manual AT Execute Cancel SP Mode Bit8 Input Error Bit9 RSP Input Error Bits 10 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used Error Channel A Status bits will not turn ON even if a bit between bit O and bit 3 in the Channel Status is ON 04 84 0102 C4 84 0202 ch 2 C4 84 0302 ch 3 ch 1 C4 84 0402 ch 4 Channel Alarm Status Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Not used ASAS Heater Overcurrent HB Alarm HS Alarm OC Alarm Bits 8 to 11 Not used Set Point Lim
278. nd the MV is less than 10 0 the output will be 0 When the MV is 90 0 or greater the output will be 100 Setting Output Specifications Section 4 2 Variable type Setting range Default E1 A1 Minimum output ON OFF 0 0 to 50 0 1 0 width 10 Conditions for use Control output must be assigned and set to 2 PID control These parameters are not valid for outputs 1 and 2 on Control lers with linear outputs Note 1 This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 2 When the control cycle is short due to the 2 ms output resolution the Unit may not operate as set For example when the Control Cycle 1 s and the Output Minimum ON OFF Duration 0 1 the calculation becomes 1 s 1 000 ms x 0 1 1 ms but the actual output minimum ON OFF duration is 2 ms N Caution If the Output Minimum ON OFF Duration is too large control performance may suffer 4 2 4 Output ON Scheduling Function The ON time for each output can be reduced to one half or one fourth of the control period to limit the number of outputs in the Unit that are ON simulta neously Output ON Scheduling Number of outputs ON Each output s limit Method simultaneously See note No offset C LC a ee E 1 No others ON Note When the MV is assigned to an output the actual limit is either this value or the MV limit value whichever is lower Variable type Setting range Default Output ON Scheduling 0 No offset Method Common 1
279. nds to the unit number of the Basic Unit will turn ON The bit will turn OFF when normal communications are recovered m Examples Bit 15 Turns ON This indicates that a communications error has occurred for Unit No 15 Communications For the EJ1 to communicate with the PLC the Programless Communications Protocols and Protocol must be set and the area in PLC memory that will be allocated to Memory Allocation parameters for the Programless Upload Download Settings must be set e The communications protocol is set under Programless Communications Protocol e Select the type of memory area under Programless Communications Upload Download Data Area and set the start address for the memory allocation in the Programless Communications Upload Download Start Address 133 Programless Communications Section 5 1 E Programless Communications Protocol Variable Type F0 BO Used to set the programless communications protocol Variable type Setting Monitor values oer Programless Communica 0 Not used tions Protocol Common 4 Not used 2 NT Link 1 N Connectable PLCs SYSMAC CS CJ Series Not used ANA AnU CPU Common Commands Connectable PLCs MELSEC An AnS FX3UC Series MC protocol format 5 Connectable PLCs MELSEC Q QnAS Series Conditions for use No special conditions Note Reset the EJ1 to enable settings E Programless Communications Upload Download Data Area Variable Type F0 BO Used to set t
280. ng an E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable to use the CX Thermo to set the parameters for the distributed EJ1 RD IRDIEDISBIED IRB IRD ED LYON Seeeeceees LYON LYON EJ1LI TC4 or EJ1LI TC2 EJ1LI EDU Up to 64 Basic Units can be connected using distributed placement 4 channels x 64 Units 256 channels elles e elles wi ED o ao cise S de a Sl Sip laa E Qi Gael Cis Cis EJ1LI TC4 or EJ1LI TC2 EJ1L1 EDU Wiring for Distributed Placement Group A Terminator 110to 125 Q 5 2 1 2 W gt O Host device a Ae pay ElSe d FG ED E i Terminator ese o 110 to 125 0 29 2 F o 1 2 W faye si i P A Ol SAES an 9 dl VDC E i l Group B Terminator al 110 to 125 Q 1 2W a or A ED By DjA gt 252222 3 z z ONR RS 485 as ol 4 Terminator St 110 to 125 Q 1 2 W 6 F K 7 SA 54 RS 485 Sl z 5 24 VDC
281. ng operation to EEPROM Parameter Initialization Returns the current set values to their default values The setting is not saved to EEPROM however so Save RAM Data 2 should be executed if required Execute Save RAM Data 2 only when control operations are stopped for all channels Save RAM Data 2 Writes settings except read only settings to EEPROM Execute Save RAM Data 2 only when control operations are stopped for all channels Register Unit Configuration Registers or resets the G3ZA Unit Configuration Refer to 4 7 4 Using G3ZA Multi channel Power Controllers for details on Unit configuration registration Execute Save RAM Data 2 only when control operations are stopped for all channels Response Codes Response code Errormame Cause 1001 Command too long The command is too long 1002 Command too short The command is not long enough 1100 Parameter error The command code or related information is wrong 0402 Operation error The command cannot be executed because 0402 the model or version is not the same 2201 Operation error The command cannot be executed during 2201 operation 2202 Operation error The command cannot be executed because 2202 operation is stopped 2203 Operation error e The command cannot be executed in nor 2203 mal mode e The command cannot be executed in man ufacturer mode 7011 Operation error The command cannot be executed due to a 7011 device error 7012
282. ng resistance Connect a terminating resistor 110 to 125 Q 1 2 W only to the end G3ZA node 25 Using Tool Ports Section 2 3 2 3 Using Tool Ports 2 3 1 Procedure 1 2 3 26 Tool ports are used to make EJ1 settings using the EST2 2C MVLI CX Thermo Support Software The E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable is required to make the con nection Turn ON the power to the EJ1 Note Do not connect the E58 CIFQ1 when power to the EJ1 is OFF If the Cable is connected when the power to the EJ1 is OFF power will be supplied from the computer and impose a load on the inter nal circuits of the EJ1 Connect the Cable Connect the computer s USB port with the port A connector on the EJ1 us ing the Cable Port A connector m7 E58 CIFQ1 H Computer EDU Front View Install the driver A driver must be installed to use the Cable e When the Cable is connected with the computer the OS will detect a new device Follow the installation wizard instructions and install the driver Note For details on installation methods refer to the user s manual for the E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable Make the communications port settings The USB Serial Conversion Cable is used to communicate with the COM port of the computer Set the communications port COM port number to be used for the CX Thermo Support Software to the COM port assigned to the Cable Unit Configuration Examples Section 2 4 2 4
283. nge Target Unit Target Unit type a Add na ress Au E3 A3 Alarm 1 Type A ann nnn enn nn En OD H 00000000 Alarm function OFF 0 H 00000001 Upper and lower limit alarm 1 H 00000002 Upper limit alarm 2 H 00000003 Lower limit alarm 3 H 00000004 Upper and lower limit range alarm 4 H 00000005 Upper and lower limit alarm with standby sequence 5 A Upper limit alarm with standby sequence 6 ARS Lower limit alarm with standby sequence 7 H 00000008 Absolute value upper limit alarm 8 H 00000009 Absolute value lower limit alarm 9 H 00000000A Absolute value upper limit alarm with standby sequence 10 H 0000000B Absolute value lower limit alarm with standby sequence 11 H 0000000C LBA Loop Burnout Alarm 12 0101 0361 Alarm 1 Latch CH1 H 00000000 Disabled e H 00000001 Enabled 1 Era 0362 Alarm 1 Hysteresis CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 9 See note CCE 0363 Alarm 1 Open in Alarm CH1 H 00000000 Close in alarm D H 00000001 Open in alarm 1 0104 0364 Alarm 1 ON Delay CH1 H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 to 999 Eea 0365 Alarm 1 OFF Delay CH1 H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 to 999 0366 Alarm 1 SP Selection CH1 H 00000000 Ramp SP 0 H 00000001 Target SP 1 CACA Alarm 2 Type CH1 The rest are the same as Alarm 1 ates 3 Type CH1 Ta 0118 0875 LBA Detection Time CH1 H 00000000 1o Fr 0000270F 010 9988 Jo fe Jmn e Fi oie Joors LEA Loval
284. nitor Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit Target Unit type Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 9769 montor 0100 E000 GSZAT CHT Control Varabie Mentor H 00000000 1o H ooooosEs 0 010 1000 oo A nom fe gt 0101 001 G3ZA1 CH2 Control Variable Monitor H 00000000 to H 000008E8 0 010 100 0 00 NUM Je 0102 002 G3ZA1 CHS Control Variable Monitor H 00000000 to H 000003E8 10 010 100 0 00 NUM Je 0103 008 G3ZA1 CH4 Control Variable Monitor H 00000000 to H 000003E8 10 010 100 0 00 NUM Je 0104 E004 G3ZA1 CH5 Control Variable Monitor H1 00000000 to H 000003E8 10 010 100 0 00 nom Je 0105 005 G3ZA1 CHE Control Variable Monitor H 00000000 to H 000008E8 0 010 100 0 00 NUM Je gt 0106 006 GSZA1 CH Control Variable Monitor H 00000000 to H 000008E8 10 010 100 0 00 nom Je 0107 E007 G3Za1 CH8 Control Variable Monitor H 00000000 to H 000008E8 0 010 100 0 oo mum Jo foros E08 aazat cHisaus S e A o fe e foros E000 eszm cesans RA o fe moa E00R_ GSzat croStaus O e A o fe 0108 e08 azar 0H Status A e o fe e moc eoc 63zar CH Stars RA SNM fe 0100 009 lezan Ha Stars RA e o fe oro eo0s _ Gezat cu7swus Rf o fe mo eoor feza cresas A A o fe GSZAT CHT Heater ON Current Monitor H 00000000 to H 00000037 010 55 o a num e f G3ZAT CTI Heat
285. nitor range Target Unit TC4 TC2 Control Output 1 Assignment H 00000000 Disabled 0 47 H 00000001 Temperature Controller error 1 H 00000002 All channels All alarm OR 2 H 00000003 All channels All alarm AND 3 H 00000004 All channels Alarm 1 OR 4 H 00000005 All channels Alarm 2 OR 5 H 00000006 All channels Alarm 3 OR 6 H 00000007 All channels Alarm 1 AND 7 H 00000008 All channels Alarm 2 AND 8 H 00000009 All channels Alarm 3 AND 9 H 00000004 All channels Input error OR 10 H 0000000B All channels RSP Input error OR 11 H 0000000D All channels HB Heater Burnout alarm OR 13 H 0000000E All channels HS Heater Short alarm OR 14 H 0000000F All channels OC Heater Overcurrent alarm OR 15 H 00000020 CH1 Alarm 1 32 H 00000021 CH1 Alarm 2 33 H 00000022 CH1 Alarm 3 34 H 00000023 CH1 All alarm OR 35 H 00000024 CH1 All alarm AND 36 H 00000025 CH1 Input error 37 H 00000026 CH1 RSP Input error 38 H 00000028 CH1 HB Heater Burnout alarm 40 H 00000029 CH1 HS Heater Short alarm 41 H 0000002A CH1 OC Heater Overcurrent alarm 42 H 0000002B CH1 PV 43 H 0000002C CH1 SP 44 Variable CompoWay F type Category Add Address ress E1 A1 0100 0340 H 0000002D CH1 Local SP 45 H 0000002E CH1 Remote SP 46 H 0000002F CH1 Control output heating 47 H 00000030 CH1 Control output cooling 4
286. nly for operation com mands Auto Manual TC4 No 08 to 11 Only for operation com mands Auto Manual TC4 No 12 to 15 Only for operation com mands Auto Manual TC4 No 16 to 19 Only for operation com mands Auto Manual TC4 No 20 to 23 Only for operation com mands Auto Manual TC4 No 24 to 27 Only for operation com mands Auto Manual TC4 No 28 to 31 A Only for operation com mands i 2 3 4 O Can be allocated Cannot be allocated Only parameters G3ZA1 to G3ZA4 can be allocated The only parameters that can be allocated as G3PW 1 to 4 The only parameters that can be allocated to the HFU are listed under Other Parameters not listed under Other cannot be allocated a Y S a 271 Parameters That Can Be Allocated for Programless Communications Appendix 272 Numerics 100 AT 79 2 PID control 65 Derivative action 67 Integral action 66 Proportional action 66 2 PID control two degrees of freedom PID 66 40 AT 79 A addresses Modbus communications 197 Advanced Unit HFU xix 6 117 alarm delay 89 alarm hysteresis 87 Alarm Output 1 256 Alarm SP Selection 90 alarm types 86 analog inputs 52 appearance 2 ASCII table 233 AT Autotuning xix AT calculated gain 79 AT hysteresis 79 auto mode 76 autotuning AT 78 auxiliary output allocations 166 bank function 104 bank number 104 Basic Unit Expand Unit Alarm Status TC4 TC2 263 E
287. nnected side by side Note EDU Units are not counted in the number of Units that can be connected Precautions When Using e One HFU can control up to 16 TC4 TC2 Units With version MA one an HFU HFU can control up to 32 TC4 TC2 Units e The unit numbers of the TC4 TC2 Units can be set to between 0 and 31 e To connect 16 or more TC4 TC2 Units Communications Cables must be used to distribute Unit positioning because the maximum number of Units that can be connected horizontally will be exceeded e When using Communications Cables to distribute TC4 TC2 Unit position ing connect the cables to port B on the End Units e If distributed positioning is used for an EJ1 power must be supplied sepa rately to the terminal block on the End Units Note When using distributed positioning turn ON power to the distributed Units first or turn ON power to the HFU and distributed Units simultaneously Even if this is done there may still be problems with the startup timing depending on the EJ1 configuration and power supply capacity If problems occur at startup increase the delay between turning ON the power to the distributed Units and the HFU One HFU can manage up to 32 TC Units 4 channels x 32 Units 128 channels EDU Units are not included in the number of Units that can be managed
288. nput Value 1 for Input Correction Controller readout A 40 C Input Shift 1 Object temperature B Controller readout A 25 C 40 C 15 00 C 55 Setting Input Specifications 4 1 5 Input Filter 56 Section 4 1 Input Value 2 for Input Correction Controller readout A 500 C Input Shift 2 Object temperature B Controller readout A 550 C 500 C 50 00 C Sets the time constant of the digital input filter The following diagram shows the response of the digital filter to a step wise input of amplitude A PV before passing through filter PV after passing through filter 0 63 A Time constant Time Input digital filter Variable type Setting range Default D5 95 Input Digital Filter Channel 0 0 to 999 9 Seconds 0 0 Conditions for use No special conditions Setting Output Specifications Section 4 2 4 2 Setting Output Specifications 4 2 1 Control Output Assignments The parameters shown in the following diagram can be assigned to each out put by setting the control output assignments The same parameter can be assigned to different outputs OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 e OUT2 OUT3 and OUT4 can be set in the same way Settable e Channels 3 and 4 are supported only by the TC4 parameters Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 mu a a All channels Channel 1 a Disabled Alarm 1 to 3 e a Temperature Controller Error All Alarm OR tm All Alarm OR All Alarm AND
289. nt Error 260 Main Input 4 Count Error 260 T O Notification A Status TC4 TC2 262 CT1 Heater Current Hold 262 CT2 Heater Current Hold 262 Infrared Temperature Sensor 51 initial settings 108 112 input filter 56 input shift 53 input type 51 internal block diagram 9 275 internal buses TC4 and TC2 106 Internal Communications Error Status TC4 TC2 260 Expand Unit 1 Communications Error 260 Expand Unit 2 Communications Error 260 Expand Unit 3 Communications Error 260 Expand Unit 4 Communications Error 260 Expand Unit 5 Communications Error 260 Expand Unit 6 Communications Error 260 Expand Unit 7 Communications Error 260 Expand Unit 8 Communications Error 260 L LBA Loop burnout alarm xix LBA detection time 103 limit cycle MV amplitude 79 linear output type 62 link data settings 131 local SP 75 loop burnout alarm LBA 102 LSP Local SP xix M main unit functions 6 manual mode 76 manual MV 76 MC protocol 125 134 138 162 meaning of indicators 3 MELSEC Q Series 137 MELSEC Q QnA Series 119 MELSEC Q QnAS Series 123 124 134 138 memory allocation 133 Modbus communications protocol 194 model number legend 7 monitor 141 multi read 142 read settings 142 single read 141 stop operation 143 mounting and removing terminal blocks 13 mounting to DIN Rail 14 multi 140 multi input 6 multiple read from variable area 198 multiple write to variable ar
290. nt value difference of at least 1 0 A for heaters of less than 10 0 A and at least 2 5 A for heaters of 10 0 A or more If the heater current is too low loop the load line several times through a CT as shown in the diagram below Looping it through twice will double the detection current Load line CT 99 Detecting Current Errors Section 4 5 E HS Alarm Latch and Latch Cancel The HS alarm latch can be used to keep an HS alarm ON once it goes ON The latch can be released by executing an operation command Reset Error or Software Reset cycling the power or setting the HS Alarm parameter to 100 0 A Refer to 6 4 11 Operation Commands for details on the operation commands Variable type Setting range Default HS Alarm 1 or 2 Latch I O O Disabled 1 Enabled Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped Installing Current For details refer to Installing Current Transformers CT HB Alarm on Transformers CT page 93 HS Alarm Calculating the Heater For details refer to Calculating the Heater Burnout Detection Current Value Short Detection on page 94 Current Value 4 5 4 Heater Overcurrent Alarm OC Alarm A heater overcurrent is detected by measuring the heater current while the control output heating is ON For details refer to the following table Heater overcurrent detection cannot be used with the control output for cool ing Control output heating Power to heater
291. ntroller Status Read Page 246 Corrected defaults for G3PW1 Internal Duty Setting G3PW1 External Input Range Alarm Operation and G3PW1 External Duty Input Alarm Operation Page 264 Corrected mistake in description of bit 5 in Channel Status 282 Terms and Conditions of Sale OMRON 5 7 10 11 12 13 Offer Acceptance These terms and conditions these Terms are deemed part of all quotes agreements purchase orders acknowledgments price lists catalogs manuals brochures and other documents whether electronic or in writing relating to the sale of products or services collectively the Products by Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies Omron Omron objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyer s purchase order or other documents which are inconsistent with or in addition to these Terms Prices Payment Terms All prices stated are current subject to change with out notice by Omron Omron reserves the right to increase or decrease prices on any unshipped portions of outstanding orders Payments for Products are due net 30 days unless otherwise stated in the invoice Discounts Cash discounts if any will apply only on the net amount of invoices sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges taxes and duties and will be allowed only if i the invoice is paid according to Omron s payment terms and ii Buyer has no past due amounts Interest Omron at its option m
292. o 99 9 05 s NUM j 0103 F003 G3PW1 Soft start Down Time H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 CC 0104 F004 G3PW1 Output Upper Limit H 00000001 to H 000003E8 0 1 to 100 0 0105 F005 G3PW1 Output Lower Limit H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 po 0106 F006 G3PW1 Heater Burnout Threshold H 00000000 to H 00000064 1 100 100 0107 F007 G3PW1 Heater Characteristic Resistance for H 00000000 to H 00000064 1 to 100 EN Phase Control 0108 F008 G3PW1 Heater Characteristic Resistance for H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 Optimum Cycle Control G3PW1 Heater Burnout Detection Lower H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 os Limit Feat IS LEC A NO CE 014 Fora GOPWi Phase Ange Monior DE CU e NUM e _ area Foa GOPWI GureniMenior DET CN a NUM e EE oras Foa5 GaPwi Tota Run Tine Mentor 0000000010 000008E7 0010009 o0 wn non fe gt CO O A CU CL CN Ca A AA CEE TES EI 70 LI UT CO 0181 Fos1 G3PW1 Communications Timeout Time H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 to ae pe poe 0184 F084 G3PW1 Communications Main Setting Num H 00000000 Automatic Assignment 0 ber H 00000001 EJ1 CH1 Control output heating H 00000002 EJ1 CH2 Control output heating H 00000003 EJ1 CH3 Control output heating H 00000004 EJ1 CH4 Control output heating H 00000005 EJ1 CH1 Control output cooling H 00000006 EJ1 CH2 Control output cooling H 00000007 EJ1 CH3 Control output cooling H 00000008 EJ1 CH4
293. o H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK 0296 Bank 2 Proportional Band H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 9 See note 2 EU BANK Cooling CH1 0257 Bank 2 Integral Time H 00000000 to H 00000F9F 0 to 3999 233 s BANK Cooling CH1 0118 Bank 2 Derivative Time H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 0 to 999 9 40 0 s BANK Cooling CH1 Not used 0200 0480 Bank 2 Set Point CH2 The rest are the same as channel 1 a 1 CAE TRA oe ee 5400 0660 Bank 2 Set Pont c OOOO TT A AAA Note 1 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the O decimal point position setting will be treated as a setting of 1 we wf a J as es ae em o o k N O Q N Ql 00 240 Parameter List Appendix Vari CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit ia nie Category Add Address TC4 ype ress TC2 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK e ged oror ozat Bank Proportional Band OHT H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 5 See note 2 ao Eu BANK operation 0102 0242 Bank 3 Integral Time CHI H 00000000 to F 00000F9F O10398 ass fs Baje foros ozas Bank Derivative Time CHI H 00000000 10 H 0000270F 0 010 9983 00 s BANK fo 0104 02A4 Bank 3 SP Ramp Rise
294. odbus communications can be used on port B e Software version 2 of the G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller can be used Note 1 When more than one G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller is connected version 1 and ver sion 2 can be mixed Up to 8 G3ZA Multi channel Power Controllers can be connected 2 Software version 2 of G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller can also be used with EJ1 version 1 0 e Advanced Unit HFU e Programless communications can be used with 1 N connections e The maximum number of parameters that can be specified for programless upload download settings has been increased from 300 to 600 each e Connection is now possible to MELSEC QnA An AnS FX3uc series PLCs e A new setting read operation has been added to programless communications Setting Read 2 e The speed of programless communications has been increased e Either continue or stop can be selected for when errors occur in programless communications eSupport Software Use version 3 20 or higher of the CX Thermo when using the upgraded functions e identifying Upgraded Models The new functionality can be used with version 1 1 V1 1 Check the label on the Temperature Con troller or the box to determine the version Models not marked Ver 1 1 are version 1 0 Box Label Temperature Controller Label Version tree EJ1 A TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER MA N TEMP MULTI RANG PON VOLTS Te e i Menuai EWN LOTNo QTY
295. odel or version is not the same e The command cannot be executed because operation is stopped e The command cannot be executed dur Ing operation e The command cannot be executed due to a configuration error e The command cannot be executed because the operation command cannot be received e The command cannot be executed because EEPROM is currently being written e The command cannot be executed dur ing reset including startup e The command cannot be executed dur ing error latch status e The command cannot be executed in the current control mode e The command cannot be executed in the current output mode e The command cannot be executed in manual operation mode e The command cannot be executed in Hoe Normalena The service was processed normally Command Response Example The following command executes the RUN operation command for channel 1 Slave address H 01 Write data H OAOO OA Operation command RUN 00 Related information channel 1 Command 01 06 FFFF 0A00 8F4E CRC 16 Response 01 06 FFFF 0A00 8F4E CRC 16 202 Detailed Description of Services Section 7 5 7 5 4 Echoback Test Command Response This service executes an echoback test Function code Slave Fixed data Test data CRC 16 address H 08 H 00 H 00 1 1 2 2 2 Function code Slave Fixed data Test data CRC 16 address H 08 H 00 H 00 1 1 2 2 2 1 Test Data Any data in 2 byte hexadecimal format 2 Resp
296. oftware s Status Display can be used to monitor the EJ1 status and related statuses in a directory tree In addition to the status name and details possible causes of errors and their countermea sures are simultaneously displayed for efficiently processing errors 209 Determining the Error from the Status Section 8 3 Status Display OOOO O O jot EJIN TC4B 00 10 21 input Error at channel Thas been occurring E Device A Status Please confirm the input miswiring breaking short circuit and setting of H 0 Device Error input type EEPROM Error Calibration Error Setting Value Error Configured Registration Data Erro Model Information Data Error Model Information Mismatching Er Configuration Error Undefined Expand Unit Too Many Expand Units E Channel Error 5 4 CH1 RUNYSTOP CH1 Auto Manual CH1 AT Execute Cancel CH1 SP Mode CH1 a RSF Input Error CH1 Alarm 1 CH1 Alarm 2 CH1 Status and Addresses Variable type Parameter name C4 C84 0004 Internal Communications Error Status 0005 I O Error Status 0006 I O Alarm A Status 0007 I O Alarm B Status Not used 0009 I O Notification A Status Not used 000B Error Channel A Status Not used OOOF Basic Unit Expand Unit Error 0010 Basic Unit Expand Unit Alarm Not used 0012 Output Status 0013 Device Status B Not used 0020 Version Variable type Parameter name C4 C84 Not used 0100 Process Value CH1 0101 Channel Status CH1
297. ol will not be achieved Self tuning by step response tuning SRT is started at the start of operation and when the set point is changed when the following conditions are met At start of operation When the set point is changed The set point at the start of operation 1 The new set point differs from the set differs from the set point when the pre vious SRT was executed See note 1 The difference between the tempera ture at the start of operation and the set point is greater than the higher value of either of the following Present propor tional band 1 27 4 C or the ST stable 3 range The temperature at the start of opera tion is lower than the set point during re verse operation and is larger than the set point during direct operation 4 There is no reset from input errors point used when the previous SRT was executed See note 1 The set point change width is greater than the larger value of either of the fol lowing Present proportional band 1 27 4 C or the ST stable range During reverse operation the new set point is larger than the set point before the change and during direct opera tion the new set point is smaller than the set point before the change The temperature is in a stable state See note 2 An equilibrium state is acceptable when the output is 0 at the time the power is turned ON See note 3 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 Note
298. on for Control 3 1 1 Application This section shows an example configuration for a small electric oven and explains how to set up and control the system using the CX Thermo Support Software Small electric oven Temperature Sensor Heater G3NA Solid State Relay Computer Port A connector al ells O N la AA gen AQTIZOIZOIZOIOTZaT ONIN wwe DN NY Imi ll LE ol Eo HOLD EJ1 E58 CIFQ1 e The CX Thermo Support Software can be used to set EJ1 parameters from the personal computer 34 Minimum Configuration for Control Section 3 1 3 1 2 Wiring e Connect the Temperature Sensor to the input terminals according to the sensor s input type e Connect the Solid State Relay to the output terminals When an EJ1LJ TC2 is used wire the circuits as shown below EJ1LJ TC2 Small electric oven E ia o Temperature A2 Sensor 63 AS 65 SSR S AS Heater B7 ia IN a AS Y 3 1 3 Setup Use the CX Thermo Support Software to set EJ1 parameters from the per sonal computer Use the following procedure to set the parameters 1 2 3 1 Turn ON the power to the EJ1 Note Do not connect the E58 CIFQ1 when power to the EJ1 is OFF If the Cable is connected when the power to the EJ1 is OFF power will be supplied from the computer and impose a load on the inter nal
299. onse Codes Function Error Cause code code H 88 H 01 Function code error A function code that is not supported was specified e The fixed data was not H 0000 Ho8 Normalend The service was processed normally Command Response Example Slave address H 01 Test data H 1234 Command 01 08 0000 1234 ED7C CRC 16 Response 01 08 0000 1234 ED7C CRC 16 H 03 Variable data error e The command is too long e The command is not long enough 203 Detailed Description of Services Section 7 5 204 SECTION 8 Errors and Error Processing This section describes methods for checking possible problems in operation depending on classifications of Temperature Controller status 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 Things to Check First Determining Errors from Indicators 0 0 cece eee Determining the Error from the Status 2 00 0 c eee eee Determining the Error from the Status 0 0 0 0 0 c eee eee Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Temperature Measurement Errors 2 0 0 2 ccc cee eee eee Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Temperature Control Errors Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Output Errors Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Heater Burnout Alarm Errors 2
300. ooOOO S Btio nouse Ooo SS ooo Bit 21 EEPROM RAM EEPROM RAM EEPROM Can confirm whether or not the setting is registered in EEPROM Bit 22 ST MAR ST is stopped ST is assie ST Execute Stop status can be checked Bit 23 AT Execute Cancel AT is stopped Can confirm AT Execute Cancel a E Bt24 24 RU RUN STOP Ruwa Stop Run stop can be confirmed sa 25 Communications Writing Comat Wang ON ON enabled Communications Writing is always ON enabled Bs Noted Y B23 Noted oo SSS S ooo Best Nouse SSS Note 1 The values are displayed as follows CT1 channel 1 and CT2 channel 2 2 The values are displayed as follows OUT1 channel 1 OUT2 channel 2 OUT3 channel 3 and OUT4 channel 4 3 The status is displayed as follows OUT3 channel 3 and OUT 4 channel 4 256 Status Lists Appendix Device A Status C4 84 0000 Bit position Bit description Bit O Device Error No error Error There is a memory error Refer to Device Error Status Bit 1 Configuration Error No error Error There is an error in the device configuration Refer to Configuration Error A Status and Configu ration Error B Status Bit 2 Channel Error No error Error There is an error in one of the channels Refer to Error Channel A Status B8 Note Bit 4 Expand Communica No error Error There is an error in communications with the con tions Error nected G3ZA Refer to Internal Communications Error Status Bit 10 I O Error
301. operation Reverse operation For example when the process value PV is lower than the set point SP in a heating control system the manipulated variable increases according to the difference between the PV and SP Accordingly this is reverse operation in a heating control system and direct operation in a cooling control system which performs the opposite operation Variable type Setting range Default E5 A5 Direct Reverse Operation O Reverse operation Channel 4 Direct operation Conditions for use No special conditions Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 68 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 Heating Cooling To perform heating cooling control assign the control output cooling function Control to one of the outputs For example when you want to perform heating cooling control with channel 1 assign channel 1 control output cooling to one of the outputs e Refer to 4 2 1 Control Output Assignments for details on assigning the control output for cooling e The Cooling Coefficient and Dead Band parameters must be set for this PID control in addition to the Proportional Band P Integral Time 1 and Derivative Time D parameters E Cooling Coefficient If the heating characteristics and cooling characteristics of the control object are very different and good control characteristics cannot be achieved with the same PID constants the cooling coefficient ca
302. or class A in EN 61326 install a noise filter Densei Lambda MXB 1206 33 or the equiva lent to the DC line as close as possible to the EJ1 19 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 Inputs Connect inputs according to the input type as shown below TC4 TC4 TC4 a ql Bat o To Beet ch1 ch1 ch3 Thermocouple inputs Platinum resistance Analog inputs Infrared thermosensor thermometer inputs Control Outputs Terminals B1 to B3 and A1 to A3 on the TC4 TC2 are for control outputs TC4 OUT 4 20 0 20 mA DC 4 20 0 20 mA DC TC2 with Linear Outputs 20 Wiring Terminals Auxiliary Outputs Models with Connector Screw Terminal Terminals Block Model EDUA EDUC CT Inputs Only Controllers with Pulse Outputs Section 2 2 Output type Specifications Pulse voltage Output voltage 12 VDC 15 PNP outputs Max load current 21 mA with short circuit protection circuit Transistor Max applicable voltage 30 VDC outputs Max load current 100 mA Residual voltage 1 5 V max Leakage current 0 4 mA max Current out Current output range 4 to 20 mA resolution approx 2 800 puts O to 20 mA resolution approx 3 500 Load 500 Q max Auxiliary outputs are sent from pins B1 to B6 with the HFU and from pins 3 to 5 with the EDUA When using an EDUC
303. or warranty repair indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding the Products unless Omron s analysis confirms that the Products were prop erly handled stored installed and maintained and not subject to contamina tion abuse misuse or inappropriate modification Return of any Products by Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment Omron Compa nies shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Products in combination with any electrical or electronic components Circuits system assemblies or any other materials or substances or environ ments Any advice recommendations or information given orally or in writing are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty See http www omron247 com or contact your Omron representative for pub lished information Limitation on Liability Etc OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY Further in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on which liability is asserted Indemnities Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron Companies and their employees from and against all liabilities losses claims costs and expenses including att
304. orney s fees and expenses related to any claim inves tigation litigation or proceeding whether or not Omron is a party which arises or is alleged to arise from Buyer s acts or omissions under these Terms or in any way with respect to the Products Without limiting the foregoing Buyer at its own expense shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron and defend or set tle any action brought against such Companies to the extent based on a claim that any Product made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property rights of another party Property Confidentiality Any intellectual property in the Products is the exclu sive property of Omron Companies and Buyer shall not attempt to duplicate it in any way without the written permission of Omron Notwithstanding any charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling all engineering and tooling shall remain the exclusive property of Omron All information and materials supplied by Omron to Buyer relating to the Products are confidential and proprietary and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and strictly prevent disclosure to any third party Export Controls Buyer shall comply with all applicable laws regulations and licenses regarding i export of products or information iii sale of products to forbidden or other proscribed persons and ii disclosure to non citizens of regulated technology or information Miscellaneous a Waiver No failur
305. ost device communications I O Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 EDU End Unit Note Adjacent Unit Port A communications Port B communications Auxiliary output 1 See note Auxiliary output 2 See note Auxiliary outputs are output via an internal bus 1 2 2 Main Unit Functions Basic Units TC4 and TC2 TC4 TC2 Advanced Unit HFU e The Basic Units are modular temperature controllers with I O e There are two models of Basic Unit The TC4 with four I O channels and the TC2 with two I O channels e Up to eight G3ZA Multi channel Power Controllers or V1 1 G3PW Power Controllers A can be connected to each Basic Unit e One TC4 Unit controls temperature on 4 channels e Multi input is supported for thermocouple platinum resistance thermome ter or analog input e The type of input can be set separately for each channel e Control outputs are pulse voltage outputs e Both screw terminals and screw less clamp terminals are available e Terminal blocks can be detached and attached e One TC2 Unit controls temperature on 2 channels e Multi input is supported for thermocouple platinum resistance thermome ter or analog input e The type of input can be set separately for each channel e Control outputs are pulse voltage outputs or current outputs e Connect a current transformer CT to use the heater burnout and heater overcurrent alarms e There are two event inputs Any of the fol
306. ote EU en e 0104 0208 Local SP Monitor OHT HFRFFRSO1iOH 0000270F 1999 t0 9990 See note EU Jen e H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note EU oh je oros 0206 Bank No Monitor OH Hooo0o000 10 Hrooo0o00s 00 o e jan fe 0107 0207 MV Monitor Heating CH1 WFFFFFFOE to oooooata Eso motos gt gt Je jm Je 0108 0208 MV Montor Cooling CH1 H FFFFFFCE to H 0000041A 5 010 1050 e jm Je _ MEA eee Not used 0108 0208 Decimal Pont Montor CH1 H oooooo00 10H ooo00008 00 TE o oh e G Go Note The Remote SP Montor CH2 parameter s supporied oniy by the TOR 0300 0600 Process Value OH3 Note The Remote SP Monitor CHS parameter cannot be used Toa EN AAA NN 0400 0800 Process Value 0m4 Note The Remote SP Monitor CH4 parameter cannot be used ror Y A A a _ __ A AS Note The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection 236 Parameter List Appendix Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit Target Unit type Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 C5 85 Monitor 0100 0220 Heater Current Value 1 Monitor H 00000000 to H 0000044C 0 0 to 110 0 Pe Ja lO TC2 0101 0221 Leakage Current Value 1 Monitor H 00000000 to H 0000044C 0 0 to 110 0 Pe a ho TC2 Not used 0200 0420 Heater Current Value 2 Monitor The rest are the same as Heater Current Value 1 Mo
307. ote 1 8 bit Port C Communications Parity See note 1 Port C Communications Stop Bits See note 1 1 bit Default Programless Common settings Programless Communications Protocol NT Link 1 N Default Default Default Default Default Programless Communications Upload Data Area See note 1 Programless Communications Download Data Area See note 1 Programless Communications Upload Start Address See note 1 Programless Communications Download Start Address See note 1 1500 Upload settings Programless Upload Settings 4 Programless Upload Settings 5 Unit No 1 CH1 Process Value Unit No 1 Common Device A Status Unit No 1 CH2 Process Value Unit No 1 CH3 Process Value Unit No 1 CH4 Process Value Unit No 2 Common Device A Status Unit No 2 CH1 Process Value Unit No 2 CH2 Process Value Unit No 2 CH3 Process Value Unit No 2 CH4 Process Value Unit No 3 Common Device A Status Unit No 3 CH1 Process Value Unit No 3 CH2 Process Value Unit No 3 CH3 Process Value Unit No 3 CH4 Process Value Unit No 0 Common End Code Programless Upload Settings 6 Programless Upload Settings 7 Programless Upload Settings 8 Programless Upload Settings 9 Programless Upload Settings 10 Programless Upload Settings 11 Programless Upload Settings 12 Programless Upload Settings 13 Programless Upload Settings 14 Programless Upload Settings 15 Programless
308. otwed O A B2 us O A Bit 3 Not used Bit 4 CT2 Heater Current Updated Hold The heater current monitor has not been updated Hold because the control output ON time is less than 100 ms Will also hold when a CT is not connected Bitar B4 Note Bas nousa OOO A S o Error Channel A Status C4 84 000B Bit position _ Bit description Bitrate pts Nate Be Nate B7 Note pte Note B9 Nate Bo Notused oO a S Bu Note B2 Note Bitar B4 Note 262 Status Lists Appendix Basic Unit Expand Unit Error Status C4 84 000F Bit position Mi Bit description o an pts Mousa J o SS o o ooo Bto nous OOO O S S SSS Bo Noted OOO O S S SS Bu Noted J S S S SS Bite Noted J O S SSS Bs mous J S SS SSS B4 nouse J O SS o SSS pis Nouse O Si Note The above information also applies to the G3PW A frequency error will also cause the current to be held Basic Unit Expand Unit Alarm Status C4 84 0010 Bit position ARO Bit description Bit O Expand Unit 1 Alarm OFF ON The G3ZA1 has a heater burnout overcurrent or SSR short circuit Bit 1 Expand Unit 2 Alarm OFF ON The G3ZA2 has a heater burnout overcurrent or SSR short circuit Bit 2 Expand Unit 3 Alarm OFF ON The G3ZA3 has a heater burnout overcurrent or SSR short circuit Bit 3 Expand Unit 4 Alarm OFF ON The G3ZA4 has a heater burnout overcurrent or SSR short circuit Bit 4 Expand Unit 5 Alarm OFF ON The G3ZA5 has a heater burnout overcurrent or SSR short circuit Bit 5
309. ouble word 8 digit variable type 20 max 0014H For word 4 digit variable type 27 max 001BH 4 Response Codes Response code Emormame Cause lt 1002 Command too short The command is not long enough 1101 Area type error The corresponding variable type does not exist 1100 Bit position is not 00 Write data is out of setting range 2201 Operation error 2201 The command cannot be executed during operation 3003 Read only error An attempt was made to write to a read only variable type 7011 Operation error 7011 The command cannot be executed due to a device error 7013 Operation error 7013 The command cannot be executed because the operation command cannot be received 7015 Operation error 7015 The command cannot be executed during reset including startup 7041 Operation error 7041 The command cannot be executed in manual opera tion mode 7042 Operation error 7042 The command cannot be executed in tuning mode 0000 Normal completion Processing was completed normally 179 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 5 Composite Registration Read This service reads in order the contents of addresses specified in a variable area composite read registration E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC 0 1 1 4 0 2 e E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response Variable Read data o code type 0 1 11 0 E 2 2 4 O No of
310. ower Limit 1 to 4 and Decimal Point C1 to C4 If these parameters are not set to their defaults the Output ON Scheduling function will not operate properly This function will also be applied to manual outputs outputs during errors and outputs while stopped so these outputs may be lower than their set val ues When using the Output ON Scheduling function all of the Unit s outputs will operate with the OUT1 control period ST will be disabled when using the Output ON Scheduling Method Example 1 Delay between Outputs 0 ms Umit Control period Output ON Scheduling Method 1 4 Limit to 25 of the maximum MV Delay between Outputs MV for all channels gt i 25 108x 20 OUT1 gt Delay between Outputs O ms OUT2 gt 255 108x25 OUT3 OUT4 oe Control period 10 s Example 2 Delay between Outputs 1 s CI A O Control period Output ON Scheduling Method 1 4 Limit to 25 of the maximum MV Delay between Outputs 1 000 ms 1s MV for all channels 60 Setting Output Specifications Section 4 2 2s 10s x20 OUT1 Control period 10 s Delay between outputs for four channels Note The Delay between Outputs parameter can be set to offset the ON time for each output The delay between outputs will however cre ate an OFF period between outputs making it appear that the con trol period has increased The actual power is 2 10 4 x 100 14 3 4 2
311. pecific general prohibitions General Caution Indicates non specific general cautions warnings and dangers Mandatory Caution Vill E Safety Precautions Al CAUTION Do not touch the terminals while power is being supplied Doing so may occasionally result in minor injury due to electric shock Use a power supply that complies with the reinforced insulation specified in IEC 60664 for the EJ1 external power supply or the power supply connected to the EJ1 If non compliant power supplies are used electric shock may occasionally result in minor injury Do not allow pieces of metal wire clippings or fine metallic shav ings or filings from installation to enter the product Doing so may occasionally result in electric shock fire or malfunction Do not use the product where subject to flammable or explosive gas Otherwise minor injury from explosion may occasionally occur Never disassemble modify or repair the product or touch any of the internal parts Minor electric shock fire or malfunction may occasionally occur Tighten the terminal screws to between 0 40 and 0 56 N m Loose screws may occasionally result in fire Set the parameters of the product so that they are suitable for the system being controlled If they are not suitable unexpected operation may occasionally result in property damage or accidents A malfunction in the product may occasionally make control operations impossible or prevent alarm outp
312. placing references of G3ZA with G3PW However if the baud rate is not the same set the baud rate at the initial setting level for the G3PW to 3 57 6 kbps and reset the EJ1 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Temperature Measurement Errors Section 8 5 8 5 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Temperature Measurement Errors Error in Measured Temperature or Temperature Cannot Be Measured Sei Possible cause Countermeasure Connection The thermometer polarity or connected terminals are wrong Rewire correctly A thermometer that cannot be used with the EJ1 has been Change to a compatible thermometer connected The thermometer has burnt out short circuited or deterio Replace with a better quality thermometer rated No thermometer is connected e Connect a thermometer A compensating conductor applicable to the thermocouple Directly connect a thermocouple with a long lead has not been used e Use an applicable compensating conductor A device using metal other than a thermocouple or compen e Connect a device specifically for thermocouples sating conductor has been connected between the thermo couple and EJ1 terminals The connection terminal screws are loose and the connec e Tighten the screws securely tion is imperfect The thermocouple lead or compensating conductor is too e Use a thicker compensating conductor long and is affected by the conductor resistance e Change the wi
313. quest Bits to restart communications Register parameters in the Programless Upload Settings or Programless Download Settings of the HFU only for Units that are connected Check the following and correct any problems and then restart operation e Check the communications line lengths trunk and branch e Check the communications line for shorts breaks or looseness e Check that terminating resistance is set only on the ends on the trunk line e Check for excessive noise Correct the operation code in the ladder pro gram in the PLC Determining the Error from the Status Section 8 3 8 3 Determining the Error from the Status The EJ1 status can be checked by using communications to read the Status Status is connected to other status data in a directory tree so the cause of the error can be checked or the channels for which there are alarms can be inves tigated by searching through the directory tree for the related status m Example of Using Status Information for Troubleshooting 1 Read the Device A Status C40000 for the TC4 Unit C40000 H0004 i e bit 2 is ON gt A channel error status bit is ON 2 Read Error Channel A Status C4000B C4000B HO008 i e bit 3 is ON An error or alarm has occurred for channel 4 3 Read the Channel Status C40401 and Channel Alarm Status C40402 of channel 4 C40401 H0001 i e bit O is ON gt Operation is stopped but there is no input error
314. r methods to use the functions of the CS CJ series PLCs Describes the ladder diagram programming instructions supported by CS CJ series PLCs Provides an outlines of and describes the design installation maintenance and other basic opera tions for the CS series PLCs SYSMAC CS CJ NSJ Series CS1G H CPULILJ EV1 CS1G H CPULILJH CS1D CPULILJIH CS1D CPULILIS CJU1G CPULIL CJ1M CPULILI CJU1G CPULILIP CU1G H CPULILJH CS1W SCBLILJ V1 CS1W SCUL IL 1 V1 CJ1W SCUL 1 1 V1 CP1H XLILILILI U CP1H XALILILILI L CP1H YUOILILILI U Communications Commands Reference Manual SYSMAC CS CJ Series CS1W SCBLILI V1 CS1W SCULILI V1 CJ1W SCU21L 1 1 V1 Serial Communications Boards Units Operation Manual E CP series PLC Manuals Name CP1H X40DL 1 1 CP1H XA40DL L CP1H Y20DT D SYSMAC CP Series CP1H CPU Unit Operation Manual CP1H X40DL7 CP1H XA40DL CP1H Y20DT D SYSMAC CP Series CP1H CPU Unit Programming Manual CP1L L10DLJ L1 CP1L L14DL 1 1 CP1L L20DL1 L CP1L M30DLJ 1 J L 1 1 SYSMAC CP Series CP1L CPU Unit Operation Manual Cat No Cat No Cat No Describes the C series Host Link and FINS com munications commands used with CS CJ series PLCs Describes the use of Serial Communications Unit and Boards to perform serial communications with external devices including the usage of standard system protocols for OMRON products Contents
315. range Default Operation After Power ON 0 Continue Common 4 Stop 2 Manual Mode Conditions for use No special conditions Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes effective the next time a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power is turned ON Operation Operation Continue Manipulated e For Auto mode before power OFF 0 0 or 100 0 variable MV depends on RUN STOP status When set to RUN operation starts from the initial value When set to STOP operation starts from the MV at Stop parameter setting e For Manual mode before power OFF The manipulated variable from before power was inter rupted is maintained RUN STOP Stop Same as 2 PID control Auto Manual Retains the status that existed before power went OFF Manipulated e For Auto mode before power OFF 0 0 variable Operation starts from the MV at Stop parameter setting e For Manual mode before power OFF The manipulated variable from before power was inter rupted is maintained Manual mode RUN STOP Retains the status that existed before power went OFF Manipulated e For Auto mode before power OFF variable Operation starts from the MV at Stop parameter setting e For Manual mode before power OFF The manipulated variable from before power was inter rupted is maintained 64 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 4 3 2 Selecting
316. ransistor Use a power supply suitable for the output rating and load outputs The polarity of the load power supply for transistor outputs is Rewire correctly incorrect Setting Set the Operation After Power ON parameter to Stop e Execute a RUN start operation operation command after the power is eee ON e Set the Operation After Power ON parameter to Continue e Execute a RUN start operation operation command an event input and an unintended bank has been selected changed to an event input The deviation alarm and absolute value alarm settings for e Set the correct alarm mode alarm mode are incorrect 226 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Heater Burnout Alarm Errors Section 8 8 8 8 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Heater Burnout Alarm Errors HB Heater Burnout Alarm or Heater Burnout Not Detected Pose ese O Countermeasure Connection No current transformer CT is connected mia The CT is connected to the wrong channel EE The ON time for control output is less than 100 ms e Set the control output ON time to 100 ms or more This will make the HB alarm operate The HB alarm is not assigned to a control output or bus out Assign an HB alarm to a control output or bus output put The heater power was turned ON after operation control e Turn ON the heater power then start operation control started The heater burnout detection current is set to
317. rature for the product i is 10 to 55 C with no condensation or icing To extend the service life of the Rena install it in a location with an ambient temperature as low as possible In locations exposed to high temperatures if necessary cool the prod ucts using a fan or other cooling method Vibration and shock Check whether the standards related to shock and vibration are satis fied at the installation environment Install the product in locations where the conductors will not be subject to vibration or shock Foreign particles Install the product in a location that is not subject to liquid or foreign particles entering the product If sulfide chlorine or other corrosive gases are present remove the source of the gas install a fan or use other countermeasures to protect the product xiii Related Manuals The manuals related to the EJ1 are configured as shown in the following tables Refer to these manu als as required E EJ1 II IO 1 gt EJ1 EJ1N TC2 EJ1N TC4 LI L Describes the following information on the EJ1 e Overview and features Basic specifications EJ1N HFUL EJ1C EDUL Modular Temperature Controllers User s Manual CX Thermo Ver LI online help EST2 2C MVL E CS CJ series PLC Manuals Name W472 W473 W393 SYSMAC CJ Series CJ2H CPULJLIJ EIP CPU Unit Hardware Manual SYSMAC CJ Series CJ2H CPUL JLJ EIP CPU Unit Software Manual SYSMAC CJ Series CJ1G CPULIL CU1M CPULILJ
318. rcuit EJE circuit LS e q Transistor outputs 1 Control output 3 NS a ae Y E gt c D D D Es _ O O D E e O a a a Functional isolatior SL gt A eS 1 The CT inputs are not present on EJ1 Controllers with linear outputs 2 These are current outputs on EJ1 Controllers with linear outputs Internal Block Diagrams Section 1 3 HFU a nn ee ee ee ee ery i Event input Waveform Drive 3 q Transistor i nee h a Event input 1 Ea ES E aar Girouit Y pa outputs Auxiliary output 1 1 1 i i Waveform i Event input E q ae Drive E d Transistor z EN i ping ree V3L Auxiliary output 2 i i Event input Waveform Drive L Transistor a Event input 3 dal E aping Microcomputer circuit E 4 outputs Auxiliary output 3 Event input a Waveform Drive E Transistor r Event input 4 A V h agit V P j circuit circuit 2_ outputs Auxiliary output 4 Port C com SRAM munications circuit Port A commu Port B commu nications circuit nications circuit ______________ ___ 1 Internal buses 1 to 3 Connector between Units Connector between Units EDU oo eee Port A connector TTL conversion circuit Port A communications Port B communications i E D iz R A y D Internal bus 1 i Drive 2 Transistor emoaan D yt pu Auxiliary outpu 3 gt Internal bus 2 3 Drive Tr
319. rd CS Series only Unit CS CJ Series value rots esened Setting not required 00 Party Setingnotrequired Note 1 m D30000 100 x Unit No word address 2 When using a communications port on the CPU Unit start the CX Pro grammer and set the Host Link port settings in the PLC Settings as fol lows Mode NT Link 1 N Baud rate 115 200 Be sure to transfer the settings to the PLC 3 The same serial port on the CS CJ series Serial Communications Board Unit cannot be connected to both the EJ1 and an NS series Programma ble Terminal The following settings are also required if the models listed below are used Model Terminating resistance ON OFF switch 2 wire 4 wire switch CJ1W SCU41 V1 ON 2 CJ1W SCU31 V1 See note CS1W SCU31 V1 CS1W SCB41 V1 Note The port 2 terminating resistance switch and 2 4 wire switch are on the bot tom of the Unit 3 Set the EJ1 parameters No particular EJ1 parameter settings are required when using SYSMAC CS CJ series PLCs Leave the parameters set to their default settings When using RS 232C communications turn ON pin 8 of SW2 to select RS 232C communications For the default settings the EJ1 monitor and set values are allocated in the DM Area in the PLC as shown in the following table 121 Programless Communications Contents monitor value D00000 Read Response Bits D00001 Setting Change Response Bits Basic Operations Note 1 2 3
320. re the same when confirming operation Refer to Checking Series Operation with the MELSEC An AnS FX3UC Series on page 127 138 Programless Communications Section 5 1 5 1 4 Description of Operation Set values are read and changed and operation commands are executed by setting a value in a Request Bits allocated in a PLC memory area DM Area Mea OO O O O D00000 Read Response Bits D00001 Setting Change Response Bits D00002 Operation Command Response Bits D01500 Read Request Bits D01501 Setting Change Request Bits D01502 Operation Command Request Bits The Request Bits are set to the following values ms ale A Read Request 0000 Stop operation Stops operation after a series of operations has been completed Bits 0001 Single Reads the parameters set in the Programless Upload Setting Area once 0002 Multi Continuously reads the parameters set in the Programless Upload Set ting Area 0003 Read setting Reads the parameters set in the Programless Download Setting Area and writes them to the upload area 0004 Read setting 2 Reads the parameters set in the Programless Download Setting Area and writes them to the download area Setting Change 0000 Stop operation Stops operation after a series of operations has been completed Request Bits 0001 Single Changes all of the parameters set in the Programless Download Setting 0002 Multi The first time all of the parameters set in the Programless Download Setting are chan
321. rea around the product Do not block the ventilation holes on the product 4 Be sure to wire properly with correct polarity of terminals 5 Use specified size M3 width 5 8 mm or less crimped terminals for wiring Use a gage of AWG22 to AWG 14 equal to cross sectional area of 0 326 to 2 081 mm for power supply lines and a gage of AWG28 to AWG16 equal to cross sectional area of 0 081 to 1 309 mm for all other lines The stripping length is 6 to 8 mm Up to two wires of same size and type or two crimped terminals can be inserted into a single terminal 6 Do not wire terminals that do not have an identified use 7 To reduce inductive noise keep the wiring for the product s terminal block away from power cables carrying high voltages or large currents Also do not wire power lines together with or parallel to product wiring Using shielded cables and using separate conduits or ducts is recommended Attach a surge suppressor or noise filter to peripheral devices that generate noise in particular motors transformers solenoids magnetic coils or other equipment that have an inductance component When a noise filter is used at the power supply first check the voltage or current and attach the noise filter as close as possible to the product Allow as much space as possible between the product and devices that generate powerful high frequencies high frequency welders high frequency sewing machines etc or surge 8 Use the product
322. readout A Set the temperature difference as Input Shift 2 and set the controller read out A as Input Value 2 for Input Correction 4 After you have set the calculated values check controller readout A and control target temperature B 5 In this case the two point shift was performed near room temperature and the set point temperature but if you want to improve accuracy near the set point perform the two point shift at points above and below the set point temperature An example shift is shown in the following diagram Controller readout A Controller readout after shifting e g 550 C L Ey toning Input Shift 2 Controller readout before shifting e g 500 C H mm Ii Before shifting Input value 2 for Input Correction Input value 1 for Input Correction i Controller readout before shifting e g 40 C gt Input Shift 1 Controller readout after shifting e g 25 C 7 Control target temperature B Room temperature Temperature near set point e g 25 C e g 550 C E Two point Shift Example In this example the input type is set to K 5 200 C to 1 300 C Check the temperature of the control target When room temperature B 25 C the Controller readout A 40 C When the temperature near the set point B 550 C the Controller readout A 500 C In this case the input shift parameters are calculated as follows I
323. rective action by increasing the MV in proportion to the slope of the temperature change e Effect of Changes to P Proportional Band Increased P The curve rises gradually and the settling time is long but overshooting is prevented Set value Decreased P Overshooting and hunting occur but the set value is reached quickly and the temperature stabilizes e Effect of Changes to Integral Time Increased It takes a long time for the process value to reach the set point lt takes time to achieve a stable state but overshooting undershooting and hunting are reduced Overshooting and undershooting occur Hunting occurs The process e Effect of Changes to D Derivative Time value rises quickly Increased D Decreased D Overshooting and undershooting are increased and it takes time for the process value to reach the set point Set value Overshooting undershooting and the settling time are reduced but fine hunting occurs on the changes them selves Set value E Proportional Band x 10 Compensation When this parameter is set to Enabled the proportional band is increased by a factor of 10 Use this parameter when the proportional band setting range is insufficient Variable type Setting range Default Proportional Band x 10 0 Disabled Compensation Common 1 Enabled Conditions for use The control method must be set to 2 PID control Note When this parameter has been changed the new se
324. register 2 An XOR is taken of the contents of the CRC register and the 1st byte of the message and the result is returned to the CRC register 3 The contents of the CRC register is shifted 1 bit to the right and O is placed in the MSB 4 Ifthe bit shifted from the LSB is 0 step 3 is repeated i e the contents of the register is shifted 1 more bit If the bit shifted from the LSB is 1 an XOR is taken of the contents of the CRC register and H A001 and the result is returned to the CRC register 5 Steps 3 and 4 are repeated until the contents of the register have been shifted 8 bits to the right 6 If the end of the message has not been reached an XOR is taken of the next byte of the CRC register and the message the result is returned to the CRC register and the procedure is repeated from step 3 Frames Section 7 2 7 The result the value in the CRC register is placed in the lower byte of the message Example of Appending the Result If the calculated CRC value is H 1234 this is appended as follows to the command frame Slave Function address code Data CRC 16 Low High Be ee NES oa Bytes 1 1 2 l CRC 16 calculation range 7 2 2 Response Frames Normal Response Frames Slave Function TO address code Data CRC 16 Bytes 1 ANA 9 l CRC 16 calculation range Error Response Frames Slave Function Error address code code CRC 16 Bytes 1 1 1 9 CRC 16 calculation range Slave ad
325. ring location and shorten the wires The resistance of the 3 conductors between the thermome Use conductors with the same resistance for all three ter ter and the EJ1 terminals is different minals A B and B terminals Installation Affected by noise emitted by devices near the EJ1 e Move the EJ1 away from devices emitting noise e Connect a surge suppressor or noise filter to devices emit ting noise The thermometer lead is too close to the power line and is e Separate the thermometer lead from the power line receiving induction noise from the power line e Run the thermometer lead through a different pipe or duct from the power line e Do not wire the thermometer lead and the power line in parallel e Wire a shorter thermometer lead e Use a shield on the thermometer lead The thermal response is slow because the installation posi e Install the thermometer with the end of the protective tube tion of the thermometer is too far from the control point closer to the control point The ambient temperature of the EJ1 exceeds the rating e Keep the ambient temperature between the rating range of 10 to 55 C A wireless device is used in the vicinity of the EJ1 e Shield the EJ1 radiated from peripheral devices heat Settings The input type settings are incorrect The temperature unit settings are incorrect The measured temperature seems incorrect due to the input Set the input compensation to 0 0 compensation setting Proc
326. rm on Transformers CT page 93 OC Alarm Calculating the Heater For details refer to Calculating the Heater Burnout Detection Current Value Overcurrent on page 94 Detection Value 101 Using the Loop Break Alarm LBA Section 4 6 4 6 Using the Loop Break Alarm LBA 4 6 1 Loop Burnout Alarm LBA With a loop burnout alarm there is assumed to be an error in the control loop if the control deviation SP PV is greater than the threshold set in the LBA Level parameter and if the control deviation is not reduced by at least the value set in the LBA Band parameter within the specified LBA Detection Time LBA Level Set poit ees OO IBA Band ______ LBA Band BA Level o 7 BA Band I LBA _ Area where LBA LBA LBA Detection LBAisnot Detection Detection Detection Time ig detected i Time 1 Time ig Time y 1 2 3 4 5 A 6 A 7 A LBA OFF LBA ON LBA OFF LBA ON e If the control deviation is reduced in the area between 1 and 2 i e the set point is approached and the control deviation is reduced by at least the LBA Band the loop burnout alarm will remain OFF e The process value is within the LBA Level between 3 and 4 and thus loop burnout alarms will not be detected The loop burnout alarm will remain OFF e If the process value is outside the LBA Level between 4 and 5 and the control deviation is not reduced by at least the LBA Band value withi
327. rm value and an HS Alarm will be output 2 HS alarms are not detected if the control output heating OFF time is 100 ms or less Detection is also sometimes not possible if a contactor is used for the control output Variable type Parameter name Setting monitoring range D6 96 HS Alarm 1 or 2 I O 0 0 HS Alarm ON 100 0 See note 3 0 1 to 99 9 A 100 0 HS Alarm OFF E4 A4 HS Alarm 1 or 2 PAA A 1 to 100 0 A See note 4 A JA C5 85 Leakage Current Value 1 or 0 0to 110 0 A 2 Monitor 1 0 Conditions for use There must be a CT input 3 The HS Alarm can be forced ON or OFF regardless of the actual leakage current value by setting the HS Alarm parameter to 0 0 or 100 0 Use the 0 0 and 100 0 settings to check operation 4 This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped The hysteresis setting prevents chattering at the detection point When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes effec tive the next time a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power is turned ON e Control will be continued even when there is an HS Alarm e The rated current value may sometimes differ slightly from the actual cur rent flowing to the heater Check the current value in an actual operating state in the Leakage Current Value Monitor parameter e f there is little difference between the current in normal and abnormal states detection may become unstable To stabilize detection set a cur re
328. room wk nooo IO E0 Ja fe T 0117 0877 LBA Bana CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 010 888 9 See note 30 EU on e J Not used 0200 0560 Alarm 1 Type CH2 The rest are the same as channel 1 a ac eee refs aa Note The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the O dec imal point position setting will be treated as a setting of 1 Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit Target Unit type Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 E4 A4 0380 CT1 Assignment H 00000000 Disabled 0 1 TC2 H 00000001 Control output 1 1 H 00000002 Control output 2 2 H 00000003 Control output 3 3 H 00000004 Control output 4 4 Oo de Q O 0101 0381 Heater Burnout 1 Latch H 00000000 Disabled W H 00000001 Enabled 1 0382 Heater Burnout 1 Hysteresis H 00000001 to H 000003E8 0 1 to 100 0 dd 0383 HS Alarm 1 Latch H 00000000 Disabled 0 TC2 H 00000001 Enabled 1 BEA 0384 HS Alarm 1 Hysteresis H 00000001 to H 000003E8 0 1 to 100 0 oi A jo TC2 0385 Heater Overcurrent 1 Latch H 00000000 Disabled 0 TC2 H 00000001 Enabled 1 0106 0386 Heater Overcurrent 1 Hysteresis H 00000001 to H 000003E8 0 1 to 100 0 oi Ja ho TC2 Not used 0200 0580 CT2 Assignment The rest are the same as from CT1 Assignment to Heater Overcurrent 1 Hysteresis 250 Parameter List Appendix Var
329. rt of the set point for the PID con stants when using AT ST in normal mode executing AT ST NA in RT mode tends to improve performance Temperature Temperature Set value Set value A Time A Time Start of control Start of control e When the manipulated variable MV is saturated the amount of over shooting may be somewhat higher in comparison to PID control based on AT ST in normal mode Switching to and from RT Variable type Setting range Default E5 A5 RT Channel 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Conditions for use The control method must be set to 2 PID control and the input type must be a temperature input Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 4 3 9 Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function The Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function adjusts the control wave form when an external disturbance impacts the system e When using this function set the Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function parameter to 1 Enabled e The disturbance response waveform can be adjusted with the Distur bance Gain and Disturbance Time Constant parameters Variable type Setting range Default E5 A5 See note 1 Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment 0 Disabled Function Common 1 Enabled 82 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 Variable type Setting range Default D5 95 Disturbance Gain Channel Disturbance Time Constant 0 01 to 99 99 s 1 00 Channel Disturba
330. rvice Response PDU MRC SRC Data The MRES main response code and SRES sub response code are trans ferred in the response frame following the above MRC SRC Data is then transferred following the MRES and SRES Service Response PDU Normal Response Response code Service Response PDU FINS mini Command Text Not Executed Response code MRC SRC MRES SRES If the specified FINS mini command text could not be executed only the MRC SRC and MRES SRES are used in the target response PDUs The MRES and SRES are used in the response code when processing did not end in a normal completion Variable Type and Address Note Refer to Parameter List on page 235 Number of Elements The number of elements is expressed in 2 byte hexadecimal format The range for specifying the number of elements differs for each command Refer to 6 4 Detailed Description of Services FINS mini Text Section 6 3 6 3 4 Communications Data Setting monitor value Communications data Negative values Decimal point See note Hexadecimal Double word 8 digits 2 s complement The decimal point is removed and the result is Word 4 digits converted to hexadecimal Example 105 0 gt 1050 gt 0000041A 8 digits 105 0 gt 1050 gt 041A 4 digits Note Refer to Parameter List on page 235 6 3 5 List of FINS mini Command Services For details on each service refer to 6 4 Detailed Description of Services MRC SR
331. s For double word 8 digit variable type 20 max 0014H For word 4 digit variable type 4 Response Codes Response code Errorname Cause 1002 Command too short The command is not long enough 1101 Area type error The corresponding variable type does not exist 1100 Parameter error Bit position is not 00 Write data is out of setting range 2201 Operation error 2201 The command cannot be executed during operation 7011 Operation error 7011 The command cannot be executed due to a device error 7013 7013 Operation error 7013 The command cannot be executed because the operation command cannot be received Operation error 7014 The command cannot be executed during backup Operation error 7015 The command cannot be executed during reset including startup Operation error 7041 The command cannot be executed in manual operation mode Operation error 7042 The command cannot be executed in tun ing mode Normal completion Processing was completed normally 181 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 7 Composite Read Registration Confirmation This service reads the contents of the registration for a composite read from a variable area E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC 0 1 1 2 2 e E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response Variable Read address Bit o code type position 0 1 1 2 010 2 2 4 2 4 2 Variable Read address Bit
332. s Input 3 Assignment All channels Run 0 Stop 1 Example 2 Switch all channel banks according to the ON OFF status of the event input Outputs the ON OFF status of the event input Switches banks based on the bus ON OFF status EV1 EV2 Modei Parameter name SetValue 70 Bus Input 2 Assignment Bank for all channels bit 1 Bus Output 1 Assignment Disabled Bus Output 2 Assignment Disabled HFU TC4 TC4 EDU Note When assigning bus l O disable all bus I O assignments first and then make the settings 168 SECTION 6 CompoWay F Communications This section describes how to use communications based on communications commands 6 1 Communications SctuuneS Lis ds Ake eee eae eee eS 170 6 1 1 Communications Specifications 0 00 0 eee 170 6 1 2 Unit Number Setting oia stow nce Gane iaa 171 6 1 3 Other Communications Settings 0 0 0 0 171 6 124 Send Data Wait TIME irritar a 171 6 2 Frame ConfiguratlON o oooooooor rs rrrrrrrrrrerrrrene 172 Oo BINS mint TEARS A 174 6 521 PDUSC Geanina els da 174 6 3 2 Variable Type and Address 0 0 cece ene 174 6253 JNumber or Elements across errada 174 6 3 4 Communications Data 0 0 0 ooo 175 6 3 5 List of FINS mini Command ServiceS o o ooooooooomoo 175 6 4 Detailed Description of ServiCesS o ooooooooooorororo 176 6 4 1 Read from Variable Area 0 0 00 0c cc
333. signments Set using bus output assignments Set using auxiliary output assignments Set using bus input assignments HFU TC2 TC4 EDU BUS1 and BUS2 are connected to SUB1 and SUB2 on the EDU HFU and TC2 event inputs and auxiliary outputs can be linked Signals output to the bus can also be read at the outputting Unit itself result in unexpected operation at startup Take sufficient precautions when using bus I O 106 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Section 4 7 Bus I O Assignments Note The following diagrams show the parameters that can be set in the Bus Input 1 to 3 Assignment and Bus Output 1 to 3 Assignment parameters Refer to the Example on page 108 when setting parameters The settable parameters include those for all channels and those for individual channels 1 Bus inputs cannot be used if a Basic Unit is used without an HFU Even if an HFU is used Bus Input cannot be used for TC Units connected to the RS 485 communications lines using distributed positioning 2 Set the bus settings correctly in each Unit so that there are no conflicts in operation within the EJ1 system E Bus Input Assignments TC4 TC2 e Bus inputs 2 and 3 can be set in the same way Settable parameters e Channels 3 and 4 are supported only by the TC4 Channel 4 Channel 3 A All channels Disabled Bank bit 0 Bank bit 1 Stop 0 Run 1 Run 0 Stop 1 Auto
334. sor e Terminals A10 and B10 are not used on models with screw less clamp terminals Do not connect anything to these terminals e A G3ZA connector is located on the bottom of the Unit L TI e When wiring voltage inputs be sure to wire the correct terminals Incorrect wiring may cause the EJ1 to fail SUB4 SUB2 Port C RDB Contact input Non contact input SDB E a RDA ab SDA DO NOT USE RS 422 RS 485 ae OONA RS 232C RS 422 e Terminals A10 and B10 are not used on models with screw less clamp terminals Do not connect anything to these terminals 17 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 ED Port A connector Ml Port A connector These two ports These two ports Port A B cannot be used at Port A cannot be used at the same time the same time RS 485 RS 485 A SUB2 SUB2 Input power SUB1 These terminals are used for distributed placement of Units Port B when an HFU is used COM These terminals are used for distributed placement of Units when an HFU is used supply 24 VDC Input power supply Models with Screw Connector Terminal Terminals EDUA Block Model EDUC 2 2 2 Wiring Precautions 18 e Separate input leads and power
335. sponse frame 173 restarting the standby sequence 88 restrictions during SP ramp operation 73 reverse operation heating 68 RS 232C 4 120 124 RS 422 124 RS 422A 118 RS 485 4 120 RSP Remote SP xix RT robust tuning 81 S SAP xvii 38 217 218 219 220 scaling 32 screw less clamp terminals 19 selecting the control method 65 send data wait time 171 193 sensor input ranges 234 Serial Communications Board 118 Serial Communications Unit 118 set point limiter 71 setting changes 144 multi action 145 single action 144 stop operation 145 setting control specifications 64 setting output specifications 37 setting the set point 71 setting the SP Ramp 72 setting the unit number 3 single 140 single write to variable area 200 slave address 194 195 Smart Active Parts SAP xvii 38 217 218 219 220 SP set point xix SP tracking 75 specifications 230 ST 80 ST Stable Range 80 standard control 68 standby sequence 88 start control RUN 64 status lists 256 stop control STOP 64 support software 7 34 SYSMAC CS CJ Series 119 120 134 137 T TC2 xix 6 17 TC4 xix 6 16 temperature controller error 166 temperature inputs 52 temporary AT execution judgment deviation 79 terminal arrangement 16 terminating resistance 23 thermocouple 51 234 three position control 66 transfer output 62 twisted pair cable 24 two point shift 54 55 U
336. ssible cause Countermeasure The Smart Active Part SAP There is no power supply to Supply power from the EDU power does not communicate with the the EJ1 supply terminal EJ The Programmable Terminal Referto the Programmable Terminal connection is incorrect RS 422A Converter and EJ1 manu als and wire the connection correctly The SAP is not compatible Use a SAP for the EJ1 with the EJ1 The SAP is not for direct con Use a SAP for direct Programmable nection Terminal connection Connection CJ1W CIF11 RS 422A Converter Connection port Connection port Port A Port B EJ1 Port A EDU The RS 422A switch settings are incorrect An E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable is con nected to port A and the CX Thermo Support Software is started The Programmable Terminal communications conditions are different from the EJ1 communications settings Refer to the product manual and make the correct switch setting for the communications conditions The CX Thermo Support Software and Programmable Terminals cannot be used at the same time Close the CX Thermo Support Soft ware if using Programmable Termi nals To temporarily use the CX Thermo Support Software either turn OFF the Programmable Terminal or move the Programmable Terminal to the System Screen and stop Program mable Terminal communications Move the Programmable Terminal to the System Screen and set the com munications destin
337. st be set to an upper and lower limit alarm upper and lower limit range alarm or upper and lower limit alarm with standby sequence Note The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection Refer to 4 7 1 Bank Function for details on banks 4 4 3 Alarm Hysteresis e The hysteresis of alarm outputs when alarms are switched ON OFF can be set as follows Upper limit alarm limit Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm limit alarm Alarm Hysteresis e Alarm Hysteresis O TT A Alarm value ies value e Alarm hysteresis can be set separately for each alarm Variable type Setting range Default E3 A3 Alarm 1 to 3 Hysteresis Channel 0 1 to 999 2 EU Conditions for use The alarm type must not be set to O Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the O decimal point position setting will be treated as setting 1 i 87 Setting Alarm Specifications Section 4 4 4 4 4 Standby Sequence The standby sequence can be used so that an alarm will not be output until the process value leaves the alarm range once and then enters it again For example with a lower limit alarm the process value will normally be below the set point e within the alarm range when the power supply is turned ON causing an alarm to be output If the lower limit alarm with standby sequence is
338. sts on page 2 fe fan te i 2008 0088 Ohannel Siatus OH See Status isis on page 2 fan fe 7 8000 0080 internal SP CHT ___ H FFFFF8S1 to H 0000270F 199910 9989 See note 2 Eu on e M 2000 0080 imemaiSP CH2 H FFFFF881 to H 0000270F 1999 10 9999 See note 2 eu on fe M 200 foose intemal SP cHS W FFFEFES to H 0000Z7Or 199910 9999 See noe 2 feo fen fe H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 2 EU ch 8010 8090 MV Monitor ieaing CH1 H EFFFFFCE 10 H 0000081A 5010 1050 e en fe 8011 0091 MV Monitor Heating CH2 H FEFFEFOE to H o000041A 5 010 1050 gt n e EA l MS CS CA CA E O E A o rea Boe ages Leakage Current Value 1 Moni H 00000000 to H 0000044C 0 to 110 gt CN 8016 0096 Heater Current Value 2 Monitor H 00000000 to H 0000044C 0 0 to 110 0 Pee Ja jo TC2 E TR Leakage Current Value 2 Moni H 00000000 to H 0000044C 0 0 to 110 0 ae e e 235 Parameter List Appendix Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range type Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 Can be Not used cc 0003 Set Point CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 2 Jeu ch e J operation 0004 Alarm Value 1 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 2 EU ch J 0005 Alarm Upper Limit Value 1 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 19
339. t nia 1 Current when there is a burnout 10 A x 3 x Current when there is a burnout 10 A x 3 x br 15A 10A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load line is as fol lows Heater burnout detection current sti 16 15 A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load is as follows Heater burnout detection current A 13 65 A To enable detection in either case use 16 1 A as the heater burnout detection current 96 Detecting Current Errors Section 4 5 b Star Connection Example Using Three 200 VAC 2 kW Heaters Normal Operation 5 8 A gt Load 200 V E Load Heater example 200 V L D 5 8 A gt O CT 200 V To CT input a 5 8 A gt CT To CT input When each phase s current is normal the current is 5 8 A 10 A x 7 3 Heater Burnout Occurred Burnout 5A 200 V Load Heater 200 V Load Heater example example 200 V 200 V To CT input Burnout To CT input To CT input 1 2 l 1 C t when th isab t 10A E a Current when there is a burnout 10 A x le x urrent when there is a burnou x a x gt E 5A ME 5A With this configuration the heater burnout detection current is as follows Heater burnout detection current SE pa 5 4 A 97 Detecting Current Errors Section 4 5 c V Connection Example Using Two 200 VAC 2 kW Heaters Normal Operation To CT input Load Heater example
340. t alarm or heater overcurrent alarm Check the wiring for the input or remote SP input to be sure it is wired correctly not broken and not shorted Also check the input type Read status to determine the nature of the error and take appropriate measures Check the connection to the G3ZA and take appropriate measures Read the Error Channel A Status the Channel Status and the Channel Alarm Status to deter mine the channel with the alarm and the nature of the alarm and take appropriate measures status TO Possible causes Countermeasure 208 Red lit The power supply to the PLC was interrupted after communi cations were established between the PLC and EJ1 The communications cable was broken after communications were established between the PLC and EJ1 Parameters for a Unit that does not exist were registered in the Programless Upload Settings or Programless Download Settings of the HFU An error has occurred in pro gramless communications An illegal operation command code was written to the program less download area in the PLC Supply power to the PLC If the Operation Command Response Bits in the Programless Upload Area set in PLC memory are EEEE write FFFF to the Operation Com mand Request Bits to restart communications Connect the cable If the Operation Command Response Bits in the Programless Upload Area set in PLC memory are EEEE write FFFF to the Operation Com mand Re
341. t only for channel 1 for the TC2 3 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection N Caution When remote SP is enabled ST will be disabled e If autotuning starts during remote SP operation autotuning will be executed with the SP that existed when autotuning started After autotuning is com pleted control will start based on the remote SP value e The remote SP cannot be used as a reset condition for a standby sequence e Effective Range of the Remote SP The following diagram shows the internal SP that will actually be used in control if the remote SP s range is wider than the input range or SP limiter range 74 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 lt Remote SP range gt lt Input range gt SP Limiter range If the remote SP exceeds the SP If the remote SP exceeds the upper Lower Limit the internal SP is limit of the input range the internal limited to the SP Lower Limit SP is limited to the sensor s upper limit value Note The remote SP s range will not be changed automatically even if the input type or SP Limiter is changed Switching between Use an event input or operation command to switch between the remote SP the Remote SP and and local SP When using an event input for switching set the Event Input Local SP Assignment to Local SP 0 Remote SP 1 After making the event input set ting the SP will operate as shown in the following
342. table Event input Selects the local SP Selects the remote SP Note Refer to 6 4 11 Operation Commands for details on using an oper ation command to switch the SP E SP Tracking If SP Tracking is enabled the local SP inherits the remote SP value when the SP is switched from the remote SP to the local SP The following diagram shows how the SP mode is switched when SP Tracking is enabled Pi Remote SP RSP input LSP1 gt J Time 1 2 3 1 When the SP is at LSP1 and operation is switched to the remote SP the SP switches to RSP2 2 The SP progresses according to the remote SP input 3 Ifthe SP Tracking function is enabled when control is switched to the local SP the SP will become LSP2 If SP Tracking is disabled the SP will remain LSP1 e If the SP Ramp function was enabled when operation switched from the local SP to the remote SP the SP ramp function will operate 75 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 Variable type Setting range Default E5 A5 See note SP Tracking Channel 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Conditions for use The Remote SP function must be enabled Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped SP tracking can be used for channel 1 or channel 2 for the TC4 but only for channel 1 for the TC2 4 3 7 Setting the Manipulated Variable MV E Manual MV If control is set to manual mode the standard control function will stop and t
343. tage Power consumption at maximum load 5Wmax awm fwe p Sensor inputs Thermocouple K J T E L U N R S B W PLII EN ee Platinum resistance Pt100 JPt100 thermometer Infrared Thermosensor 10 to 70 C 60 to 120 C 115 to 165 C 140 to 260 C f e Analog Current input 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA input impedance 150 Q max EN np Voltage input 1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V input impedance 1 MQ min Control outputs Voltage output Output voltage 12 VDC Load current 21 mA with short circuit protection circuit Transistor output Max operating voltage 30 VDC Max load current 100 mA Residual voltage 1 5 V max Leakage current 0 4 mA max Current output 4 to 20 mA DC resolution approx 2 800 0 to 20 mA DC resolution approx 3 500 Load 500 2 max Auxiliary outputs transistor outputs Max operating voltage 30 VDC max load current 50 mA residual voltage 1 5 V max leakage current 0 4 mA max re ON Residual voltage 1 5 V max OFF Leakage current 0 1 mA max Controtmethod PID or ONOFFoontrol e Setting method Via communications Other functions Depend on the model Operating 10 C to 55 C Stored 25 C to 65 C with no icing or condensation Operating 25 to 85 Stored 25 to 85 HB Heater Burnout Alarms HS Heater Short Alarms and OC Heater Overcurrent Alarm Maximum heater current Single Phase 100 A AC Input current indication accuracy 5 FS 1 digit
344. the Control Method The control method can be set to either 2 PID control or ON OFF control Variable type Setting range Default PID OnOff Channel 0 2 PID control 1 ON OFF control Conditions for use No special conditions Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped ON OFF Control In ON OFF control the control output turns OFF when the currently controlled temperature reaches a preset set point When the manipulated variable turns OFF the temperature begins to fall and the control output is turned ON again This operation is repeated at a certain level The Hysteresis Heating param eter determines how much the temperature must fall before the control output is turned ON again Also the Direct Reverse Operation parameter determines whether the manipulated variable is increased or decreased in response to an increase or decrease in the process value E Hysteresis ON OFF control incorporates a hysteresis setting to stabilize operation when switching ON and OFF The width of the hysteresis loop determines the sensi tivity e The control output heating and control output cooling hysteresis set tings are made with the Hysteresis Heating and Hysteresis Cooling parameters respectively e The sensitivity of standard control heating or cooling is set with the Hys teresis Heating parameter regardless of the setting of the Direct Reverse Operation parameter e The Hysteresis Cooling parameter
345. the condition in which it is shipped 1 2 3 1 Connect the G3ZA to a Basic Unit Up to eight G3ZA Units can be connect ed to one Basic Unit If more than eight Units are connected a configura tion error will Occur 2 Turn ON pin 7 of SW2 on the Basic Unit set SW2 on the G3ZA to 3 57 6 kbps and set SW1 on the G3ZA to between 0 and 15 unit number The unit number of the G3ZA determines the MV sent from the Basic Unit For details refer to Sending MVs to the G3ZA on page 110 108 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Connection Example 3 Section 4 7 Turn ON the power supply to the Basic Unit and execute a Register Unit Configuration Reset operation command No G3ZA Units are registered in the default Basic Unit settings Turn OFF the power supply to the Basic Unit and then turn ON the power supply in the following order G3ZA Units and then the Basic Unit When the Basic Unit starts it will automatically scan for connected G3ZA Units Check the Configuration Error A Status to see if any errors have occurred If there are no errors execute a Register Unit Configuration Register op eration command Always execute this command If the configuration is not registered correctly and the configuration cannot be recognized correctly unexpected outputs may occur from the G3ZA Power Controllers for the outputs from the Basic Units When the EJ1 starts it scans the connected G3ZA Power Controllers and automatically assigns names
346. tings are used Setting range Default Setting method Unitmumber 0063 oT Swiiswa Port B communications 0 CompoWay F 0 CompoWay F ie protocol 1 Modbus SW2 Port B communications 3 9 6 3 9 6 kbps Communication or baud rate 4 19 2 SW2 5 38 4 6 57 6 7 115 2 kbps 192 Communications Settings Section 7 1 Setting range Defaut Setting method Port B communications 0 None 1 Even bit Communications parity 1 Even 2 a bit time Note 1 Always set the port B communications protocol to Modbus 1 With ver sion WAM if No 3 of SW2 is ON when the power is turned ON the pro tocol is set to Modbus regardless of the port B communications protocol setting 2 The port B communications data length and port B communications stop bits settings do not need to be changed When using an Interface Converter e g K3SC set the communications data length for the Interface Converter to 8 bits and set the communica tions stop bits according to the following If the port B communications parity is 0 None then set the communica tions stop bits to 2 bits If the port B communications parity is 1 Even or 2 Odd then set the communications stop bits to 1 bit 7 1 2 Unit Number Setting The unit number is set first The setting is made on SW1 and SW2 on the front of the EJ1 For information on the setting method refer to 1 1 4 Using Setting Switches 7 1 3 Other Communications Settings The comm
347. tments ON OFF control is operating e Execute P control or PID control The control cycle is too long for the control system with its Shorten the control cycle fast thermal response The overlap band in the heating and cooling control is set to Set to an overlap band a dead band by mistake Hunting The troubleshooting items for connection and setting problems are the same as for overshooting and under shooting above A Possible cause Countermeasure Procedure The heater s heating capacity is too large for the heating e Use a heater with a heating capacity suitable for the control capacity of the control target target There is periodic disturbance which changes the heating e Change to an environment with as little periodic distur capacity of the control target bance Executing autotuning AT e Hunting will not occur once autotuning has been completed 225 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Output Errors Section 8 7 8 7 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Output Errors No Control Outputs No Alarm Outputs Ss easter Connection Measured temperature is wrong e Perform the action outlined in 7 5 The load polarity or connected terminals are wrong e Rewire correctly A load exceeding the output rating is connected e Reduce the load to within the rating e Get the Unit repaired if it is malfunctioning No power supply for the load is connected to the t
348. to 9999 See note 1 o EU BANK e H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 o EU BANK 02B6 Bank 3 Proportional Band H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 9 See note 2 EU BANK Cooling CH1 i 02B7 Bank 3 Integral Time H 00000000 to H 00000F9F 0 to 3999 233 s BANK Cooling CH1 0118 02B8 Bank 3 Derivative Time H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 0 to 999 9 40 0 s BANK Cooling CH1 i Not used 0200 04A0 Bank 3 Set Point CH2 The rest are the same as channel 1 a 6300 06A0 Bank SSetPont OOOO TA A a E COCO dT ws wes es a es ae ae o o 4 N O 241 Parameter List Appendix Vari CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit Target Unit i pie Category Add Address TC4 ype ress CHEN D4 94 Soho 0100 02CO Present Bank Set Point CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK during 0101 02C1 Present Bank Proportional Band CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 1 to 9999 See note 2 8 0 EU BANK s operation 0102 02C2 Present Bank Integral Time CH1 H 00000000 to H 00000F9F 0 to 3999 BANK 0103 02C3 Present Bank Derivative Time CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 0 to 999 9 BANK 0104 02C4 Present Bank SP Ramp Rise Value CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 to 9999 See note 1 EU s or BANK EN Function stops when set to 0 EU min BANK E 0105
349. ts have been 146 set by the PLC the EJ1 reads the operation command code set in PLC mem ory and accepts the operation command To execute an operation command set the operation command code in the PLC memory words corresponding to the Programless Download Settings and then set the Operation Command Request Bits Note Refer to 5 1 5 Operation Command Codes for Programless Com munications for information on operation command codes e Single Operation Command Operation commands are accepted only once PLC H o o D Y 0 D 3 Q lt H D 3 Q lt n 0 Read Request Bits Setting Change Setting Change Response Bits Request Bits e 1 n 2 Communications n 3 ZZZZ Status Monitor value m4 Set alue G The EJ1 reads the operation command code Read Response Bits 2 The Operation Command Request Bits are set by the PLC 5 PLC Upload Area Download Area y MeSponse Read Request Bits Setting Change Setting Change 0000 0000 o al Mm 3 Communications n43 q Status 6 The EJ1 clears the Operation Command Response Bits 5 The Operation Command Request Bits are cleared by the PLC Programless Communications Section 5 1 e Multi Operation Commands Initially accepts the operation command set in the operation command code then accepts operation commands each time the operation com mand code changes 2 The Operation Command Response
350. tting becomes effective the next time a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power is turned ON 67 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 E Setting the Alpha This parameter sets the 2 PID constant alpha a Note Normally this parameter is left at its default value Variable type Setting range D5 95 Alpha Channel 0 00 to 1 00 0 65 4 3 3 Selecting the Output Mode Either standard control or heating cooling control can be selected as the out put method Variable type Setting range Default Output Mode Selection 0 Standard control Channel 4 Heating cooling control Conditions for use No special conditions Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped Standard Control This mode performs standard heating or cooling control Set the Direct Reverse Operation parameter to reverse operation for heating control or direct operation for cooling control E Direct Operation Cooling and Reverse Operation Heatin Direct operation cooling refers to control where the manipulated variable is increased in response to an increase in the process value Alternatively reverse operation heating refers to control where the manipulated variable is decreased in response to an increase in the process value Manipulated variable Manipulated variable 100 a 100 NS 0 Time 0 Time A A Low Set value High Low Set value High temperature temperature temperature temperature Direct
351. tuations are not considered here so take that into account when setting the detection current 93 Detecting Current Errors Section 4 5 To CT input Load Heater example AC line To CT input Calculating the Heater Calculate the set value with the following equation Burnout Detection Normal current value Burnout current value Current Value Set value rr e To set the value of the heater burnout when two or more heaters are con nected through the CT use the current value of the smallest heater con nected When all of the heaters have the same current value use the current value when one of the heaters has burned out e Be sure that the following conditions are satisfied Heater with a current of less than 10 0 A Current value at normal operation Current value at heater burnout 1 A When the difference is less than 1 A detection is unstable Heater of current 10 0 A or more Current value at normal operation Current value at heater burnout gt 2 5 A When the difference is less than 2 5 A detection is unstable e The setting range is 0 1 to 99 9 A Heater burnout is not detected when the setting is 0 0 or 100 0 When the set value is 0 0 the HB alarm is turned OFF When the set value is 100 0 the HB alarm is turned ON e Set the total current value at normal heater operation to 100 A or less 94 Detecting Current Errors Section 4 5 m Examples 1 Single phase Heaters Example 1 Using a 200 VAC
352. tup Section 2 Preparations describes the preparations required to use the EJ1 including installation wir ing and switch settings e Application Examples Section 3 Typical Control Examples describes the basic applications of the EJ1 using specific con trol examples e Functions of EJ1 Basic Units TC4 TC2 Section 4 Basic Units TC4 and TC2 Functions describes the functions of EJ1 Basic Units e Functions of the EJ1 Advanced Unit HFU Section 5 Advanced Unit HFU Functions describes the functions of EJ1 Advanced Unit e Operation Using Communications Section 6 Compo Way F Communications and Section 7 Modbus Communications describe how to use communications based on communications commands e Troubleshooting Section 8 Errors and Error Processing describes methods for checking possible problems in opera tion depending on classifications of Temperature Controller status e Specifications and Parameter Lists Appendix provides specifications parameter lists status lists and other reference information N WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in per sonal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given xxiii Functional Upgrades XXIV The EJ1C EDUC NFLK with
353. ty error The OR of 1 bits in received data does not match the setting 2 for the communications parity Stop bitis 0 12 Overrun error The next data was received when the reception data buffer 3 was full 3 The calculated BCC value is different from the received BCC value 1 14 Format error The FINS mini command text contains characters other than 7 O to 9 and A to F For details on the echoback test refer to 6 4 10 Echoback Test SID and the FINS mini command text are not included Sub address error The sub address is not included 6 Frame length error The received frame exceeds the specified number of bytes Normal completion Command processing was completed normally E End Code Example When the Sub address SID and FINS mini Command Text Are Not Included e Command STX UnitNo ETX BCC e Te e Response S Unit No Sub address End code ETX BCC TX Se e al The sub address is 00 and the end code is 16 Sub address error 173 FINS mini Text 6 3 FINS mini Text 6 3 1 Section 6 3 The FINS mini command and response text is the text that form the command and response communications PDU Structure Command Text Response Text 6 3 2 6 3 3 174 Note The structure of the FINS mini command text and FINS mini response text are described below An MRC main request code and SRC sub request code followed by the various required data is transferred in the command frame Se
354. umbers 1 3 5 and 7 The following diagram shows the relationship between the G3PW Units and the EJ1 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Section 4 7 Settings A On eua Cr Tai Unit 1 gt G3PW1 aa Tae Tas ds les los Unit 3 gt G3PW2 aa e HE e Unit 5 gt G3PW3 eel Esa Sao ole CUSA MH SHE ee E all el Sel el ie G3PW Fel Unit No 1 Unit No 3 Unit No 5 Unit No 7 Communications unit No Variable type DA 9A G3PW1 Internal Duty Setting G3PW1 Base up Value 3 G3PW2 Internal Duty Setting G3PW2 Base up Value 5 G3PW3 Internal Duty Setting G3PW3
355. unications protocol communications band rate communications data length communications parity and send data wait time are set using the CX Thermo Support Software When the above settings are changed the changes will not be enabled until the EJ1 is reset or the power is cycled With V1 2 the communications protocol and baud rate can be set on switch SW2 Refer to Setting Switch 2 SW2 Settings on page 4 for the setting pro cedure 7 1 4 Send Data Wait Time The send data wait time setting is used to adjust the time the host computer takes to switch from sending to receiving Specifically the send data wait time for the EJ1 is the time from after a response has been created after data has been received until the EJ1 switches to sending Host device Send status Send N 4 Receive Receive Send eJt Reoeive status Sendstatu Response created Send data wait time The setting of the Send Wait Time parameter can be shortened to reduce the communications time at the host device as long as there are no problems 193 Frames Section 7 2 7 2 Frames Modbus Communications Protocol Commands from the host computer and responses from the EJ1 take the form of frames that conform to the Modbus RTU protocol The data included in command frames and response frames is described in this section In the following descriptions an H before a numeric value for example H 02 indicates that the value is a hexa
356. used o used Common Port C Communications Baud Rate HFU i a i H 00000006 57 H 00000007 0022 A222 H 00000000 7 0 Common H 00000001 i p a Port C Communications Data Length HFU rr 0023 A223 Port B Communications oy a H 00000000 None 0 Common pn conn row oro FE Bal eT 0024 A224 Port B Communications Stop Bits TC4 TC2 H 00000000 1 0 Common pao Port C Communications Stop Bits HFU P 090000017 24 Droi A peje e 0025 A225 Port B Send Wait Time TC4 TC2 H 00000000 to H 00000063 0 to 99 15 ms Common era Port C Send Wait Time HFU an pao e 0026 A226 Port A Communications Send Wait Time H 00000001 to H 00000063 1 to 99 1 ms Common e je Not used 0029 A229 Proportional Band x10 Compensation H 00000000 Disabled 0 Amen H 00000001 Enabled 1 0030 A230 Programless Communications Protocol 2 isc il H 00000002 NT Link 1 N 2 Not used H 00000004 AnA AnU CPU common commands 4 H 00000005 MC protocol format 5 5 0031 A231 Programless Communications Upload Data H 00000000 DM 0 Common Area H 00000001 EMO NT Link 1 N H 00000002 EM1 H 00000003 EM2 H 00000004 EM3 I 5 H 0000000D EMC 13 MC protocol format 5 H 00000000 Data register D 0 H 00000001 Link register W 1 H 00000002 File register R 2 0032 A232 Programless Communications Download Data H 00000000 DM 0 Common Area H 00000001 EMO 1 NT Link 1 N H 000000
357. ust be disabled Note 1 This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 2 The function is stopped if this parameter is set to 0 The unit is determined by the setting of the SP Ramp Time Unit parameter The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection Refer to 4 7 1 Bank Function for details on banks Note Refer to 4 4 8 Alarm SP Selection for details on alarms during SP ramp operation Operation at Startup If the SP ramp function is enabled when the Controller is turned ON or switched from STOP to RUN mode the process value may reach the set point using the SP ramp function in the same way as when changing the set point SP ramp operation at startup depends on the relationship between the pro cess value and the set point as shown in the following diagrams SP PV lt SP SP PV gt SP Falling SP ramp lt _ ie SP Process value N SP r gt Process value A Time i Time Power ON Power ON Restrictions during e Autotuning is started after the SP ramp operation has been completed SP Ramp Operation e The SP ramp operation will continue even if operation is switched to man ual mode e When control is stopped or an error occurs the SP ramp function will be disabled e When starting SP ramp operation always switch from STOP to RUN mode in Auto Mode 4 3 6 Remote SP The remote SP function uses another channel s input as the set point for con trol To operate the function s
358. uts resulting in property damage To maintain safety in the event of malfunction of the product take appropriate safety measures such as installing a monitoring device on a separate line 1X Precautions for Safe Use Be sure to observe the following precautions to prevent operation failure malfunction or adverse affects on the performance and functions of the product Not doing so may occasionally result in unexpected events 1 The product is designed for indoor use only Do not use the product outdoors or in any of the following locations e Places directly subject to heat radiated from heating equipment e Places subject to splashing liquid or oil atmosphere e Places subject to direct sunlight e Places subject to dust or corrosive gas in particular sulfide gas or ammonia gas e Places subject to intense temperature change e Places subject to icing or condensation e Places subject to vibration or strong shocks 2 Use and store the product within the rated ambient temperature and humidity ranges Mounting two or more Temperature Controllers side by side or mounting Temperature Controllers above each other may cause heat to build up inside the Temperature Controllers which will shorten their service life If the Temperature Controllers are mounted above each other or side by side use forced cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the Temperature Controllers 3 To allow heat to escape do not block the a
359. ve Time D parameters Note Refer to 4 3 8 Tuning for details on autotuning or self tuning ST with AJA Variable type Parameter name Setting range Default D0 90 Proportional Band BANK 0 1 to 999 9 EU See note 1 Integral Time BANK O to 3999 Seconds Derivative Time BANK 0 0 to 999 9 Seconds Conditions for use The control method must be set to 2 PID control Note 1 Refer to 4 7 1 Bank Function for details on banks 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the 0 decimal point position setting will be treated as setting 1 e Proportional action In proportional action the MV is proportional to the deviation control error e Integral action This control action produces an output that is propor tional to the time integral of the control error An off set normally occurs in proportional control so proportional action is used in combination with inte gral action As time passes this offset disappears and the control temperature process value matches the set point 66 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 e Derivative action This control action produces an output that is propor tional to the rate of change of the input Since propor tional control and integral control correct for errors in the control result the control system will be slow to respond to sudden changes in temperature The derivative action performs a cor
360. within the rated load and power supply 9 Make sure that the rated voltage is attained within two seconds of turning ON the power using a switch or relay contact If the voltage is applied gradually the power may not be reset or output malfunctions may occur 10 Make sure that the product has 30 minutes or more to warm up after turning ON the power before starting actual control operations to ensure the correct temperature display 11 The switch or circuit breaker must be within easy reach of the operator and must be marked as a disconnecting means for this unit 12 Do not use paint thinner or similar chemical to clean with Use standard grade alcohol Design the system e g the control panel allowing leeway for the delay required before product outputs are valid after turning ON power to the product 14 Never touch the electronic components connectors or patterns on product boards with your bare hands Always hold the product by the case Inappropriately handling the product may occasionally damage internal components due to static electricity sh z 15 Use a switch relay or other device with contacts to turn OFF the power supply quickly Gradually lowering the voltage of the power supply may result in incorrect outputs or memory errors 16 Do not touch the electronic components with your hands or subject them to shock when removing the terminal block 17 Connect only the specified number of products in only a specified confi
361. xpand Unit 1 Alarm 263 Expand Unit 2 Alarm 263 Expand Unit 3 Alarm 263 Expand Unit 4 Alarm 263 Expand Unit 5 Alarm 263 Expand Unit 6 Alarm 263 Expand Unit 7 Alarm 263 Expand Unit 8 Alarm 263 Basic Unit Expand Unit Error Status TC4 TC2 263 Expand Unit 1 Error 263 Expand Unit 2 Error 263 Expand Unit 3 Error 263 Index Expand Unit 4 Error 263 Expand Unit 5 Error 263 Expand Unit 6 Error 263 Expand Unit 7 Error 263 Expand Unit 8 Error 263 Basic Units TC4 and TC2 6 bus I O assignments 107 bus output assignment 167 C CO Status HFU 266 Communications Writing 266 EEPROM 266 Write Mode 266 CO Status TC4 TC2 256 Alarm Output 1 256 Alarm Output 2 256 Alarm Output 3 256 AT Execute Cancel 256 Auto Manual 256 Communications Writing 256 EEPROM 256 Input error 256 RUN STOP 256 SP Mode 256 Write Mode 256 calculating input shift values 54 calculating the heater burnout detection current value 94 calculating the heater overcurrent detection value 101 calculating the heater short detection current value 100 ch Channel xix changing the bank 104 Channel Alarm Status TC4 TC2 265 Alarm 1 265 Alarm 2 265 Alarm 3 265 HB Alarm 265 Heater Overcurrent 265 HS Alarm 265 MV Limiter Reverse Operation 265 OC Alarm 265 Set Point Limiter Out of Range 265 Set Value Limiter Reverse Operation 265 Channel Status TC4 TC2 265 AT Execute Cancel 265 Auto Manu
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search